spanish course - forgotten books

SPAN I SH COURSE

E . C. H I L L S AND J. D. M. FORD

“DI“A "K l 'm m u m W l 'm

Authodaed by the Mlnlater of for Ontario

TOR ONTO

me cope CLARK COMPANY ammo

Spanish grammar and to il lustrate them bymeans of abun

The amount of formal grammar given in each Lesson is

tions to the general rules.

memory in either Spanish or English as the teacher prefers.

The words used in the exercises are l imited as far as pos

sible to those in common use, and they are given, for the

most part, in the connected discourse of descriptive and

narrative passages. Each Lesson has a special vocabularyof new words, and at the end of the book there is a generalvocabulary which contains al l the words that are used in the

The Spanish passages in the exercises are fol lowed by

be used by many teachers, al though some may prefer toformulate their own questions.

The treatment of verbs, which fol lows the Lessons proper,is unusual ly complete, and it includes reference l ists of

irregular verbs and of those that require a preposition beforean infinitive.

Verbs

1 7- 20

IX .

X. Demonstratives. NumeralsXI .

Dative andaccusative_

cases .,Apocopated

adjectives

articl e

50—61

70- 74

R adical -changing verbs. Feminine el .

Neuter lo

I nflection of adjectives. VerbsXXI I -XXI I I . Definite articl e . Verbs

XXI V. N egatives. Changes'

in spe l l ing .

F uture andconditional . Months. Days0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 20- 125

perfect subjunctive

146- 1 51

XXXVI I I .

Omission of articl es. Possessives

XLV.

Verbs

L . Augmentatives and diminuti ves . VerbsTun VansList of radical -chang

ing, -uir , and irregular verbs

L ist of verbs requiring a preposition before a dependent

277- 281

MAP or Son'ra Ausmcn

MAP or SPAI N

Mas on- Max im

F I R ST SPAN I SH COUR SE

1 . Castil ian forms the basis of both the spoken and the.

written language of cul tivated Spaniards and Spanish

2. The fol lowing l ist giv es the signs comprised in the

Spanish or Castil ian alphabet w ith the usual Castil ian names

t (a). c(ce). cl iche). d(de). e (e). f (efe). w e). h(hache) .

M eta ).woo). Kale). N el le) .M eme).Meme) . new . oto). rune).um ).um ).we).um).w e

. or u re) , [writable t iequis). r (imega ).z(zcta or soda ) .

Observe that ch, 11, and a figure as distinct signs in the Spanish

alphabet. I n the dictionary, words and syl labl es beginning w ith ch,

mand fl are found after those beginning with c, l , and n respcctively.

a a of father: padre.

e (l ) a of mate : mesa, table ; (2) e of met, before a

consonant (except n or s) in the same syl lable, before rr , andin the diphthong ei (c . ey) pape l , paper ; ser, to be ; muerto,dead; defecto, defect; perro, dog ; l ey, law .

i = ee of meet: l ibro, book.

0 a (1 ) o of note : todo,al l ; (2) o of not before a consonantin the same syl labl e, before rr, M d in the diphthong e i (orey) : sol , sun; seflor, sir ; con, wuk; gorra, cap; soy, I am.

The vowels are of medium length or short; theyhave the diphthongal sounds heard in the Engl ish long a

(fate) , long a (no) , etc. There should not be prefixed

to u the y element which it has in such Engl ish words as

tube, pure, etc. I n the conjunction y, and, the sound is that

is given to final y, as in may, very; in other positions the yhas nearly the sound of Eng l ish 3; in yet.I n the western countries of South America, esmcial ly in

Chile , the final y of Castil ian is frequently supplanted by i,as in mat for may, very, i for y, and, etc.

4. Vow el Combinations. When two adjacent vow els

in a word combine into a single syl lable, they form a diph

thong ; when three do so, they form a triphthong .

5. Diphthongs. These are constituted when one of the

strong vowels, a, e,o, combines with one of the weak vowels,i, it; thus,

or when two w eak vowel s combine ; thus,

in ui.

I f the second el ement is i and occurs at the end of a word,it is w ritten y, as in may, soy, etc.

When the syl lable containing the diphthong is accented,the stress fal l s on the strong element, if there be one ; otherwise it fal ls on the second of the two weak v ow els.

The various combinations, in an accented syl labl e,may beil lustrated by these words :

bel l e, dance; hey, there is (an )fiesta

,flute

PRONUNCIATION 3

o. No diphthong , but two distinct syl lableo, wil l be the resul t, (1 )

(2 ) when the accent fal ls on a weak

or (3) when two edjoining weak vowels are pronounced separate ly.“

6. Tfiphthongm— There are but four of these ; they are

weak vowels. F inal l of a word is written y. The combina

M M E M M WM u hmM W t/w bemuni my). w t m M n: ma m

buoy,”

7. Of the consonants, f, m, and p may be said to have

of Eng l ish ch in church. I ! is silent : hora,hour ; but h fromt was pronounced as late as the sixteenth century : haccr

(from fazer) . K has the Eng l ish sound and occurs only inforeign words . Q nev er occurs except with a fol low ing it,andthe two together mean k ; moreover they can appear onlybefore e or i, as in equal , that, guitar, to take away. Wis

found onl y in foreign words and has the foreign v alue ; the

sound of the Engl ish w , as in wel l , etc., is possessed by theSpanish unaccented u in hiatus before another vowel , as incuestidn, question, cuando, when, etc. The other consonants

8. 8, v .— These have one and the same value which is

usual ly that of a bilabial spirant. I t is given to neither of

them in Eng l ish, and is produced by bringing the l ips quite

4 FIRST SPANISH COURSE

close to each other and al lowing the air to pass out constantlybetween them; there is no stoppage of the air as in the case

of the Eng l ish b. The sound of the Eng l ish v does not exist

in Spanish . I n a measure the Spanish sound in questionmay be real ized by trying to utte r b and v in the same breath:cf . cube, eat, me, grape. Initial b or 1 more near ly re

sembles Eng l ish b,as in baata, enough, brazo,arm, etc. Aftermor n (within a word or at the end of a preceding word) ,both b and v acquire the ful l value of the Engl ish b, as intambldn, also, on verdad, in truth, anv l dl a, envy. (In thesecases the it becomes m in pronunciation.)9. C, z. C has two values. Before a, c, or u, or before

a consonant (except in ch) it is pronounced k, as in ce l l s,

street, codo, elbow , etc. Before e or i it has approximatelythe value of th in Engl ish thin, as in cans , supper, cinco,five.

But in Spanish America and in parts of Spain (especial lysouthern Spain) the c before a or i is pronounced l ike theEngl ish as.

2 has in al l positions the value of th in the regions in whichc has the sibilant value, it, too, is pronounced l ike as.

10. D, t, l , i t.— These differ from the Eng l ish sounds in

that they are produced farther forward in the mouth : whenmaking them, the tongue touches the upper teeth, or at leastthe roots of the upper teeth.

I n most positions, d is practical ly a spirant, and its soundsomewhat resembles that of Eng l ish th in father . I t maybe compared to a prolonged Eng l ish d, but pronouncedw ith the tongue farther forw ard : of . todo, al l , madre,mother . I nitial d more near ly resembles English (1, as in

ddmelo, give it tome . Af ter 1 and n Spanish d acquires theful l value of English d: of. espalda, back, tienda, shop. At the

end of a word d is sometimes pronounced l ike the th of thin,or is omitted altogether , but neither course is sanctionedby the best usage. There is a tendency for it to dis

8

appear in pm umiafion between voweh especial ly in the

Aside fromthe fact that they should be producedwel l to tbe

1 1 . Lhm— These rue palatal isedmodifications of l and n.

The sign l l does not mean double l at al l ; it simply denotesan l pronounced in that part d tl ie mouth in which a y is

regularly produced. In the endeavor to make an l the

tongue is a'

cbed toward the palate (near which a y has its

place of enunciation) ; hence it is a pdatalized l . The sound,u in Spanish mlndmis rendered in a measure by that inEng l ish mil l ion. In Spanish America, as in certain parts of

Spain, the l l has become simply a y in pronunciation (whichshows how strong the y element is in the l l ) , so that cabal l o,

i t produced in the 1 place in themouth : the ny in the Engl ishcanyon is an approximate rendering of the d in the Spanish

canon. Themark ov er the it is cal led a til de (a word derivedul timately from the Latin “

titulus,”title , sign) .

12. G, j. — Before a, c, or u and before a consonant g

has the so-cal led “hard” sound, as in gota, drap, grande,

big . Before a or i this sound is rendered by gu (in which theit has no pronounceable value of its own) , as in guerra,war, guitar, to cook. Intervocal ic

“hard” g tends to becomean indistinct spirant, as in f

tago, I make, sigue, he fol lows.G fol lowed immediately by e or i, and j, wherever it occurs,have the “

velar sound given to ch in the Scotch-Engl ish“loch” or in the German “

noch, as in gents, people ,

jerdln, garden. Whil e the sound indicated is the correct

Castil ian one, many Spanish Speakers pronounce this g

a. A dheresis is placed over u when it is pmnounced in guo- or

6 F IRST BPANISI I com

18. l , rr. — t revcr it w curs, the 8panish r is cercful ly

pronounced with an unmistalrable tril l of the tongue. I t

hds a wel l defined utterance, which remmbles that of a cereful ly enunciated Eng l ish r, as in care. dear, grands, large,smsr, . i love. When initial in a word, when it immedistelyfol lows 1 or n, and when written rr between vowels, it has

a re-enforred value of this sound, as in rote,broken,tar-hue,

Henry, sl redador, about, perro, dog.

14. 8. - I n most cases of its occurrence, between vowels

and elsewhere , the 8panish s has the voiceless sound of

the Eng l ish es,but it is hiseed lees : cf .

mss,more. I t should not receive between vowels the 3 soundwhich it often has in Engl ish. Nowadays, however, there is atendency to voice it, that is, pronounce it l ike Engl ish a,

before a voiced consonant (b, d, g. l , r, m, n) , and manyspeakers aspirate it or fail to pronounce it at al l beforea consonant or at the end of a word. The better rulefor foreigners is to pronounce it l ike Eng l ish as wherever it

1 5. L — This is a sound of infrequent occurrence inSpanish . Between vowels it has ordinarily the Eng l ish value.Before consonar s it may he pronounw d l ike the Engl ish a:

(that is, as Ice) or as 3 ; both aor ta and sesto are found asSpe l l ings for the word meaning sixth.

heading Vow el s. At the beginning of a word or syl lable it

when it is initial in a word, it is utte red strongly, and, indial ectal Spanish in Spain and rather general ly in SpanishAmerica, it acquires the sound of the Engl ish j, so that yo,I becomes jo and ya, already, becomes is. For Castil ian a

suffices.

1 7. Doubl e l etters. When Spanish letters, w ith the

exception of l l and rr, are wr itten double, each is pronounced

7

m anly. Of tbe vowela q q andomay appear as doubled

snd of these double e is the commonest, as in lm , to recd,

crew , to bel ieve. Of the consonants doubled in writing onl y

two are pronounced separatcly ; these are cc and nn. Ce

can oceur only befome or h and then the first c is k in sound

and the second is the spirant th, as in seeeder, lo accedc,

first c in such cases. Double n is found only where the firstn belongs to a prefix, as in lnnobl e. ignoble .

ACCBN’

HMTION

18. Most Spanish words reveal the place of their accentby the ir very form; for a considerable number, however, awritten accent is thought necessary. The leading rules are

these :1 . Wo r ds ending in a vowel , or in the consonants n or s,

stress regular ly the next to the last syl lable and require nowritten accent, as in

dulce,m d

( ”ag encies

a. S and u are often inflectional endings or a part of inflectional

endings. Umal ly their presence does not vary the accent which the

particular word would have w ithout them; thus,

m he lom ; m acaw ; sman, they love

2 . Words ending in a consonant except n or as stress regularly the last syl lable and take no written accent, as in

amar, to lovea. For accentual purposes final y is treated ss a consonant.

3. A written accent is reqpired for words not obeying thetwo rules just given and for al l words whose stress comesmore than two syl l ables from their end. (This means thata written accent is needed by al l words ending in a vowel

8 F I RST SPANISH COURSE

and strewng it, by words ending in n or s and stred ng the

n or s — and not stressing their last syl lable, and by al l

words not stressed on either the last or the next to the last

fl fia bad pmd l

M ada

a. The addition of the plural sign- cl sometimes invol ves the use of

a wr itten accent not needed in the singular ; thus, crlmen, cr ime, butcrimenes ; on the other hand, itmay mean the omission of an accent

b. I n general , the addition of a plural sign has no cfiect upon the

place of accent in the particular word; however, two words advance

character,m eter“ (for which word no written accent is necessary),and regimen, rule of conduct, regimens: (for which the written accent

is stil l necessary, as it occurs more than two syl lable . from the end of

the word) .

parts of speech . Certain monosyl lables, (which, of course,

need no written accent to indicate the place of stress) , and

require an accent to distinguish them from other words

mt,me : "W300.

mi»mysf, himself , etc. ; yes sf, if

m s, but

Gate, this one (prom) este, this (adj.)ése, that one (prom) 080, that (adj . )«1061. that one (prom) l evel . that (adi )qué, what, which (interrog . and que, who, whom, which

exclam.) (re l .)quién,who,whom(interrog . andexclam.) quien, who, whom (re l .)a . A recent rul ing of the Spanish Academy makes it no longer

necessary to w rite the accent on a, to, at, e, and,u,or,and c,or (excepton 0 between Arabic numeral s, as in 8 6

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

10 F I RST SPAN ISH COURSE

4. Prefixes fel t as such are usual ly kept intact,to the rules given above in l ; e .g

M rs-m . to despair (cf . am . to have)sub-l e-vsr-se, to rebel (cf . lever, to raise) .

21 . The onl y notable points here are : (l ) the double usequestion marks and exclamation points, which not only endtheir clause, but in an inv erted formusual ly precede it (eg .

acomo est! Vd.? H ow are you? [Que bem oan mujer lWhat a beautiful woman!) (2) the frequency of suspensionpoints in narrativ e or dranmtic style ; and in

dialogue, the use of a dash to indicate a change of speaker .

22 . Capitals are l ess commonly used in Spanish than inEngl ish . Unl ess they begin a sentence, a l ine of verse, or a

quotation, proper adjectiv es and the pronoun yo, I , are not

capital ized . National or other locativ e adjectives used as

nounsmay take a capital w hen they denote persons (al thoughin this respect) ; when they denote languages,

they usual ly take no capital , even though used substantivelyl os franceses (or F rancesca) hsb lsn francés, F renchmen

I n the titl es of books and in the headings of chapters,paragraphs, etc., it is customary in Spanish either to use

capital letters (empl ear l etra msyfiscul a) exclusively, or tocapital ise only the first letter of the title or heading and usesmal l letters (l etra minusculs ) elsew here, as in RESUMEN

GRAMATICAL or R esumen gramatl cal , GENER O ns

NOMBR ES or Género de los nombres, etc.

23. Gender of Nouns . Al l Spanish nouns are either

mascul ine or feminine . There are no neuter nouns.

l ibro,m., book plm f ., pen

m e an m e an

uns plums, a pen

25. Us is used w ith mascul ine nouns and one w ith

nine nouns.

km l l plzmpencil una plums, a penun l ibro, a book L and

”M m-w aver

A. l . tengo papel . 2 . Usted tiene papel . 3. Yo

tengo nu lapiz. 4. Usted tiene un lapiz. 5. Yo tengo una

pluma. 6. Usted tiene una pluma . 7. Yo tengo un libro.

8. Usted tiene nu l ibro . 9. Yo tengo papel y lapiz .

10. Usted tiene papel y lapiz. 1 1 . Yo tengo un l apiz yuna pluma. 1 2 . Usted tiene un lapiz y una pluma.

B. E scrtbasemespahol . l . Youhave a book. 2. I have a book.

3. You have a pencil . 4. I have a pencil . 5. You have paper .6. I have paper . 7. You

‘

hav e paper and a pencil . 8. I havepaper and a pencil . 9. You have a pen and a pencil . 10. I

have a pen and a pencil . 1 1 . You have a book and a peneil .

12. I have a book and a pen.

1 2 FI R ST SPANI SH COUR SE

RBSUME N GRAMATI CAL

ejemplos precedentcs las regtas que siouen, y ast eucesivamentc con todas

las reglas de las leeciones sigm’

cntes.

23. Género de l os nombres.— Todos los nombres en espaflol

24- 25. E l sr tfculo indetermlnsdo (o indefinl do) . — Un so use

L E SSON I I

27. Gender of H enna — 1 . Nouns ending in —o are usual ly

2 . Nouns ending in - a are usual ly feminine.

uns plums, a pen tinta,f ., ink

3 . I f nouns do not end in - o or —a, it is usual ly best to

28. Interrogativ e Sentences. An inverted interrogation

{Tonga ye? have I ? {I l ene usted? have you?

29. yo escribo, I w rite . tescribo ya? do I write?

Note that the Eng l ish aux il iary verb do is not expressed in Spanish.

can, with en, in, on

tints,f ., ink

A. 1 . LT iene usted un l apiz? 2 . Yo tengo papel y nu

lapiz . 3 . gE scribe usted en papel con lapiz? 4. Yo escriboen papel con pluma. y tinta. 5. aE scribe usted un ejercicio

1 Note the omission of tan, a.

13

con lapiz? 6. Yo escribo un ejercicio con pluma y tints .

2 . gE scribe usted con lapiz? 3. LTiene usted plums y tints?4. {Escribe uste d con pluma y tinta? 5. LTiene usted papel ?

6. LE scribe usted en papel ? 7. gE scribe usted en pape l con

lspiz? 8. zEscribe usted en papel con pluma y tints?

ejercicio.) 10. LEscribo yo en papel ? 1 1 . (£d yo con

lapiz? 1 2 . aM bo yo con pl uma y tints?

C. 1 . I have a pencil . 2. You have a pen. 3. I write with ta] l

pencil . 4. You write with [a] pen. 5. I w rite on paper . 6. I write

you a book? 9. Do you write in a book? 10. Do you write w ith

[aj pencil‘

f 1 1 . Doyou write w ith pen and ink? 1 2 . Have I apen‘

I

1 3. Do ritc w ith pen and ink? 14. Do l write on paper?

5. I have a pen and a pencil . 6. Do you write an exercise w ith [a]pencil ? 7. I write an exercise w ith pen and ink. 8. I write with

[a] pencil . 9. You write with pen and ink. 10. Do I write in a

book? 1 1 . You write in a book with [a] pencil . 1 2. I write in a

en - o son, por regla general , mascul inos. 2 . Les nombres queterminan en - s son, por regla general , femeninos. 3. E n cuanto a

los nombres que no terminan ni en —o ni eu —s, el genera de cada

28. Fru es lnterrogsfim — E u espanol las preguntas van pre

‘ Eng l ish words in brackets EJare to be omitted in Spanish

1 4 FI RST SPAN ISH COURSE

LE SSON I I I

(Leccldn Tercers )

N . Plural of Nouns. 1 . Nouns ending in a vowel add1 to formthe plural .

l ibro., books

Note that l ecciones does not have the accentmark.

plural of lsnis is l l pices.

Definite Articl e

ls plums, the pen h a plumsg the pens

(See als0 5596, 98)

fore each noun to which it refers.

La plums y la tints.

yo tengo, I have

yo ensefiml teach

d pratescr enseflg the teacher teaches

yo escribo, I write

usted ascribe, you write

el al umna escribe, the student writes

The same formof the v erb is used when usted is the subject that isused when the subject is a singular noun. This ihtrue of anverbs.

1 5

el slnmno, the student,m.1

la leccldn, the lesson

(Of dw fila M the chal k

yo u tudlo, I study; usted euudig you study .

A. 1 . LT iene usted los l ibros? 2 . St, serior (sehora o

LE scribe usted los ejercicios en papel ? 4. Si, sebor ; yo

escribo l os ejercicios con plums y tinta. 5. aE studia el

alumna (o la alumna) las lecciones? 6. Si, senor ; cl alumna

(o la alumna) estudia las lecciones. 7. LQuién ensena las

lecciones? 8. E l profesor (o la profesora) ensena las l ecciones.

9. LQnién escribe los ejercicios? 10. E l alumna escribe losejercicios en la pizarra. 1 1 . {Escribe el alumno con tiza?

12 . Sf, senor ; el alumna escribe con tiza en la pizarra.

zando coda respuesta con los palabras sf senor (senora, o senorita) .

l . gEstudia usted las lecciones? 2 . gE scribe usted los ejeteibios en la pizarra? 3 . gE scribe usted los ejercicios con tiza?

I n an el ementary school a pupi l is discfpulo; in a university a student

or undergraduate is estudisnte . Alumnamay be used for al l grades.

Pizarro means slate. I n Spain and in some Spanish American coun

tries a blackboardmade of sl ate is al so cal l ed pizarra. whil e in Mexico and

some other countries it is cal l ed pizarrbn. A blackboard made of waxedand painted cl oth is cal l ed encerado. and one of painted boards is cal l ed

I n a high school or academy , in which each teacher g ives instruction

in only one subject, the teacher should be cal l ed profesor, —ora. I n an

Sem is used in addressing a yonng unmarried teacher . I n addresslng m older womamwhether she be married or sind emehora is considered

16 FI RST SPANISH COURSE

4. aFe tudis el alumna (o la alumna) las lecciones? 5. 1&cribe el alumna los ejercicios? 6. aEscribe el alumno con

lapis? 7. zEscribe la alumna los ejercicios? 8. gEscribe la

al umna con plums y tints? 9. LEnseha el profesor (o la

el profssor o la preten se. 10. zQuién tiene los l ibros? l l . zQuiénestudia las lecciones? 12 . gQuién escribe los ejercicios en la

plural . Yo tengo los

l ibros.) 2. I study the lesson. 3. I have the pencil and the pen.

4. 1 write the exercise. 5. You teach the lesso'

n. 6.Who hss the

the pen? 9.Who writes the exercise? 10.Who teaches the lemon?Traddzcase y repitace después m forma interrogation. 1 1 . The

13. The student writes the exercises. 14. The student writes on

the blackboard. 1 5. The student writes w ith chalk. 16. The

teacher teaches the M on.

D . E scrtbacc. 1 . I study the lessons. 2. Do you write the

exa cises? 3. Yes, sir ; I write the exercises on the blackboard.4. Does the student write w ith pen and ink? 5. Yes, sir ; the

8. Who studies the lessons? 9. The student studies the lessons.10. I write the exercises on the blackboard w ith chalk. You

write the exercises on paper w ith pen and ink. 12. The student

studies the lessons and wr ites the exercises.

N . Plural de los nombres. 1 . Les nombres que terminan en

18 F IRST SPAN [SH COURSE

The intel ligent students, I .

86. The plural of adjectives is formed l ike that of

nouns.

37. Agreement of Adjecfivea — An adjective, no matterwhere it stands in the sentence, agrees w ith its noun or

pronoun in gender and number.

EXER CISES

apl icado, - a, industrious, dil igent mucho,a im,much,a greatblanco,

- a, white

In case, the house

dlflcil , difficult

”b e red

macho, - a,much m u n, also

muchos, —es,many todo, 1 , al l

es, is ; son, are ;

A. 1 . Yo tengo tinta negra y una pluma . 2 . jT iene usted

papel blanco también? 3. Si, senor (senora o senorita) ; yo

escribo los ejercicios en papel blanco. 4. {Son diffcil es losejercicios? 5. Si, senor ; toda la leccion es muy dificil .6. LE scribe el alumno muchos ejercicios en la pizarra?

7. E l alumno escribe todos los ejercicios en la pizarra.

Note that a sing l e predicate adjective usual ly precedes a noun subject

IN N IV 19

senor ; el alumno (o la alumna) estudia mucho todas laslecciones. 10. Los alumnos son todos muy apl icados.

1 1 . jTiene usted muchas cases? 1 2 . Yo tengo una casa

roja y una blanca (a whi le one) también.

B. 0mm M eow a las m ien!“ program.

1 . jTiene usted papel blanco? 2 . j Tiene usted tinta negra?

3. [New usted muchos l ibros rojos? 4. j Tiene usted

lecciones muy dificiles? 5. fl‘

iene usted una casa roja?

6. jTiene usted una hlanca también? 7. gEstu'

dia mucho elalumno? 8. j E scribe el alumnomuchos ejercicios? 9. {E sfacil la leccion? 10 (Son faciles los ejercicios? l l . j E s

apl icado el alumno? 1 2 . jSon api icados todos los al umnos?

C. Tradam ec y repuan deepuée m plural . l . The lesson is

difficult. 2. The exercise is easy. 3.

worker . 4. The student 5. The book is

red. 6. The house is white. 7. The pencil is black.

lessons are difi cul t (06090 A. 9. The student studies a great

deal (06000 I 10. The student writes many exercises. 1 1 . Al l

the students are hard workers. 12. The teacher teaches many

D. E scrtbase. 1 . Do you study the lessons a great deal ?A. 2 . I study all the lessons and write al l the exercises.

3. Are the lessons difficult? 4. Many exercises are v ery difficult.5. Do you write the exercises with [a] pencil ? 6. I write al l the

exercises w ith pen and ink. 7. Is the ink black or red? 8. The ink

is black and the paper is white . 9. Al l the students are very hard

awhite house? 12 . I have a vhite house and a red one (véase A. 1 2)too.

34. Colou cion de los sdjefivoa — l . En espanol , por regla

m FI RST SPAN ISH COURSE

a w adjetivos determinantes hrtfculoa adjetiva posd vos,

36. M u les de los gem adjetivo mm l ino

2. Im dem‘s adjetivos solamente tienen, por regls genm l , dos

33. E l phiral de los adjetivos se forma del mismo modo que elde los nomhses.37. Concordsacls de los sdjetlm — E l adjetivo,cualquiera que

sea el lugar que ocupe en la frase, concuerda en genero y numerocon el nombre o pronombre a que se refiere.

LE SSON V

33. Agreement of Adjecfivem— l . An adjective thatmodifies two or more mascul ine nouns or pronouns is in

the mascul ine plural .

2 . An adjective thatmodifies two or more feminine noun:I

Ls cass y ls eecue's son bl sncas. The house and the school are white.

3. An adjective that modifies both a mascul ine and a

feminine noun or pronoun i s usual ly in the mascul ine plural .

La tizs y el papel son blsncos. The chal k and the paper are white .

33. Similarly a noun or pronoun in the mascul ine pluralmay refer to both men and women.

Los profesores

40. N egative Sentences. I n negative sentences, no, not,

Usted no estudia.

yam -me

ls clesemlsss”

lam a“Ma n uela -chm!

hay. there is, there arc; no hsy. there is not, there are not

A. 1 . (Queestudia usteden el l ibro? 2 . Yo estudio leccio

nee y ejerciciosmuy diffciles. 3. j Es usted (cease 533) muyapl icado?

’ 4. No, senor ; yo no estudiomucho l' lecciones.

5. al l ay muchos alumnos en la escuela? 6. Sf, “nor ; hay

muy apl icados todos los al umnos? 8. No, senor ; los alumnosno son todos muy apl icados. 9. j Escribe el alumno (o laalumna) muchas cartas en ing lés y en espanol ? 10. E l

alumno (o la alumna) no escribe muchas cartas en espanol .

1 1 . Escr ibe (He, 0 She, writes) la carta y la direccion con

plums y tinta. 1 2 . La tinta y el lapis son negros : cl papel

cribe usted cartas con l apiz? (Respuesta : No, senor ; yo noescribo cartas con l apiz .) 2 . j E scribe usted cartas en papelrojo? 3. j Escribe el alumno muchas cartas en espanol ?

4. {Son faciles las lecciones y los ejerci nios? 5 . (Son apl i

cados todos los al umnos? 6. (H ey muchos profesores en laJase?

Comatose regain d untido. 7. jE n que escribe usted lacarta? 8. j En qué escribe usted la direccion? 9. aCon qué

escribe usted la carta y la direccion? 1 0. jCon qué escribo

yo en la pizarra? 1 1 . {Son blancos o negros el papel y el

sobre? 1 2 . {Son blancas o negras la pizarra y la tinta?

‘ In addn saing a womamone would say : gh asted muy l pl icada?

22 FI RST SPAN ISH COURSE

C. l . The chalk is white. 2 . The paper iswhite. 3. The chalkand the paper are white . 4. The ink is black. 5. The pencil is

black. 6. The ink and the pencil are black.

8. The exercise is easy. 9. The lesson and the exercise are easy.

10. The student (m.) is [a] hard worker . 1 1 . The student (f .) is

[a] hard worker . 1 2. The students are hard workers.

(véase B. 2 . The paper is white and the ink is black. 3. Are

not the pencil and the chalk white? 4. The chal k is white ;the pencil is black. 5. Does not the teacher teach many lessons?6. Are the lessons easy or difficul t? 1 7. The exercises are not

v ery difficul t. 8. Does the student write many letters? 9. [He]writesmany letters in E ngl ish : [he] does not write letters in Spanish. 10. I write letters in Engl ish and in Spanish too. 1 1 . Whatdoes the studer

‘

write on the envelope? 1 2. [He] writes the address w ith per.

33. Concordancin de l os adjetivos. 1 . Un adjetivo que modifica a dos o mas nombres o pronombres mascul inos debe ponerseen mascul ino plural .2 . Un adjetivo que modifica a dos omas nombres o pronombres

femeninos debe ponerse en femenino plural .3. Un adjetivoquemodifica a la v ez a dos nombresopronombres,

unomascul ino y otro femenino, debe ponerse, por regla general ,en mascul ino plural .

39. I gualmente un nombre enmascul ino y numero plural puederefer irse a hombres ymujeres.

el adverbio de ncgacion no se coloca delante del verbo.

See the footnote to I V, E xercises, A,4.

LESSON VI 23

LE SSON VI

(Lecddn Sena)

41 . Present Indicative of T ener, A;

Pumas

1 °“080. I havenosotro. .

tfi tienes, thou hast

ustedes tienen, you hav e

tienen, they have

42. Pronouns. 1 . T6, thou, is used in famil iar speech,as between the members of a family or between intimatefriends and when speaking to smal l chil dren and animal s

(the dog, the horse, I t is al so used in poetry and in

prayers to the Deity. The plural of tn is vosotros, - ss.

2 . Usted, you, is required in more formal speech . I n

addressing a stranger or mere acquaintance, usted must beused. The plural of usted is ustedes.

Usted is used w ith the third person singular of the verb,and ustedes with the third person plural .

Usted and ustedes are abbrev iated to Vd. and Vds., and

also to Ud. and (I da. or V. and VV.

3. Nosotros,- ss, we, vosotros,

—as, ye, and el l os,— as,

they, have both mascul ine and feminine forms. Nosotros,— as is the plural of yo, el l os is the plural of 61, and sl ice is

the plural of el la.

31, he, is distinguished by the accentmark fromoi, the.

43. Tener que means to have to,must.

I have to, or I must, study.

{I l ene Vd. uns leccidn que es Have you a lesson to study?

24 F I RST SPANISH COUR SE

Some Infinitivesensensr, to teach escribir, to write

estudiar, to study

EXERCISES

pars, for, in order to (with an

nacho,- s, w ide, broad infinitive)

el ssiento, seat la class, classroomlamesa, table, desk ‘ x la sil l smhair

A. Contimtese, ueondo comomjetos de los verbos lodos loe prom

Si lo prefiere el profesor, tn y vosotros,- as, y las forms: correspon

dientee de los verbos pueden omitirse por ahora. 1 . Yo tengo muchos l ibros (tutienesmuchos l ibros), usted tiene él tiene

etc. 2 . Yo tengo que estudiar mucho. 3. Yo tengo

que escribir cartas . 4. Yo tengo ejercicios que escribir .

B . 1 . La clase tiene ventanas anchas y al tas. 2 . Bay

muchos asientos . 3 . H ay también una mesa (un eseri

torio) para el profesor (o l a profesora) . 4. Todos losalumnos tienen as ientos. 5. Los profesores tienen sil l as ymesas. 6. {Q ue tienen que estudiar los al umnos? 7. Los

alumnos tienen que estudiar las lecciones y escribir losejercicios. 8. Tienen (They have) l ibros para estudiarlas lecciones. 9. Tienen papel para escribir los ejercicios.

10. Los profesores tienen muchas lecciones que ensenar .

1 1 . Yo tengo papel para escribir una carta. 1 2 . j T iene Vd.

un sobre para la carta?

C. Contéslese afirmativamenfe . l . LTienen Vds. l ibros paraestudiar la leccion? 2 . gT ienen Vds. papel para escribir losejercicios? 3. jT ienen Vds. pluma y tinta para escribir?4. gT ienen Vds. cartas que escribir? 5. j T ienen Vds. sobres

I f the teacher's desk resembl es a tabl e. it is cal l ed is mess del no

b ut ; if it is a w riting desk, it is more properly cal l ed el escrltor lo.‘A leomre room in a university is cal l ed ssls ds eonfereaclas or sula.


2. E l pronombre usted es de rigor en la conversacidn formal .

Usted se usa con la tercera persona del singular del verbo yustedes con la tercera persona del plural .

Usted y ustedes se abrevian Vd. y Vds.,y también Ud. y Uda , o

3. Nosotros, plural de yo, vosotros, plural de ta, y enos, pluralde 61, tienen las formas femeninas nosotru , vosotras y el lss.

E l pronombre 6! se distingue del articul o el por el acento escrito.

43. Tenet que significa to have to,must.44. Al gunos infinitivos :

LE SSON VII

45. Genitive Case .

l Possession is denoted by the prepo

John’s book.

Spanish nouns have one form for the singular and one for

the plural ; they have no ending that corresponds to theEngl ish

’s.

46. De cl is contracted to de' ; but de la, de l os, and

de l as are not contracted.

Los l ibros del sl umno. The student’s books.

Los l ibros de los alumnos.

47. Present Indicative of Ser, to be.

LESSON VI I 27

E XER CISE S

la aritmética, arithmetic~

per ezoao,—a, lazy

la roost-fin. geography pm .but

la sw am“, grammar poco,- a, l ittl e

poco, ada , l ittl e

cise ; l ecci6n de gramatica, grammar l esson or l esson in grammar ; l ibrode l ectura, reader .

A. Comma s. 1 . Yo soy apl icado.

’ 2 . Yo no soy

perezoso. 3 . Yo no soy el profesor . 4. Yo tengo que estudiarahora.

B . 1 . j Tiene Vd. el l ibro de l ectura de Juan? 2 . No,senor (o seiiora) ; yo tengo el l ibro de Maria. 3 . Juan yMaria son al umnos de l a escuel a. 4. {Son el los apl icadoso perezosos? 5. Juan es un poco perezoso, pero Maria es

apl icada . 6. Juan tiene pocos l ibros, pero Maria tiene

muchos . 7. Juan, Lqué estudia Vd. ahora? 8.

V 0 estudiola l ecci6n de ortografia. 9. gE s 1a l ecci6n facil o dificil ?10. E s (I t is) facil , pero la l ecci6n de aritmética es muydificil . 1 1 . Maria, ges dificil la l ecci6n de geografia? 1 2 . Sf,

senor ; es dificil , y la l ecci6n de gramatica es dificil también.

C . Contéstese afirmativamente . 1 . jTiene Juan el l ibro deMaria? 2 . gE studia él la l ecci6n de espafiol ? 3 . (E s facilla lecci6n de espanol ? 4. gTiene Maria el l ibro de Juan?5. j E studia el la la lecci6n de gramatica? 6. {E s dificil

l Some teachers woul d cal l a lazy student na al umna flojo. When thusused, flojo is a harsher term than perezoso.

Note that class means both class and classroom.

I f there are young w omen in the class, they should ear ly form the habit

of using the feminine form of a predicate adjective or noun w ith yo soy, as

w el l as the feminine form of the pe rsona l pronoun, first person plural , thus :

yo soy apl icada, nosotraa N M apl icadas.

28 F I R ST SPANISH COURSE

la lecci6n de gramatica? 7. (H ey muchos alumnos en la

escuela? 8. jSon apl icados todos los alumnos? 9. {SonVds. alumnos de la escuela? 10. j Tienen Vds.muchos l ibros?l l . zTienen Vds. l ibros de lectura? 1 2 . aTienen Vds.

D . Tradzzzcase, y repitase después en plural . 1 . She is not [a]hard worker . (E l la no es apl icada. E lias no son apl icadas.)2. H e is very lazy. 3. I have the student

’s book. 4. I have a

7. I s the grammar lesson easy? 8. I s the Spanish exercise difficul t?

E. E scribase. 1 . John has the teacher ’s book and is wri ting

(escribe) the exercise. 2 . John, is the Spanish lesson difficul t?3. The exercise is easy

,but the grammar lesson is very difficult.

4. Mary, what are you studying (aqué estudia Vd.) now? 5. I amstudying (Yo estudio) the l essons in arithmetic and geography.

6. Have you (pl .) many books in E ngl ish and in Spanish?

7. We have many books in E ngl ish, but [we] hav e few books inSpanish. 8. Are the students industrious (apl icados) or lazy?

9. Few are lazy ; many are industrious . 10. Al l the students inthe Spanish class are hard workers. 1 1 . We hav e diffit lessons

and exercises to study. 1 2 . [We] must study a great deal inorder to write the Spanish exercises.

R ESUMEN GRAMATI CAL

45. Caso genitive . La idea de posesién se express mediantela preposicion de.

Los nombres en espanol tienen una terminacion para el singular

y otra para el plural ; carecen de una terminacion analogs a la

46. La preposicién de y cl articulo e l se contraen en la forma del ,pero de l a, de l os,y de has no se contraen.

LESSON VI I I 29

L E SSON VI I I

48. The R egul ar Conjugations.— Spanish verbs are di

v ided into three conjugations, according to the infinitive

endings — ar,- sr,

— ir

I I I

Hablar, to speak Aprender, to learn

Like these are inflected al l regular verbs w ith correspond

ing infinitive endings.

49. The inflectional endings of the Present I ndicative areI : —o,

- as,- a,

- amos, —4is, —eu

I I : —0, - es,- e ,

—emos, — éis,- eu

I I I : —0,—es,

- e,—imos, - is,

—en

P resent Indicative

Hablar, to speakSIN GUL AR

hahl -o, I speak, do speak, am speakinghabl -as, thou speakes t, dost speak, art speaking

speak, do speak, are speakingshe or it speaks, does speak, is speaking

ham-m w e speak, do speak, are speakinghabl -fiis, ye speak, do speak, are speakinghabl -nu, you or they speak, do speak, are speaking

Aprender, to learn Vivir, to l iveI learn, do learn, am learning ; etc. I l i ve, do l ive, am l iving

Si lvana“; P wnar. SI NGU LAR Pannu .

spread-o

spread-éis

spread-e

a. E ach of the v erb forms given abov e may be transl ated in either

one of three ways, thus : aprendo, I learn, I do learn, or I am learning .

But no aprendo is usual ly to be transl ated in only tw o ways : I do not

learn or I amnot learning .

6. Note the accent on the ending of the second person plural in the

present indicative of al l three conjugations (habl l is, aprendéia, vivis) .

30 FI RST SP N ISH COURSE

51 . Omission of the eject Personal Pronoun. In

Spanish the subject pron is usual ly omitted.

tengo, I have

a. Sometimes the subject pronoun is needed for emphasis or tomake

a estudia,pero el lano estudia. H e studies, but she does not study.

6. I t is usual l y mme pol ite to exprem usted or ustedeg but this

cl borrador,‘eraser

pan t. to pass. so (to thecorrectamente, correctly blackboard)

ce l lular, to point out, cal l

attention to

la diflcultad, difficul ty si, if

“PM . to explain

A. Conl imiese, usando pr imero los pronombres sujetos de los verbos,y repitiendo después los mismas frases sin los pronombres. 1 . (Yo)senalo las fal tas. 2 . (Yo) aprendo la lecci6n. 3. (Yo) noescribo correctamente . 4. (Yo) hablo espanol .

B . 1 . Escribimos l os ejercicios de espanol en los cuadernos.

2 . Si escribimos correctamente , no hay faltas. 3 . Pero si

no escribimos correctamente, el profesor subraya las ral tas

con tinta roja. 4. E n la elase de espanol pasamos a la pizarra.

5 . Escribimos todo el ejercicio en la pizarra eon tiza. 6. E l

profesor sefiala todas las fal tas. 7. También expl ica todaslas dificul tades. 8. Entonces borrainos el ejercicio con el

borrador . 9. Los alumnos tienen que estudiar mucho paraaprender l as lecciones. 10. También estudian mueho paraescribir correctamente los ejercicios. 1 1 . LE S (I s it) dificilescribir correctamente nu ej

'

ercicio de espanol ? 1 2 . Si,

senor ; esmuy dificil ; pero el profesor expl ica las dificul tades.

LESSON VI I I 31

de los verbos. 1 . LEscribe Vd. el ejercicio en na cuaderno?

2 . 41380 ibe Vd. eon tinta negra? 3. gSefiala las fal tas cl

profesor? 4. LSubraya las fal tas con tinta roja? 5. aE xpl ica

todas las dificul tades? 6. LPasan Vds. a la pizarra? 7.

gEscriben Vds. el ejercicio en la pizarra? 8. (Escriben Vds.

con tiza? 9. gBorran Vds. el ejercicio con el borrador?

10. gAprenden Vds. todas las lecciones? l l . gE scriben

Vds. todos los ejercicios? 1 2 . dificil escribir correcta

mente los ejercicios?

D . Tradaw ase, y repilase después ueando los formos plurales delos aujelos y de los verbos. 1 . I l ive in a white house. 2 . [I ] studya great deal . 3. You learn the Spanish lesson. 4. You write the

exercises. 5. H e points out themistakes. 6. She explains the dif

ficul ties. 7. You go to the blackboard. 8. You erase with theeraser . 9. The student writes the exercises. 10. The teacher cal lsattention to themistakes.

E. E scribase. 1 . We do not speak Spanish, but we are l earning to (a) speak. 2 . I f w e study much, w e learn much. 3. Wewrite al l the exercises in exercise books. 4. The teacher points outthe mistakes and explains the difficulties. 5. He under l ines al l

the mistakes w ith red ink. 6. [I t] is ver' difficul t to write cor

rectly al l the exercises. 7. Do you (pl .) go to the blackboard inorder to write the exercises? 8. Yes, sir ; we write w ith chalk and

erase w ith the eraser . 9. The industrious (apl icados) studentsstudy much : the lazy [ones] study l ittl e. 10. Al l must study agreat deal in order to learn the l essons. 1 1 . There are manydifficulties in Spanish. 1 2. But there are also many difficulties in

R E SUME N GR AMATI CAL

48. Lu conjugaciones regul ates. E n cepaml las conjugacionesde los verbos se div iden en tres, correspondiendo a las terminaeiones del infinitiv e, a saber : — ar ,

- er,- ir . Todos los verbos

regulates se conjugan como nafllar, aprender , o vivir .

49. Las terminaciones del presente de indicative son :

32 F IRST SPAN ISH COURSE

60. a. La forma verbal del presente de indicative a nnual corres

I learml do lmrn o l amleam'

lg; pero la l orma negstiva del mismotiempo solo «q uival e a doe l ormas ing lesas, por ejemplo, nomendo

selo puede traducirse por l do nol learn o l amnot leorning .

b. Notese el acento escrito que l l eva la terminacien de la segunda

persona del plural del presente de indicative en las trcs conjugacio

61 . Sumerian del pronombre personal que sirve do sujeto.— Eu

espanol se suprime, por regla general , cl pronombre que sirve dosujeto al verbo.

a . Al gunas veces se necesita cl pronombre sujeto del verbo para

dar mayor énfasis a la expresien 0 para dar le mayor claridad.

b. L a exprcsion resul ts mes correcta y cortés con el empl eo del

pronombre usted o ustedes, pero no es necesaria la repeticien del

pronombre en la frase .

mlo, —a, —os, —as“yo: ” 03 1

“ 3 3

“yo:“ a,

“030” as (hem) :

nuestro,—a,

—os,—as our (ours)

vuestro,- a,

—os,- as your (yours)

suyo,- a,

—03,- as or su, sus your (yours) , their (theirs)

53. The short forms,mi (mi s) , tu (tus) , su (sus) ,are usedwhen they precede their nouns.

M imadre. My mother . M is l ibros. My books.

But, |Madre mia l Mymother ! Los l ibros son mics. The books

An inve rted excl amation point (signo do admirncibn invertido) is placedat the beg inning of an exclamatory sentence.

L E SSON IX

(L t ccien Novena)

Possessives

Smouu n

~or mi,mis my (mine)or tu, tus thy (thine)or 511, 811 3 your (yours),

34 FIRST SPAN ISH COURSE

clmo.piano

lunar, to find tocar, to play (a mu tedel hermano, brother ; inhumans, instrument)

W V“.Y“is madre,mother tamer, to take

el padre, l ather ; los padres,parents

escuela municipal , municipal or city school

A. Conl indese. 1 . Yo toco el piano. 2 . Yo tengo misl ibros (til tienes tus l ibros, 3 . Yo tengo mis plumes.

4. E l piano es mio (tuyo, 5. La casa es min. 6. H e

estudiado la l ecci6n. 7. He v iv ido en Chile .

B . l . Tengo un hermano y una hermana . 2 . El los son

alumnos de una escuelamunicipal . 3 . E studian la gramatica,la ortograi ia, la aritmética y la geogral ia .

’ 4. M i hermanatoca muy bien cl piano. 5. M i hermano no ha tornadolecciones de musica. 6. M is hermanos toman l ecciones deespanol . 7. Trabajanmucho,pero todav ia no hablan espaiiol .8. Hal lan dificilcs las lecciones de gramatica. 9. Pero son

apl icados y escriben todos los ejercicios. 10. M i padre y mimadre (o,M is padres) no hablan espanol . l l . Pero estudian

todas las lecciones con mis hermanos .

C. 0mm . 1 . {Time Vd. eu gramatica? 2 . {Time

él su aritmética? 3. 1,Tiene el la su geografia? 4. gTienen

Vds. sus l ibros? 5. LTienen e l los sus pl umas? 6. gTengo

yo mi lapiz? 7. zToca el la cl piano? 8. gH a tornado él ’

lecciones de musica? 9. jH a tomado Vd. lecciones de es

panol ? 10. gHan estudiado Vds. las lecciones? I l . gTra

bajan Vds. mucho? 1 2 . [Son Vds. apl icados" 1 3. aE s

nuestra la casa? 14. zSon nuestros los l ibros? 1 5. dc

1 890 539, N ote the usc ol the articl e .

3 Note the position of the subject pronoun in {E l tomndo a? etc.

See 5135 .

LESSON IX 35

Vd. cl ldpiz? 16. 1,E s de Vd. la pluma? 17. quién es cl

libro que Vd. tiene?

D. Tradiizcose y repuoss decpués cn plw al . l . The houss is

mine. (La cu n a-mic. Las cam son mlas.) 2 . My house

is white . 3. The book ismine. 4. My book is red. 5. The pencil

la youts. 6. Your pencil is black. 7. Thc pen is his. 8. I havehis pen. 9. The letter is hers. 10. I have her letter . l l . Whosebook have you? 1 2. Whose pen have I ?E. E scrlbase. 1 . Does your brother play the piano? 2. Yes,

sir ; but he does not play very w el l . 3. I have not (Yo no he) takenmusic lessons. 4. We are students in (do) a city school . 5. Wetake lessons in (do) grammar, ar ithmetic, geography, and Spanish.

‘

6. My brother and I have had to (homo. tenido que) work hard.

7. But our parents also work hard. 8. We do not speak Spanish

yet. 9. Our parents have studied the lessons too. 10. But theydonot speak Spanish yet. 1 1 . I have your book. Whose book have

you? 12. I havemy sister’s book, and I have written the exercise.

52. Poeesivos :'

8. Las formas apoeopMas mi (mis) , to (te a) , cu (sue) se usancuando preceden al nombre .

54. Suyo (eu) puede significar year, his, her, its, 0 their.a. Con irecuencia your (yours) se traducc mas acertadamente por

do usted.

55. Concordancia de l os posesivos. Los posesivos concuerdan

en género y ni’

imero con la cosa poseida y no con el poseedor .

a. Los adjetivos posesivos, por regla general , as repiten ante cadn

nombre a que se refieren .

57. Participios pasados (o pu ivos) . Como hablado, apren

dido y vivido, se forman los participios pasados (pasivos) dc todos

a . E scrito, el participio pasado de escrihh , es irregular .

58. E l perfecto.— Cemo he (has, etc.) hablado, se conjuga el

perfecto de indicative de todos los verbos espafloles.

l Do not use the artiel e here aitei- de.

36 FI R ST SPANISH COURSE

L E SSON X

(Lecci5n Decimn)

Demonstrative Adjectives

60. E se usual ly denotes that which is near or which refersto the person addressed . Aquel denotes that which is moreremote

refers.

E sta hombre y estamujer.

61 . Demonstrative Pronounsem,

—a,- os,

- as, this (one) , these «to, this

ése, —a, -os,- aa

(one), these

62. E sta, eso, and aquel l o are neuter . They are used todenote a thing notmentioned by name or a mere idea . Theycan not represent a noun, since there are no neuter nouns in

gQué es esto? What is this?[Eco es ! That

’s it! That is right!

a . Note that the mascul ine and feminine demonstrativ e pronounsare distinguished by the accentmark fromthe demonstrativ e adjectives.

The neuter demonstratives are never used as adjectives and thereforethe neuter demonstrative pronouns do not need the accent mark.

Cardinal Numeral sun (o),—n, one nueve, nine

dos, two diez, ten

tres, three

doce, twelve

cinco, five

siete, seven quince, fifteen

diez y seis, sixteen

LESSON X 37

64. 1 . Uno loses the final 0 of the mascul ine singular

when it precedes its noun .

2 . Un(o) , —a has both a mascul ine and a feminine form,

Una pluma. One pen.

a . Note that un l i piz may mean either one pencil or a pencil , and

una pluma may mean either one pen or a pen.

el abuel o, grandfather ; la abue

ln, grandmother ; los abue

anciano,- a, aged, old

fuerte, strong

el hi jo, son ; in hija, daughter ;los hi jos, children sons

ya no viven, they are not l iv ing now

A . Coruinsese. 1 . N ohe l efdo este l ibro . 2 . Nohe v iv ido en

aquel la case . 3 . H e aprendido la primera l ecci6n. 4. H al lo

facil esta l ecci6n. 5. H e escrito muchas cartas.

B . l . E ste hombre y estamujer v iv en en aquel la casablanca .

2 . Tienen dos hijos, Juan yMaria . 3 . E stes hijos tienen dosabuel os . 4. Los abuelos v iv en en l a misma casa. 5. E l

abuelo esaneiano,pero es nu hombremuy fuerte . 6. La abuelatambién es anciana; no es una mujer fuerte . 7. Los abuelosno son ricos y han tenido que trabajarmacho. 8. Abora son

muy ancianos para trabajar mucho. 9. Juan, gqué lee Vd.

en ese l ibro? 10. E n este l ibro yo estudio la lecci6n de es

pane l . 1 1 . H al lo dificil la l ecci6n. 1 2 . 1,Y qué estudia su

hermana en aquel l ibro rojo? 1 3. El la aprendo la l ecci6n dearitmética . 1 4. También hal la dificil la l ecci6n.

N ote that interrogativ c qué is distinguished by the accent from rela

e l hombre,manl eer, to road (past part.: l eido)mismo, —a, same

la mujer,woman

que, rel . prom,l who, which, that

rice,—a, rich

38

este hombre y esta mujer en

aquel la casa? 2 . gT ienen el los dos o treshijos? 3. aTienen

dos abuelos Juan y Maria? 4. {Son ancianos los abuelos?5. gSon ricos? 6. {H an tenido que trabajarmucho? 7. {Sonmuy ancianos para trabajar mucho? 8. {E s el abuelo un

hombre fuerte? 9. gE s la abuela unamujer fuerte? 10. (N iven los abuelos en la misma case? 1 1 . LQué l ee Juan en

aquel l ibro? 1 2 . gHal la la l ecci6n facil o diffcil ? 13. 1,Y que

estudia su hermana en el l ibro rojo? 14. LHal la dificil lal ecci6n de aritmética?

D. Tradfizoase, y rep£me despuéa omitimdo los nombres y

w ando equél par that. 1 . You have l ived in that house. 2 . I have

studied this l esson. 5. This student is [a] hard worker . 6. Thatstudent is lazy. 7. These men are rich. 8. Those women are not

rich.

E . 1 . Two, four, six , eight, ten. 2. One, three, five, seven,

mne. 3. Fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twelve, eleven. 4. Two and

two are four . 5. Three and three are six . 6. Four andfive are nine.

7. Five and ten are fifteen. 8. Six and seven are thirteen.

2 . I amreading the grammar lesson in this book. 3. What is Johnreading in that redbook? 4. H e is studying the first Spanish lesson.

5. Do your grandparents l iv e w ith you 6. Yes, sir ; they

8. Yes, sir ; he is old and he has worked hard. 9. H e is too ol d to

work much. 10. Our grandmother reads and wr ites a great deal .1 1 . Our father is the son of our grandparents. 12. The parents of

our mother are not l iving now .

59. Adjetivos demostrsfivos :00. E l adjetivo demostrativo ese se refiere, por regla general ,

a la persona o cosa que esta cerca de la persons.a quien se habla.

Aquel se refiere a la persons 0 cosa que estamAs distante.

LESSON XI 39

de cada nombre a que se refiere .

62. E sto, eso y nquel lo son neutros. Se usan para indicar una

eosa que no se menciona por eu nombre o una idea. No pueden

se distinguen de los adjetivos demostrativos por l l ev ar el aeento escrito.

Los pronombres demostrativos neutros nunca se usan ecmo adjetivos y

2. Uno admite la forma femenina una, pero los demas adjetivos

a. Un l l plz puede traducirse one pencil o a peneil y una pl um puede

L E SSON XI

R adical -Changing Verbs

65. Many verbs of the three conjugations change the

radical vowel e to ie, or the radical vowel o to us, when

I . Ca n t , lo close Center,to com!

cerramos

ciem cl ern n

i I n referring to the lesson. m oire, page (puma) , etc., either ordinal

numeral s or oardinal numerals may be used after déclmo, tenth, but the

cardinal numerals are more commonly used ; thus : la undéelm l ecci6n or .

more commonly , ls l ecclon om . Observe that a cardinal numeral thus


n. Entsnder,tou nderstand Vel vet , to return

Smov u n Pw m

Dormir, to sleepSmom n Puma .

66. Some verbs of the third conjugation change the radicalvowel e to i w henever the stress fal ls on the root.

Pedir, to ask. askforPw m

a . Note that in the present indicative of radical -changing verbs

the radical vow el does not change in the first and the second persons

plural , since in these forms the stress fal ls on the inflectional ending

and not on the root.

b. With the exception of the regular ly recurring changes in the

radical vow els, the radical-changing verbs are inflected l ike regular

verbs.

c. Ther e is no rule by which al l radical -chang ing v erbs can be

recognized (but see Whenever a v erb is radical -chang ing , this

fact w il l be indicated in the vocabularies, thus : sentir (re ), pedir (i ),dormir (us) . See also the l ist of v erbs in 5282 .

la bibl ioteca, l ibrarybajo, - s, low la cocina, kitchen

el bsl lo, bath, bathtub

1 Bathtub is al so cal led tins del M 50 (as in Mex ico) and sometimesbsflsdsrs (as in Argentina) .

42 FIR ST SPANISH COURSE

una criada? 5. aviven en una casa do echo piezas?

6. gDuermen todos en el piso al to? 7. (No quieren dormiren el piso bajo? 8—9. gCuales son las piezas del piso bajo

(del piso al to)? 10.

'

1,Hay muchos l ibros en la bibl ioteca?l l . aSon Vds. sobrinos de don Fernando y dons. Ana?12 . 1,Son Vds. primes de Juan y Maria?

D. Tradfiscase y repuaee después con ustedes como w jew wverbo. 1 . We close the window . (Nosotros cerrsmos la ventana.

Vds. cierran la ventana.) 2 . We teach the lesson. 3. We ask forchal k. 4. We learn the lesson. 5. We understand the lemon.

6. We erase the exercise. 7. We count the books. 8. We workhard. 9. We sleep l ittle. 10. We do not wish to study.

E . 1 . My parents,my two brothers, and I l ive (vivimos) in a

white house . 2. [I t] is a two-story house (casa de dos pl ace) .3. [I t] has four rooms on the ground floor and five on the upperfloor . 4. The rooms of the ground floor are the l ibrary, the drawing room, the dining room, and the kitchen. 5. On the upper floorwe have four bedrooms and a bathroom. 6. We sleep on the upperfloor . 7. We do not w ish to sleep on the ground floor . 8. There

does not sleep in our house. 10. Mybrothers and I have (tenemos)two cousins, John and Mary. 1 1 . Their father F erdinand is our

mother '

s brother . 1 2. I am [a] nephew of my uncle Ferdinand

65. Muchos verbos de las tres conjugaciones cambian la vocal

radical e en is, o la 0 en ue, siempre que el acento prosodico recaigasobre la rats.

radica l e en 1, siempre que el acento prosodico recaiga sobre la

a . OM rvese que en la primera y segunda persona del plural del

presente de indicative la vocal radical no eambia,debido a que el acento

LESSON XI I 43

b. Con excepcion de los cambios constantes en la vocal radical ,

estos verbos se conjugan lo mismo que los verbos rmi lares .

c. No hay reg la absolute para conocer los verbos que cambian cu

vocal radical . Siempre que un verbo sufra esta al teracion, se indicara

en los vocabular ies del modo siguiente : sentir (is),pedifi l ),dormir (ue) .Véase igualmente la l ista de verbos en el i 282 .

LE SSON XI I

67. Dative Case .-The indirect object‘ requires the prop

She g ives the book to John, orShe g ives John the book.

Note that the preposition tomay be omitted in E ng l ish if the indirectobject precedes the direct object. The Spanish preposition a cannot

be thus omitted before a noun.

El la da el l ibro a Juan

68. Accusative Case .— The di' e -

zt object does not, as

a rul e, require a preposition, but the preposition a is requiredbefore the direct object, if the object is a proper noun, or

any noun or pronoun that denotes a definite person or

But : Busco ami padre. I am looking for my father .

Quiero r e: a Madrid.

a. The preposition a is sometimes placed before the direct objectmerely to distinguish the latter fromthe subject of the verb.

E l adjetivomodifies al nombre) The adjective modifies the noun.

A la guerra signs la paz. Peace fol lows war .

1 E xcept the rel ative pronoun que (dir obj ) , and a personal pronoun

that is the object (dir . or indir .) of a v erb and is pl aced immediately before or after it.

Incl uding inte l l igent animal s such as a dog or horse.

0 Since in Spanish the subject often fol lows the verb, the omin ion of s

44

b. The preposition a is umal ly omitted aftar tsnsr ; and qusrsr s

l Quisrs Vd. a sas primes?

69. A+ el is contracted to al .

We are teacher.

70. The fol lowing adjectives loss of the

noun.

“ (oh “ 6.bad algun(o),—s, some ‘

m o). 1 first shame). - s, none

E l tsrcss ejercicio.But: 3 1 tercero.

el amigo, friend, m. ; la amigs, cl muebl e, piece of furniture ; los

cl psnsar (is), to think, intendbuscar, to seek, look for poder can, to be able

el

el ecu'lco, - s, electric cl sil l dn (pl ., sil lones) , armchairla luz (pl ., luces), l ight el sofa,sofa

visitar , to v isit, cal l on

“Gives; dadomivenA. Continaese. 1 . Busco mi l ibro. 2 . Busco a mi

3 . Quiero papel . 4. Quiero mucho a mi madre . 5. No

B . 1 . M i tfo Fernando es anciano, pero trabaja mucho.

2 . Su esposa dons Ana no puede trabajar . 3. El los no son

piano,unamesa, un sofa, sil las y sil lones, ymuchos cuadros.Alcoa and ninth require the accent mark.

LESSON XI I 45

5. Reciben a sus amigos en la sala. 6. En la bibl iotecahay una mesa, un escritorio, dos sil las, algunos sil lones y

pero muy pocos en espane l . 8. En el cr~nedor hay un

9. Tienen luz eléctrica en toda la casa. 10. Nosotros tene

mos lus eléctrica en nuestra casa también. 1 1 . Piensov isitar amis tfos y pasar unmes con el los (them) . 1 2 . Quieromucho amis primos Juan y Marfa que sonmuy buenos.

C. Conusfese m el contezto de B . 1 . 1,E s anciano don

trabajar dofia Ana? 4. (Son ricos los ties? 5. gViven bienlos ties? 6. iCudles son losmuebles de eu sale? 7. gReciben

a sus amigos en la sala? 8. 1,0q son los muebl es de labibl ioteca? 9. aTienen los ties muchos l ibros en inglés?

10. {Tienen muchos l ibros en espanol ? l l . gCuales son los

toda la casa? 13. gTienen Vds. también luz eléctrica en eu

casa? 1 4. gPiensan Vds. v isitar a sus ties? 1 5. zQuierenVds. a sus primes?

1 . I have looked for my books. (H e buscsdo mis l ibros. H omesbuscado nuestros l ibros.) 2 . I have looked for my parents. 3. I

intend to visitMadrid. 4. I intend to v isitmy cousins. 5. Do youwish the book? 6. Do you like your uncle Ferdinand? 7. He

wishes to speak Spanish. 8. He is writing the first exercise.

9. He is writing the first [one]. 10. Does the adjective modifythe noun? 1 1 . She receives many letters in Spanish. 1 2 . She

l ight in your house? 14. Have you many cousins? 15. Do you

intend to spend a month with your uncle and aunt G39)? 16. I

E . 1 . I n my parents’ house there is electric light in al l the

rooms. 2 . My uncle and aunt have electric l ight in their house

46 FI RST SPANI SH COURSE

too. 3.We esn rsad very wel l with the electric l ifl t in the l ibrary.

5. The drawing roomhasmany pictures andmany chairs, a piano,a sofa, and two tables. 6. Mymother receives al l her friends fl .)in the drawing room. 7. My brothers and l receive (recl blmos)our friends in the l ibrary. 8. 0ur dining room has a table and

chairs, a sideboard. and some m’

ctures. 9. We have l ittl e furniture, but it—is (son) good. 10. There is much furniture in myuncle Ferdinand’s house . 1 1 . I intend to spend a month withmy cousins John and Mary. 12. My parents are very fond of

(quieren macho) their nephew and niece 13. John and

Mary l ike my parents too. 14. My father has given my cousins

67. El compl emento indirecto (case dative) requiere la pre

posicien a (excepte delante de los pronombres me, to,E n ingléspuede suprimirse la prepesicion to del compl emento indirecto

68. E l compl emento directs (case scusstivo) , per regla generic,no requiere preposicien. Pero se emplea la preposicion a con cl

0 pronombre (excepto que y me, te, etc.) que express una persona

a . Algunas veces la preposicion a precede al complemento directosolamente para distinguir a éste del sujeto del verbo.

b. La preposicien a se suprime generalmente después del verbotenet ; y querer a significa to be fond of , to l ike, y no to wish 0 want.

69. La preposicion a y cl articul o el es contraen en in forma al .

70. Los siguientes adjetivos pierden la - o final del masoul ino singular cuando prew den mediatamente al nombre que

LE ’ 40N XIII 47

LE SSON XI I I

Smovu n

72. E etar, to be, is used instead of ser, to be

2 . To express an accidental or

1 . Mi pedre estl en Chil e. My father is in Chile.

Msdrid estl en Espefis. Madrid is in Spain.

Mary is il l .

mm m nmph s.

73. Some adjectives hav e one

ear, and another meaning when used with ester .

ser bueno, to be good ser ml lo, to be badesu r bum to be we l l ester malo, to be il l

74. Omi ssion of the I ndefinite Articl e . 1 . The indefi

nite article is usual ly omitted before an unqual ified predicatenoun.

My father is a physician.

My uncle is a lawyer.

Nuestro amigo es espafiol . Our friend is a Spaniard.

2 . The indefinite articl e is not used with otro, other ,

el otro l ibro, the other book

This rul e hasmany apparent exceptions, thus : él es joven, he is young .

Youth is. in a sense , temporary , but it is after al l re lativel y permanent as

68 F I RST SPAN ISH coves:

M u ses

la “mode, chest of

cuando (interrog .,

d m ,1

l i vermd, n

« m et ha ne ; n ee-e de maa v igcmi t i fn -md's; we «m ay

ow n it not true? isn’

t it so'

A. 0mm . 1 . No soy jov cn. 2 . No any médico.

3. Estoy en casa. 4. E stoy cansado,- a . 5. Nosoymalo,- a.

6. No tengo otra cama.

B . 1 . Mi prime Juan tiene una buena (fine) came. en eu

l impias y blancas. 3. Las frazadas (mantas) son de lana.

4. Juan c’uerme muy bien en esta cams cuando esta can

sado. 5. Los otrosmuebles de eu cuarto son un tocador con

6. H ay también algunos cuadros en las paredes. 7. Juan

esta enfermo . 9. E sta amigo es abogado. 10. Cuando el

abogado esta bueno, trabaja mucho. 1 1 . Pero cuando estaenfermo, no puede trabajar . 1 2. Juan quiere mucho a eu

C . Contests.” eemin el contexto de B . 1 . 1,Tiene Juan una

buena cams? 2 . (Beam l impias y blancas las sabanas?3. gE stan l impias y blancas las fundas de almohada? 4. {Sonde lana las frazadas (mantas) ? 5. Juan duerme bien en

w e cama, {no es verdad? 6. LCudles son los otros mzmbles‘Note the many words for room.

la fran k } blanketf l w in de M pil low s .

lana, wool ; do I‘l l , wool len“lupin , —0, clean

i t 1 physician, (100Wla par ed, wal l

it} ti l l -41 21 , 3M”G U -"W W W“Ne.

“(ire-er”


LE SSON XI V

Susann a

me,me, to me nos, us, to us

to, thee, to thee os, you, to you

Te corresponds to tfi and os to vosotros,- as.

verb (but seeM e buses.

M e da el l llH e givesme the book, orH e gives the book tome.

77. R efl exive Verbs. l . The pronouns given abov emay also be used as reflex ives. The reflexive pronoun of

the third person, singular or plural , is se .

yome engeno, I deceive mysel ftfi te engafias, thou deceivest thysel f

they deceive themsel ves

2 . Many verbs are used reflexively in Spanish, but not

Me ecuesto, I go to bed. M e desayuno, I (have) breakfast.Me l evanto, I get up, r ise . M e equivoco, I ammistaken.

All the verbs given above are in the first conjugation.

3. I f the subject is inanimate, the reflexive constructionis general ly preferred in Spanish to the passive voice .

Aqui se hsbla espsnol . Spanish is spoken here.

LESSON XI V I

76. H ours of the Day

Es lame, it is one

A la tins, at one

Son laa dos, it is two

A laa treaymedia, at hal f-past threeA las cuatro y cuarto, at a quarter past four

A laa cincomenos cuarto, at a quarter to fiveA h e does y dies (minutes), at ten minutes past twel ve at

twelve ten.

A la echo de lamafiana, at eight (o’clock) in the morning (or,

A in trea de la tarde, at three (o’clock) in the afternoon (or, PAL ) .

A in ones de la noche, at elev en (o’clock) at night (or, PAL ) .

gQué hora es? what time is it? what o’clock is it?

a. La una agrees w ith hora understoed,agree w ith horas. M edia (hal f) is an adjective and agrees w ith hora,whil e cuarto (quarter,fourth) is a noun and therefore does not agree.

EXERCISES

el el dfa,‘day

almorzar (us) , to l unch la hora, hour

cal entar (ie), to warm, heat

cal iente,warm, hot producir, to produce, create

cenar, to sup,have supper

sensor, to eat,dine

A. Continaese. 1 . Yo me levanto a las seis. 2 . Yo medesayuno a las siete y media. 3. Yo almuerzo a la una.

One hears al so : a un cuarto para las einco. or a las cuan'o y tres cuartoa.

l I n Spain and Spanish America. it is customary to hav e a l ight breakfast (desaynnarse) in the morning . to dine (corner) at noon. and have

supper (canar ) in the ev ening . But in the large cities it is now becomingcustomary to lunch (almorzar) at noon and to dine (comer) in the ev ening .

0 Or estafa central .

L ite ral ly stone coal . I t is also cal l ed carbbn mineral . B ituminous orsof t coal is hal l s. Charcoal is carbon vegetal or carbon do l ots.

‘Dimdawd hough ending in - g ismascul ine.


4. Yo come a las siete . 5. Yome acuesto a las dies. 6. Yo

B . 1 . Mi tfe Fernando tiene nu calorifero central en el

s6tano de su casa. 2 . En este calorifero se quema carbon

de piedra. 3. Con el cal er que se produce se cal ienta toda

la casa. 4. La casa so calienta per vapor . 5. También se

cal ienta per vapor la casa de otro tie mfo (of mine) , si nome equivoco. 6. Se equivoca Vd. ; la casa se cal ienta per

aire cal iente . 7. En nuestra casa nos levantamos todos a lassiete de la mafiana. 8. Nos desayunamos a las echo. 9. A

las doce ymedia almorzamos, y comemos a las seis ymedia.

10. Peromis tios ymis primos comen a las doce y cenan a lasseis. 1 1 . Nos acostames a las once de la neche . 1 2 . Nos

acostames a las dies si estamos cansades.

C. Conléstcsc semin cl mm dc B. 1 . {Que tiene don Fernando en el sotano de eu casa? 2 . aQué se quema en el

calorifero? 3. {Se produce mucho calor? 4. gSe cal ienta

toda la casa? 5. {Se cal ienta per vapor? 6. (Se cal ienta

per aire cal iente? 7. (No se equivoca Vd.? 8. 1A qué

hora se acuestan Vds.? 9. 4A qué hora se l evantan Vds.?

10. (A qué hora se desayunan Vds.? 1 1 . 1 A qué horaalmuerzan Vds.? 1 2 . LA qué hora comen Vds.? 1 3. 4A!

muerzan e comen los ties a la una? 1 4. {Comm 0 cenan

a las seis?

D. Tradiizcase, y repilase después negativamente. 1 . He teachesme. (El me ensena. El nome ensena.) 2 . They l ikemt . 3. She

seeks us. 4. Spanish is spoken here . 5. E ng l ish is spox en here.

6. Yeu are mistaken. 7. Coal is burned.

l 8. Heat is created ‘

9. The house is warmed.

‘ 10. I rise at five o’clock. 1 1 . We

go to bed at eight. 1 2 . I t is twel ve o’clock.

E . l . I go to bed at nine o’

cloek and get up at six . 2 . My

‘ Place the subject after the verb . Note how often the mbiaa m y

fol low the verb in Spaniah even in an amrmative ssntenoe.

LESSON XI V 53

3. We breakfast at seven o’clock or at a quarter past seven. 4. Welunch at half-past twel ve and dine at half-past six . 5. When weare at the table, we speak Spanish. 6. My cousins dine at twelve

o’clock and have supper at six . 7. There is a good furnace in the

basement of my father’s house. 8. Coal is burned in the furnace.

9. The house is warmed by steam. 10. My uncle Ferdinand’shouse is warmed with (por) air. 1 1 . I cannot study when the airis (estl ) very warm. 12. I cannot sleep wel l if the air ef mybedroom is warm.

sonales se usan come complementos (objetos) do verbo : me, te,

usan también come reflexives. E l pronombre reflexive de tercera

persona, singular o plural , es se.

2 . Muchos verbos que en espanel son reflexivos no lo son on

3. Cuando el sujeto de la oracion es un ser inanimado se prefiereen espanol in forma reflexive a la pasiva.

78. Horaa del dia :

a. La nna concuerda con la pd abra hora sobrentendida, y las dos,las tres, etc., concuerdan con horas. M edia es adjetivo y coneuerda

eon hora, mientras que cuarto es substantive y por consiguiente no

54 FI RST SPAN I SH COURSE

L E SSON I V

79. Personal Pronouns. 1 . The personal pronouns of

the third person used as objects of verbs are :

e ras e r ow ne r mann e r ca me-r

Sine . l e, him him, to himla, her, it is her , to her

lo, it it, to it

lea, them, to them

Busco la carta. I seek the l etter .

La buseo. I seek it.Busco las cartas. I seek the l etters.

I seek the book.Lo buseo. I seek it.

Busco los l ibros.

I seek the teacher .

Le busco.

Note that is, h e, and los

pronouns, but that the article el diflers in form from the correspondingobject pronouns lo and lo.

pronouns corresponding to usted and ustedes.

Le busco.

La busco.

Le da el l ibro.

Les da el l ibro.

i

I seek himor you,m. sing.

I seek her or you, I . sing .

I seek themor you,m. pl .

I seek themor you, I . pl .H e gives him, her, or you the book.He gives themor you the book.

3. Engl ish it (di r . obj .) is expressed in Spanish by l a whenit refers to a feminine noun, and by l o when it refers eitherto amascul ine noun or to a mere idea or statement.

I have the pen.

La ten c

I hnve the beek.

10m g . I have it.

Locree.

a n ne x-east

la baterfa do cocina,‘ kitchen

utensils

la came,meat

cocsr (us ), to bake, boil (food)is cocina economica,’ kitchen

el cocinermo la cocinm coek

hay n nome gustaJ de not l ike that

or that does not please me ; nos ( fl an estos cuadres, we l ike thesepictures or thcse pictures please us.

A. Continue“. 1 . No me (te, l e, etc.) gusts esta casa.

2 . No me gustan l es muebles. 3. Don Juan me ensefia.

4. Me da lecciones dc espanol . 5. M i (tu, su, etc.) tie me

(te, le, etc.) busca. 6. Yo no guise la cemida.

B . 1 . Nuestro. cocinera guisa la cemida en la cocina

economics . 2. La comida que guisa es muy sabrosa.

l Or trastos do cocina.

Amodern, iron cooking stove or range is usual ly cal l ed a cocina econbmicaor mere ly an econ6mica. I n some places it is also cal l ed estufa. Many

Spaniards and Spanish Amer icans stil l cook over openings in the top of

stone benches or shel ves. in which charcoal is burned.or ever open fireplaces.

56

3. E l pan que cuece en el horno es muy bueno. 4. Y me

gustamucho la carne que asa en el horno e que cuece en una

e l la. 5. Esta mujer tiene que trabajar muche en la cecina.

6. Tiene que preparer las comidas y fregar la bateria dococina. 7. Hay ol las y cazuelas que fregar . 8. Cree que l e

gusta trabajar en la cecina. 9. .L e gusta guisar ; no le gusta

fregar las e l laS y las cazuelas. 1 0. Pero no es perezosa y

C. am moman cl canta ta de B. 1 . gQuién prepara lascomidas? 2 . gEn que se guisa la cemida.? 3. {E n que secuece el pan? 4. gEn qué se asa la carne? 5. gE n qué se

cuece la came? 6. gQuién friega la bateria de cocina?

7. LQué friega la mujer? 8. 1,Trabaja muche la cocinera?

9. 1,Le gusta guisar la comida? 1 0. 1,Le gusta fregar las

e l los? 1 1 . [L e gusts a you l ike) guisar? 1 2 . 1Lo

gusta a Vd. fregar laS el las y las cazuelas?

D. Tradfiscase, y repftose dcspués, usando el pronombre per

smial quc corrcsponda en lugar del filtimo nombre dc cada frass1 . We prepare the meals. (Preparamos las cemidas. Laa prepa

sceur the pans. 5. I am looking- fer John. 6. I am looking-for

Mary. 7. He gives the chair to John. 8. He gives the books to

Mary. 9. H e gives the letters to the men. 10. I do not l ike

Dofia Ana. (No me gusta dofia Ana. E l la no me gusta.)1 1 . Do you l ike Don Fernando? 12. We l ike the teachers.E. l . Dofia Ana’

s cook is a l ittl e lazy, and her pots and pans

are not always clean. 2 . She l ikes to cook the food, but she doesnot l ike to scour the kitchen utensils. 3. And in a kitchen there

in order to prepare three meals. 5. She bakes the bread in the oven

ef the stove. 6. She roasts the meat in the oven, or she boils it

in a pet. 7. The feod that she cooks always tastes good. 8. Do

you l ike te bake bread and roast meat? 9. No, sir ; I de not l ike

te cook; but I am very fend ef reading (me gusta mucho l eer)books. 10. I l ike the library of eur house. but l do not l ike the


61 . Propositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns.

same in formas the subject pronouns, except that ml and tiare used instead ef yo and tfi. Si is the prepositienal fermof as .

pare n t, for ms para nosotros, - es, for us

ti, thee vosotros,—es, you

a

m d'i112, it

el la, her , it“m

para SI, for himsel f, hersel f, etc.

a. the reflexive sf is

7

meaning may be made clear or emphatic by adding a mi,a ti, etc.

I l ike it.She l ikes it.H e gives it to him.

H e gives it to you.

a. One may say with stil l more emphasis on the pronoun : Aml me

b. With a noun the corresponding personal pronoun object is often

emphatic: l e gusta a Juan, John l ikes it; se lo de a Merle , he gives it

to Mary.

63. The definite article with de 61, de el l a, etc.,may be

used instead of so, to make the meamng clear or emphatic.

Su l ibro, 0 el l ibro de a.

Su case, o la casa de el le. Her beuse .

Su cuarto, 0 el cuerto de Vd.

Su padre, 0 el padre de ell os.

a . With these expressions, compare el libro de Juan, John’s book;

la casa de Marla,Mary's house.

LESSON XVI 59

d eh um iunch heavy brcak

guiehsd from ths cityn los

Iam supper

la eluded, city, large town

W howmanyf la dpsre, opera

el tsetro, theeter

anem ones; dos veees, tw ice; tres veceg three times; algunee“ sometimes ; enm de, imtead ef ; al die,daily

A. Continue”. 1 . Me ensefia la lecci6n. 2 . Me is en

sefia. 3 . Amf me da el l ibre . 4. Me lo da a mf. 5. A mfno me gusta el campo. 6. H ay una carta para mf. 7. E l

matica.

B. 1 . En E spana los habitantes de las ciudades hacen

(have) tres cemidas al dfa : el desayune , el almuerzo, y lacomida e la cena. 2. Se desayiman a las eche de la mafiana,y teman a esta hora cafe con leche,‘ pan y mantequil la

(manteca) . 3. Muchos toman chocolate en vez dc cafe.

4. A1muersan a la una y comen a las siete e las siete y

opera. 6. Los hacendades y los ganaderos comen a las dece

e la una y cenan a las seis e las siete . 7. Los labraderes

levantan a las cince de la mafiana y se acuestan a las echo

t A plantafion is ane hecl ende orJn Argentinamna estencia. In Mexico

0 I n Spaniah America buaer is mantsquil la and lord ismanteca. I nmost

‘ Cd ‘m h chq a mixturc of cofiee end hot mil k.

cl desayano. (l ight) breakfastdoor“ 40.m after

M OI -s Spain

el habl tants, inhabitant

el hecendado,planter

cl hhsador, farm laborala leche,milk


o nueve de la noche. 9. A mi me gusta mucho el campo,pero a mi hermano no le gusta. l O. 1,Le gusta a . el

campo? l l . — Si, sefior ; me gustamucho.

C. ConW acgdn d conlcxto c . 1 . aCuantas comidas aldia hacen los habitantes de las ciudades? 2. gCudles son

estas comidas? 3. 4A qué hora se desayunan? 4. gQuétoman a esta hora? 5. 4A que hora almuerzan? 6. LA

quéhora comen? 7. aCuando cenan? 8. gTrabajanmucholos labradores? 9. 4A qué hora se levantan? 10. 1A que

hora comen? 1 1 . 1A qué hora cenan? 12 . LA que hora se

acuestan? 13. {L e gusta a Vd. el campo? 14. 4Le gusta a

eu hermano?

D. 1 . He has her book. 2. She has his book. 3. I have your

grammar . 4. Have you my grammar? 5. We have lunch Welunch) at half-past twelve. 6. We have dinner We dine) at seveno’clock. 7. We go to bed at ten. 8. We get up at seven. 9. H e

gives the paper to me : he gives it to me. 10. He does not give

the chairs to you : he does not give themto you. 1 1 . She teaches

me ar ithmetic: she teaches me it. 12. She prepares for me (me

prepare) a good lunch. 13. I l ike the country, but you do not

l ike it. 14. Mary l ikes the country, but John does not l ike it.

E . l . Ferdinand, 18 your father a plante r? 2 . No, sir ; he 3 a

lawyer and l ives i ii this city. 3. Does your father l ike the country?4. Yes, sir ; he l ikes the country, and he l ikes the city too. 5. Dothe cattle raisers and the planters have towork hard? 6. The farmlaborersmust work hard in order to cultivate the fields. 7. When(éA que he re) do the planters have dinner? 8. They have dinnerat twelve o

’clock and supper at six in the evening . 9. I n the city

we have dinner at seven o’clock at night. 10. Sometimes we have

supper after the opera or theater . 1 1 . I f we take supper , we have

(becom e) four meals. 12 . For breakfast (Para cl dm yuno) wetake cofiee and mil k and bread and butter. 13. I n Spain many

people (person‘s) take chocolate instead of cofiee. 14. I n our

family we al l fike (a todos nos gusta) to take cofiee if it is not very

LESSON X“ 61

2. Si ambos pronmnbres soa de la tercera persona, se usa el

Aunque eats cc tiene la misma forma que cl pronombre reflexivo

una preposicion tienen la misma forma que cuando son sujetos delverbo, exceptuando las formas ml y ti que se usan en vez de yo yto. St es la forma preposicional de se.

a. Mi, pronombre personal , sc distingue de mi, adjetivo posesivo,y la forma reflex iva oi as distingue de la conjuncion oi, por cl acento

presiones a mh ametc.

a. La expresién es aun mfls enfl tica si a mh a tl , etc., preceden al

5. Con un nombre, cl pronombre personal compl ementario corres

pondiente se usa a menudo dc esta manera, aunque no se requiere

para aclarar o haocr enfatico el significado.

83. E n lugar del adjetivoposesivo on, se puede empl ear el articul odeterminado y las expresiones do 61, do el la. etc., lo que da mayorclaridad y énfasis a la frase.

62

LESSON xvn

84. Com ma — l . To express a direct command withusted or uetedee as subject, the fol lowing forms of the reg

M UM .

hablo Vd. hablen Vds.

11 . Ag enda : spread: Vd. aprendo Vds.

I I I . Vivlr : vlve Vd. viven Vds.

2. Radical-changing vei'bs change e to ie or h and o to

ne, as in the third persoa oi the present indicative.

Sa l em : Pw a i.

Cerrar derre Vd. dorm Vds.

Pedir : yids Vd. piden Vds.

Velvet vuelven Vds.

3. Some irregular verbs

de Vd.

R acer :

tenga Vd. tangen Vds.

Traer

a. Usted or uetedee is usual ly expressed once in a command as in

the examples given above, but not repeawd.

Prepa ea s la eegunde l ecclon Prepare the second lesson and

y repesen la prlmere.

negativ e command, according to the general rule for the

Nome déVd eee l ibro. Do not give me that book.

Nome lo déVd. Do not give it tome .

jects fol low the verb and are attached to it so that the verb

Giveme that book.

Daniel e Vd. Give it to me.


A. 1 . E l profesor dice (says) a los alumnos : E scuchenVds.bien. 2 . E sta lecci6n es muy dificil . 3. Fernando, Vd. no

presta atencion. Cierre eu l ibro. 4. Pasen Vds. a la pizarray escriban el ejercicio diez y siete . 5. Juan, lea Vd. la pri

mera frase del ejercicio. 6. No le entiendo a Vd. : repitala.

7. [Esta bien! Borre Vd. la frase y siéntese . 8. BorrenVds. el ejercicio y siéntense . 9. Prea para mafiana lalecci6n diez y ocho. 10. Y repasen también la lecci6n de boy.

1 1 . Haganme Vds. el favor de aprender bien la nueva

B . 1 . M i amigo y yo entramos en e l restaurant y nos sentamos a unamesa . 2 . E1mozo nosda la l ista. 3. M ientras lee

mos la l ista, el mozo pone (puts) sobre la mesa un mantelblanco. 4. Nos tree en seguida platos, v asos,cuchil los, tenedores y cucharas . 5. Mozo, ls digo (say) , traiganos Vd. dos

0. 001mm aemin el coniezto de A y B . 1 . {Que les dice cl

profesor a los alumnos (582 ,b)? 2 . gQué le dice a F ernando?3 . gQué les dice en seguida a todos los alumnos? 4. gQué ledice aJuan? 5. A todos los alumnos, gqué les dice? {Q uelecci6n tienen que preparar los alumnos para mafiana?7. {Q ue l ecci6n tienen que repasar? 8. aQuiénes entran en

el restaurant? 9. gDonde se sientan Vds? 10. 1,Quién lesda a Vds. l a l ista? 1 1 . aL een Vds. la l ista? 1 2. aQué poneel mozo sobre lamesa? 13 . aQué les tree a Vds. en seguida?14. zQué dice Vd. al mozo?

D. 1 . Let us repeat the lesson. 2 . Let us prepare the new

lesson. 3. Let us write the twentieth exercise .

go to the blackboard. 5. Write the exercise . 6. Write it w ithchalk. 7. Now erase it. 8. Prepare (pl .) the twenty-first lesson(la l ecci6n veintiuna) . 9. Prepare it for to-morrow . 10. Please

prepare this lesson (new Haganme Vds. el favor de no prepa

rar,

66 F IRST SPANIBH OOURSE

fi

duee al ing lés por ld ue go.

2 . Cuando la expresion vamos a va seguida de un infinitivo,

John is learning to read.

M am . H e is beg inning to w rite.

I e M a a habh r eq al ol . H e teaehesme to speak Spani h.

We try to study.

I do not intend to go in.

I do not wish to breakfast.

Do you prefer to take cofiee?Can you do it?

For a l ist of these verbe, see §283.

attached to it, so that the v erb and the pronoun or pronouns

syl lable of the infinitive requires the accentmark.

Are you w il l ing to (or,Wil l you)

Spanish instead of the present pmiciple (gerund) .

Eatoy canaado de estudiar esta I am tired of studying this M on.

lecci6n.

4. Spanish al + infinitive is equivalent to E ngl ish art

present participle (gerund) .

Al enu'ar en el reataurant. On going into the restaurant.

Al leer la earta. On reading the letter .

M ON XVI I I 67

89. PresentW u or:

M o re

P wm P wmu.

b ush fire

do:dais ‘

da

co. F orms of I r , Venir, and Dar Used in

vad a.3°

91 .

Acaba de hablar . H e has just spoken.

Go and get it, go after it.

Venge Vd erme .

acabar , to finish

cam , meat; carne de vaca,’

m as

“ afl fi ow la tu g cup

la tratar, to try

la m eow

la papa o patata, potato' el vino, w ine

cl M fish

i fime vais and dala are monosy l lablea they do not take the aceent.O In eome counti -ies cal led carne de rea.

l Cal led patata in most of Spain.

‘ Radical -chang ing verb in the present tenses. but irregular in some


A . Continfiese. l . Acabo de leer el l ibro. 2. Vuelvo a

leerlo. 3. Voy a buscar lo. 4. Aprendo a hablar espaiiol .

5. Trato de estudiar . 6. Pienso trabajar mucho. 7. Yo

no puedo hacerlo. 8. Yo empiezo a escribir la carta.

B . l . Como me desayuno a las ocho, tengo buen apetito

a la ans . 2 . L os primeros plates que pedimos son sopa y

pescado. 3. Empezamos a comerlos eon buen apetito.

4. Después de comer e l pescado, pedimos ensalada, carne y

papas (patatas) . 5. La ensalada que sirven en este restau

rant es buena y la carne es sabrosa . 6. Como todos los

7. Nuestros postres son queso y irutu 8. Dem de

acabar el almuerzo, ta namea una tan de me. 9. E n el

desayuno prefiero tow r una taaa h a te con leehe . 10. Fa e

en e l almuerzo y h com no tw o leehe . 1 1 . Anna de

levantarnos de la mesa, dames use propina d more (alcmnarero) . 1 2. A mi asnigo y a mi aos g istm mm los

C. Comm segria cl contezto. gAl mtrar en el restau

rant , se sientan Vds. a una mesa? 2 . gViene el mozo (elcamarero) a h .mesa? 3 . gVa a bum la l ists ? 4. (Lea ds.a Vds . la l ists? 5 . fl e et; Vds . la l ista? 6. 5,0l son los

primeros ph tos que piden Vds.? 7. M im i ) Vds. a

comerlos con buen apetito? 8. Después de coma e}pescado,

;,qué piden Vds.? 9. [£3q son los postres? H) . Después

do acabar cl alnmerzo , Lqué tm an Vds.? 1 1 . gP refie re Vd.

tomar cafié con leche en el alnmerzo? 1 2. Antes dc levantarse de in mm gqué m Vds. al mom (al em anate )?1 3 . 1,Les gnsta a . y a su

D. 1 . Waiter, eome to this table . 2 . I am coming (Al l ! my) ,sir . 3. What does the mt leman wi sh? (éQué manéa cl col or?)4. Go and get me another g lass . 5. This [one] is not w an.

LESSON XVI I I 69

6. Bring me also a plate of soup. 7. After the soup l wish fish.

8. Bring me a plate of the good salad that you (Vds.) serve in thisrestaurant. 9. And bring me alsoa cup of coffee . 10. Do you

always give a tip to the waite r? 1 1 . Yes,sir ; I have just given him

a tip. 1 2 . Do you p’

ve it to himbefore or after (antes o deapueade) rising fromthe table? 1 3. Always before rising fromthe table .

14. I do not give tips to the waiters.

E . 1 . Do you l ike the meals that they serve in this restaurant?

2. I l ike the soup, the salad, and the coffee which they serve here,

but I do not l ike themeat. 3. The tablecloth,the plates, the spoons,the knives. and (the) forks are clean. 4. Sometimes the glasses arenot clean. 5. L et us (586, 2) sit down at this table . 6. Wil l you(éQuiere Vd.) dine with us? 7. No, thank you (gracias) , I havejust dined. 8. I do not wish to dine again (ve l ver a comer) .9. But we can talk whil e you are eating . 10. As I have lunch

(Come almuerze ) at hal f-past twel ve, I have [a] good appetite

for (the) dinner. 1 1 . Wil l you take a cup of coffee? 1 2 . No,

thank you ; I have just taken one cup of coffee . 1 3 . The waiter

that is serving us is very good. 14. Before rising from the table,let us gi ve hima tip.

Im itivos. 1 . Al gunos verbos rigen 9. otros en el infinitivemediante preposicion, pero muchos efectuan este regimen sin pre

2. Los pronombres personal es complementarios siguen al ia

finitivo y 80 anaden a 61 formando una sola palabra.

3 . E n espafiol so use el infinitive después de una prepodcion enlugar del participio presente (o gerundio) .

4. La expression castel lana a! con el infinitive corresponds a la

inglesa on con el gerundio.

70 FIR ST SPANI SH COURSE

LE SSON XI !

92 . Imperfect and Preterl te Indicativ e. 1 . Spanish has

Descriptive) and the Preterite (or Past Absolute) .

I .

I I and I I I : - Ia,—fae,- la, —famoa, - h is, - Ian

I .- 6,

- aste,- 6,

- ames, - aatela, —aron

H and I I I : - l , - iate,—lo,

-hnee,- istsla, - leren

Aprender z lmperfectI spoke, did epeak, wee apealdng ; I learned, did lemm, was lemm

°

ng

Pena“. Susan na

hablaba

I spoke, did speak ; etc. I learned, did leam; dc.

Susann a P wu a Poem

spread“The imperfect (past descr iptive)

tenses have the same inflectional endings in the third conjugation thatthey have in the second. Al l regular verbs are inflected in these tenses

Note careful ly the position of the accent marks.

93. The I rregular Verb Set

I was ; etc. I was ; etc.

Poem Smaou n Penn a

fui

LESSON XIX 71

96. Uses of the Imperfect and Preterite . 1 .When theEngl ish simple past tense expresses an action or state as of

indefinite duration, it is equivalent to the Spanish imperfect.

is equival ent to the Spanish preterite.

M verdad. I t was true wm tme at fie time le whs'

ch thc speeker

refe r ) .

a . In this lme the hnperfect is best translated by m etc, + the

3 . The SpM sh imperfeet is also used to te l l what was

Cmndo yo emm w When I was a staident in this

would study) much.

a . In this use the imperfect is often best translated by med fo or

would + the infinitiv e, as in the sentence abov e.

h er (as ), to rain

merit (us ), to die

W : 0071.71 te] d orm

los Em m me UnitedSt-ne s fl ies -mmcl m m(M tiene Vd.? (5L , how many years hav e how ol d

are you? “ M M I m twenty years ol d; l e ft mhe h cks

(l it , there is lach g to him)


cl Nuevo Mundo cl dia 1 2 (does) de octubre (Odober) de1492 (mil cuatreeientes noventa y dos) . 2 . Hizo (pret. dchacer) cuatro viajes al NuevoMundo. 3. Tents cincuenta

(My) y seis anos cuando hire el cuarto v iaje ; le faltaba el

v igor de la juventud (youth) y en el Nuevo Mundo tenia

E spana y paso a Val ladol id donde estaba la Corte (Court) ,y dondemuri6 (pret. demerir) poco después (aflerward) .

Per Castil l a (Casti le) y por L eon

B . 1 . gQuién descubrié a America? 2 . aCuando descu

bri6 a America? 3. gCuantos v iajes hizo Colon al Nuevo

Mundo? 4. gCuantos anos tenfa cuando hizo el cuarto

v iaje? 5. (L e fal taba cl v igor de la juventud? 6. jTenfa

muchos enemigos en el N uevo Mundo? 7. LE staba en

fermo Colon cuando volv i6 a Espafia? 8. LA d6nde peso?

9. jDonde estaba la Corte? 10. 1D6nde muri6 Colon?

C. Tradiizcaee, y dfgaee por qué el verbo estd cn-

el impetj eclo o

La enfermedad dur6 v ariesmeses.

E l la tenia veinticinco anos cuando muri6.

Juan escribia todas las cartas de la compafifa.

Ayer escribiouna carta a su padre .

F ernando no hablo a mi padre cuando le encontr6 estas

e

w

e

r

S” N unca hablaba Fernando a mi padre cuando ls encon

N o hal l é cl l ibro que buscaba.

Yo eseribia una carta cuandomi amigo entre.

E re. la una de l a noehe cuando l legaron.

Cuando mis amigos l legaron a casa eran las dos y

74

heeho se verificaba, pero el heche mismo se express mediante cl

a. En este caso el hnperfeew espanol se traduce al ingiés mediantewas, etc., inns el participio presente del verbo principal .

a. En este easo el imperfecto espaflol pucde tradueirse al ing léa por

LE SSON XX

96. I snperfect and Preterite of Radical-Changing Verbs .

I n the imperfect (past descriptive) and preterite (past absolute ) indicative, radical -changing verbs are inflected l ikeregul ar verbs, w ithout change in the radical vowel , exceptin the preterite of the third conjugation. Here the radicalvowels e and e are changed to i and u, respectively, in the

Preterite

Sentir : I felt, didfeel ; etc. Pedir : I M M ask; dc.

Smom a Pane“. Pumas.sent!

Dermir : I slept, did sleep; etc.

Susannah Pam

96. The Feminine Articl e el (Review §3 l ) . — Before a

feminine noun w ith initial a (or ha and w ith the stress

on the first syl lable, e l is used instead of la.

Bl hacha.

But : las aguasfl he watcrs; las hachm the am .

LI SBON XX 75

fl . The Nenter Gender. — There are no neuter nouns in

Spanish; but pronouns and adjectives are cal led neuter

when they de net refer tomascul ine or feminiae objects.

l ac es buu e. That ia geed.

as. The Neuter Articl e 10.— The article lo is required

is uwd substantively w ith the force of an abstract noun. Le

can not be used with a noun.

Le bushe. The rood (- that which h eood)In h ib its.

dermirse (ue), to go to sleep

iconic? bow? nublade, - a, cloudy, overcast

cempenm e ‘ dq to be com el ndmere, numberpoeed of

du pedirse (i) de, to take leave aaiir ‘a, to go out into

of vestirse (l ), te dress onesel fdirldrae g te make one

’s way ya, ah

'eady

ya acabe, I have finished, I’mdone ; as acabe, it is finished, it

’s done

0 hace echo (quince) dial que l l egué, I arrived a w eek (fortnight) ago.

A . Contindesc. 1 . Me bane y me vesti . 2 . Ya acabé.3 . Acepté con mucho gusto. 4. Lo senti mucho. 5 . L leguéhace echo dias . 6. Hace quince dias que me despedi deel los.

B . l . Ayer me levanté a las siete, me bane y me v esti .

2. Después de desayunarme, sal i a la cal le . 3 . E l cielo

(ANSI and ISO TEST CHART No 2)

AP P L IE Dl GSJ East Mom Stree tRochester . New York 1 4609 USA

(N O) 682 0300 Phone

(7 1 6) 288 5989 Fox

mm.

w—mh

m—Eummueu

76 FI RST SPANI SH cousss

estaba nublado, pero no l lovia. 4. Las cal les estaban l lenas

de hombres y mujeres. 5. Me dirigi a casa de mi amgodon Pablo. 6.

'

E ste amigo v iv e en la cal le de Atocha,ntimero 20. 7. Me recibi6 afectuosamente, y me inv ite a

pasar el dia con él y su famil ia. 8. Acepté 1a inv itacion

con muche gusto. 9. La famil ia se compone de don Pablo,su esposa y tres hijos. 10. Después de comer me despedide mis amigos. l l . Vol vi a casa (home) y me acosté.1 2 . Como estabamuy cansado,me dormi en seguida.

C . 1 . LA qué hora se levantoVd‘7 2 . Después de l evan

tarse, Lqué hizo Vd 3 . Cuando Vd. sal ioa la cal le, gestabanublado cl cielo? 4. Cuando Vd. sal io,al lovfa? 5. gE staban

las cal les l lenas de hombres ymujeres? 6. (A d6nde se diri

gieVd.? 7. gDonde v ive cl amigo de Vd.? 8. aCbmo lerecibi6 a Vd.? 9. {L e invite a Vd. a pasar el dia con él?

10. 1,Acept6 Vd. la inv itacion? 1 1 . c quiénes se componela famil ia de don Pablo? 1 2 . gDespuéS dc la comida se des

pidioVd. de sus amigos? 1 3. gVolv ié Vd. a casa? 1 4. gE s

taba Vd. cansado (cansada)? 1 5. 1,Se aeost6 Vd.? 1 6. 1,Se

durmi6 Vd. en seguida?

D. Léase B, cambiando a la tercera persona del singular todos

los verbos y pronombres que esldn en la primera persona, y usandomi

padre come sujeto de los verbos, verbigracia:“Ayer mi padre se

levanto,”etc.

E . l . Conjdguense en el imperf ecto y pretérito los siguientes

verbos: cerrar, contar, entender, v olver,sentir,dormirse,y des

2 . 5Cudntas 11 0144168 son los formas del articulo determinado?

Tradzizcase : 3. We prefer the good to the bad in this world.

4. The water is (eats) cold. 5. The waters are cold. 6. The soul

is immortal . 7. The soul s of men (de l es hombres) are immortal .

F. 1 . When I l ived in Atocha Street, I rose at seven. 2 . I

took a bath, dressed, and had breakfast at eight. 3. Then I wouldt The meaning is I used to l ioe. I used to rise. etc.

LESSON XXI 77

go out into the street. 4. I f it was not raining the streets were ful l

of men and women. 5. I used to v isitmy friend Paul (don Pablo)who received me affectionately. 6. H e would always invite me tospend the day with him. 7. After dinner I used to return home.

8. At ten o’clock I would go to bed. 9.

- 1 Does your friend l ivein Atocha Street now? 10. No. H e doesn’

t l ive in Madrid.

1 1 . A week ago I went to the house in which he used to l ive.

1 2 . My friend was not there to (para) receive me, and I returned

RESUME N GRAMA'

I‘

I CAL

95. E n los tiempos imperfecto (pasado descriptive) y pretérito

(pasado absolute ) dc indicative , los v erbos que cambian la vocal de

la ralz se conjugan lo mismo que los verbos regulates, es decir , sincambiar la vocal radical , exceptuandose el preterite de la tercera

conjugacion donde las vocales radical es e y e se cambian so i y

u respectivamcnte, en las terceras personas dcl singular y plural .96. E l articulo el se emplea con nombres femeninos que empiezan

per a 0 ha siempre que esta silaba l leve cl acento prosédico.

97. E n castel lano no hay nombres del género neutro; pero es

consideran del género neutro aquel los pronombres y adjetivos

que no se refieren a nombres mascul inos o femeninos.

98. E l articulo l o se usa con la forma mascul ine. del adjetivocuando éste hace laS v eces de substantivo abstracto. No puedeemplearse con el nombre .

LE SSON XXI

99. Inflection of Adjectives (R eview — By ex

ception, the fol low ing adjectives ending in consonants add — a

to form the feminine :1 . Adjectiv es ending in - an,

— 6n, and—or (not including

comparatives in -or) .

Un muchacho haregi n, burlen An idl e, roguish, tal kative boy.

‘ In wri tten Spanish a ehang e of speaker is indicated by a du h.


Unmuchacho «pane l .

guage, it is mascul ine and usual ly takes the definite articl e .

E l esp-501 no es fl ail .

E studlamos el ecpanel . We are studying Spanish.

a. But the article may be omitted when the name of a language

immediate ly fol lows hablar, or is used with en.

éHnbh ucted espanoH o cu te De you speak Spanish?

Ilene)?

E st! escrito en espd eH o en I t is wr itten in Spanish.

u stel lano) .

F rench lesson; nu ejercicio de aspen-al . a Spanish exercise.

b. The termcastel l ane (Casti l ian) is considered preferabl e to“M el

in certain expressions, such as Ingrnml tica castel lann,Spanish grammar ;and in some Spanish-American countries the Spanish language is more

indicative regular ly. Thus, this tense is regular in the irregu

lar verbs ester, tener, poder, and querer.

102. P reterite

Smom Pw m Smam a Pam :

E star : I was; etc.

estuve

estuve estuvieron

Peder : I could, or was able; etc. Querer : I wished, or did wish; etc.

pude pedimos quise quisimospudisteis quisisteis

quiso quiaieron

Note that these irregular preterites have a change of stem, and do

not have the accent on the endings of the first and third persons singular .


su hija? 4. aCuantos anes tenia Car los? 5. LCuAntos afios

tenfa Emil ia? 6. gE r'

an espanoles o ing leses? 7. gHablaban

espanol o ing l és? 8. {Querian aprender el inglés también?9. zL es daba Vd. lecciones de ingl és? 10. gCreian el los que el

ing l és eramas dificil que cl castel lano? 1 1 . aCreia Vd. que

el ingl és era mas dificil ? 1 2 . {Son dificiles las dos lenguas?1 3. 4Tiene uno que estudiar muche par t aprender una

l engua? 14. gEs mas dificil la ortografia inglesa? 1 5. 1,Es

mas fonética la ortografia castel lana?

D. 1 . JCudl es son las formas mascul ina y femenina, singular yplural , dc blanco, fuerte, cortés, ing les, traidor, inferior?

Traddzcase. 2. This woman is handsome and strong . 3. Thisman is talkative ; this woman is not tal kative . 4. This gir l isFrench; she is pol ite. 5. She does not speak Spanish. 6. She is

studying Spanish. 7. Spanish is not easy. 8. The E ngl ish language

also is difficul t. 9. This book is written in F rench. 10. French is a

E . 1 . Spanish and French are R omance languages. 2 . (The)French grammar and (the) Spanish are equal ly difficul t. 3 . But

(the) Spanish spel l ing ismore phonetic than (the) French. 4. WhenI l ived in Madrid, Don Fel ipe taught me Spanish. 5. I did not

speak Spanish correctly. 6. I wished to l earn to speak it and write

it perfectly. 7. I n order to learn Spanish I took lessons nearly ev eryday. 8. Doiia I sabel , Don Fel ipe

’s w ife, was handsome and v ery

courteous. 9. The two children (hi jos) , Emily and Char les, were

dark-complexioned. 10. They spoke Spanish and French, and

they wished to learn E nglish. 1 1 . When I talked E ngl ishwith themthey were glad (contentes) . 1 2 . I was able to give them lessons

near ly every day. 13. One day it rained, and I could not give theman E ngl ish lesson. 14. But they learned the lesson and wrote theexercise .

99. I nflat ion de los adjetivos. Per excepcion los siguientes

adjetivos termmados en consenante forman eu femenino afiadiendo

LESSON XXI I 81

ans e : l . los adjetivos terminados en - ta,-6n y - or (sin incluir

los comparatives terminados an - or) ; 2 . les adjetivos que denotan

cl género mascul ino y va generalmente precedido del articulo

a. Se puede suprimir cl articulo cuando el nombre de la lengua sigueinmediatamente al verbo hablar,o cuando as use. con la preposicieu en.

b. En ciertas expresiones se prefiere el termino cu tel lano ai de

y en algunos paises

hispanoamericanes l laman eomunmente a la lengua nacional cl u ste

101 . La mayor pm de los verbos irregulares forman eu im

perfecto de indicative regularmente . Asi, pues, este tiempo es

regular en los verbos irregulares ester, tener, poder. y querer .

Hay que notar que estos pretéritos irregulares sufrennu cambio en eu radical y no l levan el acento en las personas primeray tercera del singular.

LE SSON XXI I

103. The Definite Articl e is R equired. 1 . Before a noun

used in a general sense to denote al l of the thing or kind it

Lasmujeresm an h e flores. Women (as a rule) love flowe '

s

But, Compramos fierce. We are buying (some) flowers .

2 . Before a proper nounmodified by a title or a descriptiveadjective, except in direct address.

El senor Garcia. Mr . Garcia .

L ittle E l izabeth.

But, Buenoe dine, senor Gerda. Good day,M r . Garcia.

a . Don and done (used before given names only) are exceptions in

m Dofla Emil ia s‘

s not at home.

82 FIRST SPANISH‘

OURSE

Mr . and Mrs.

m Mrs ,madam lady.

Var,to no

I my (tel l ). domy (tel l ). am”vino

Sarcoma F L ORAL Si tcom s Paw n

I r,togo

I went, did go, was geing ; do.

Samoa/mibe

Preterite

Ver

I eaw, did eee; dc.

Suzann a P r e nsa Pavmdijedijistedijo

I r Venir

I went, did go; etc. I came,dt’

d corne; etc.

Smam a Prom Smom n a r.

LESSON XXI I 83

a. Thie is Mcauseir has loet ite ewn preterite and has borrowed that oi m . Compare

el hierro. iron

el epeil ido, eurname, iamily name el marldo, husbandel beutimo, baptinn; nombre de

bautismo, baptismal or givcnM fl httla smal l

u n do,- e,married

conocer, to know - be ac canes

quaintedwith),meet la tarjeta,card; tarjete de vh lte,

M useiul

A. Contimiese. l . Fui a verlos. 2. Los v i . 3. Vine a

ver a Vd. 4. Le dije la verdad . 5. Conoci al senor Garcia.

B . 1 . E n Granada oenoei a los seiiores de Garcia (al

de don "do e] maride, dofia Emil ia la esposa, y laeu hija . 3. Don Fernando me invite a

ma. 4. Fui a verlos y me recibieron cordialmente . JI I dia . lon Fernando v ino a v erme . 6. La criadame entrego 1a tarjeta de v isita del senor . 7. En la tarjetal ei : Fernando Garcia y Moral es. 8. Cuando oenoei biena este senor, le pregunté el significado de estos nombres.

9. Me dije que Fernando era su nombre de bautismo (o de10. Dijo también que Garcia era cl apel l ido de su

padre y Morales el apel l ido de eumadre. 1 1 . M e expl icoque

muchos espanoles usan los dos apel l idos. 1 2 . Me ensene

una tarjeta de v isita de dotia Emil ia. 1 3. En esta tarjeta

P ile is the baptismal iont.


lei : “ Emil ia Gonzalez de Garcia. 14. Me expl ico que en

E spaiia las mujeres easadas conservan el apel l ido del padre.

1 5. Gou dlez era cl apel l ido de l padre de doi ia Emil ia.

16. Me dije también que el nombre y los apel l idos de la

pequeiia Isabel eran : Isabel Garcia y Gonzalez .

esta-spreguntas, escribiera en la pimrra los nombres dc bautismo (0 dc

pil e ) y los apel l idos dc la famil ia Garcia. 1 . Cuando Vd. estuvo

en Granada 41a quiénes conocio? 2 . (De cuantas personas

se componia esa fami l ia? 3—5. 1,0 m se l lamaba el marido?la espow ? la hija? 6. {L e inv ite a Vd. don Fernando a

hacerles una v isita? 7. LFué Vd. a v erlos? 8. n mo lorecibieron a Vd.? 9. aVino don Fernando a hacerle a Vd.

una visita? 10. gQué le ent g o a Vd. la criada? 1 1 iQuénombres estaban escritos en la tarjeta? 1 2 . pregunto

Vd. al senor el significado de esos nombres? 13— 1 5. gCual

era el nombre de bautismo del marido? de la esposa? de

la hija? 16— 18. gCuales eran los apel l idos del marido? de

la esposa? de la hija? 19. LEn E spafia conservan lasmujerescasadas el apel l ido del padre? 20. Los hijos usan cl apel l idode la madre también, gno es verdad?

D. 1 . Man is mortal . 2 . Men are mortal . 3. I ron is useful .

4. I ron is more useful than gold. 5. H e is buying iron with gold.

6. Do you l ike flowers? 7. Yes, sir; I l ike flowers. 8. I ambuyingflowers for my mother . 9. M r . Garcia is a Spaniard. 10. Mrs.

Garcia (Le seiiore de Garcia) is Spanish. 1 1 . I met M r. andM rs.

Garcia in Granada. 12 . I met M iss Garcia also. 13. What areyour given names? 14. What is your surname?E . 1 . M r. Garcia y Morales was the father of l ittle E lizabeth.

2 . M rs. Gonzalez de Garcia was her mother . 3. The surname of

E l izabeth was Garcia y Gonzalez. 4. E l izabeth was a handsome,dark-complexioned [gir l]. 5. L ike (Como) al l Spanish girls she

flowers. 7. She used to buy flowers every day. 8. M r . Garcia

did not l ike flowers. 9. He would say that coal and iron are

more useful than flou rs. 10. One day he bought coal to warmthe house. 1 1 . He said that he could not warm the house with

flowers (l por qué no se use cl articulof ) . 1 2 . Visiting cards are

useful . 13. When Don Fernando ~ame to seeme, the maidservant

handedme this gentleman’

s card. 14. I read on the card his givenname and his family names. 15. I asked (to) Don Fernando themeaning ef these names and he explaimd them to me.

109. E l articulo determinedo as use : 1 . delante de un nombreusado en sentido colectivo y que se refiere a toda la clase o especie ;

2. delante de un nombre propiomodificade por un titulo o adjetivodescriptive, exceptuandese cl vocativo.

a . Los términos don y dofia (delante de nombres de lmutismo) debcn

articulo determinado.

b. No se ol vide cuales son los significados de las veces senor,

eefiore, sei lori to, y M a l ta.

106. —a . Ir y m tienen el mismo preterite . E sto se debe a que

el verbo ir ha pcrdido su pret’rito y ha tornado el del verbo eer .

LE SSON XXI I I

107. Definite Articl e for Possessive . 1 . When speaking

of parts of the body or articles of clothing, the definite articleis general ly used instead of the possessive adjective .

I lostmy hat.

2 . To avoid ambiguity, an indirect object pronoun maybe used also.

Me corté el dedo. I cutmy finger .

I pu"onmy hat.

0 . But the possessive is general ly used before the subject of a sen

tence : su sombrero es nuevo, his hat is new .

80 FIRST SPANISR COURSE

b. Note the fol lewing me oim + the name oi a part el the body

lar objects one of which belongs to eachmember of a group,the singular is general ly used in Spanish.

since each child M l two.)

“mu mPresent Indicative

R acer,tomake. do Poser, topd

[ make (do), domake (do), ammalo I ptd,dopul ,ampuaino; etc.

Smouu n Sarcoma Pecan .

Dar, lo ( he

I give, do give , amgiving; etc.

Sw ansea P wm

doy

Preteri i e

I made (did),didmake (did do); dc. I pal , did put; etc.

Grumman Pw nar.

88 FI R ST SPAN ISH COURSE

A. Contimiese. l . Abri los ojos. 2 . Me lavé la cara y

las manos. 3. Me cepil lé los cabel los (el pelo) . 4. Yo

tenia hambre . 5. No lo hice. 6. Yo conozco al seiior

Morales. 7. Me puse el sombrero. 8. Le di el l ibro

B . 1 . Los dos nifios se despertaron y abrieron res ojos.

2 . Sal taron de la cama porque ya eran las siete . 3. [La

familia se desayunaba a las siete y media ! 4. Los nines se

lavaron la cara y las manos con agua y jabon. 5. Y se las

secaron con una toal la. 6. E n seguida se l impiaron lesdientes con cepil lo y polvos. 7. Se peinaron y se cepil laron

los cabel los (0 cl pelo) . 8. E n este memento entr6 en el

cuarto lamadre de los nines. 9. Buenos dias,mama, dijeron

los nines. 10. Buenes dias, hijos mios, respondi6 la madre .

1 1 . Ya es hora del desayuno. Vamos al comedor . 1 2. Los

nines se apresuraron a vestirse . 13. Porque hacia frio en

el cuarto y teuian hambre.

C. 1 . LA qué hora se desayunaba la fami lia? 2 . LA qué

hora se despertaron ios nines? 3 . gAbrieron los ojos losnines? 4. zSal taron de la came? 5. gCon qué se lavaron

la cara y las manos? 6. (Con qué se las secaron? 7. LCon

qué se l impiaron los dientes? 8. {Se peinaron y se cepil laronlos cabe l los (el pelo)? 9. En este memento gquién entr6 en

el cuarto? 10. aQué l e dijeron los nines? 1 1 . gQué respondi61a madre? 1 2 . gQué hicieron los niiios en seguida? 13.

{Pe r qué?

D. Trad iizcase, y repitase con los sujetes de los verbos en plural .l . The chi ld opened his eyes. (E l nine abrio los ojos. Los nines

abrieron l os ojos.) 2 . The child washed his face and hands. 3. I

cl eaned my teeth with [a] toothbrush. 4. I combed my hair .

‘

5. I brushed my hair. 6. You made haste to dress. 7. You were

hungry. 8. I was born in the United States.

Omit. M e peiné is sufli cient (but in 5 the noun is required) .

LESSON XXI I I 89

E . 1 . Good day, my children, said the mother upon entering

(588, 4) the room. 2 . Good day, mamma, said the children. 3.

The children jumped out of bed, for it was hal f-past seven o’clock.

4. And they had-breakfast (imperf .) at eight! 5. Theymade hasteto wash their faces and hands w ith soap and water. 6. Then theybrushed their hair and cleaned their teeth. 7. To (Para) clean theirteeth they made use of (se sirvieron de) toothbrushes and tooth

powder. 8. They made haste to dress because it was breakfasttime. (véase B, 9. They were cold and hungry. 10. Whenchildren are cold, they w ish to warm themse l ves. 1 1 . When theyare hungry, they wish to eat. 1 2 . Children always have [a] goodappetite. 13. I knew these chil dren and their parents. 1 4. Theywere al l born ( a Al l were born) in Spain.

107. Empl eo del articul o determinado en vez del posesivo.

l . Para referirse a las diferentes partes del cuerpo humane o a

las diversas prendas de vestir se emplea el articulo determinadoen vez del adjetivo posesivo.

2 . Para evitar ambig iiedad se puede emplear un compl ementoindirecto pronominal .

a . E n cambio se hace use del adjetivo posesivo cuando se trata del

sujeto de la frase.

b. H ay que notar cl empl eo del v erbo tener con cl nombre de las

partes del cuerpo humane .

108. Use distributive .— Cuando se hablo. de objetos semejantes

de los cuales uno corresponde a cada individuo del grupo, en espanolse emplea por regla general el singular .

1 10.— a . E l imperfecto de indicative de los verbos hacer, poner y

dar se forma regul armente.

I I L — a . E l imperfecto y el pretérito de conocer se forman regu

larmenta también.

1 1 2. La mayor parte de los verbos terminados en - cer o —cir

después de vocal se conjugan come conocer (tales como nacer,

l ucir. E stes verbos l levan el nombre generico de Incipientes.

l . nadie, no one, nobody

ninguno (ningdu), - a,no,none tampoco, neither

No one came .

I have nothing, or I haven't any

Ii o conczco a (§68) nadie en I know ne one, or I do not know

I have nothing, or I haven't any

No tengo ni pluma ni papel . I have neither pen nor paper, or

I haven’t either pen or paper.

1 1 4. Changes in Spel l ing . According to the Spanish

the spel l ing of the stemof an inflected word, to show that the

pronunciation does not change .

1 . The rul es for the more common changes are

Sacar : saco, I take out saque, I took out.

Ll egar : l iege, I arrive ; l l egué, I arrived.

Coger : cojo, I catch; coges, you catch.

Empezar : empece, I began; empezaste, you began. Luz, l ight;laces, lights.

EXER CISES

aguardar, to await, wait for l l evar, to carry

la americana, coat (of aman's buei la m dig etocldng hese

ness suit) ‘ mirar, to look atblusa, blouse los pantalonea, trousers

'

bolsiilo, pocket’ in p onds do vestir, article of

la corbata, necktie, cravat cl reloj (do holaiilo). watch;reloj (de pared o demeaa),

corto,- a, shert clock ‘

is ropa, clothes; ropa interim,

la chequeta, (boy’s) coat, jacket

lama -M ons cl m al ice

creo que no, I bel ieve not; digo que ai, I say yes; yo no, not I

acababa ' do hablar,he had just spoken; acabd de hablar ,he finished

A . Continue”. 1 . Due que si . 2 . Empecé a vestirme .

3. Acabé de vestirme . 4. No conozco a nadie en Caracas.

5. No pido nunca nada '

a nadie . 6. Hace un aiio que v ive

aqui . 7. Hace un mes que estudio el espaiiol .

E scribaee. 8. Presents de indicative dc corregi r (i) , to cor

rect; veneer , to conquer ; nacer, to be born. 9. P retérito de

l eer, to read; oir, to hear ; pagar, to pay; sacar, to take out;

rezar, to pray.

B . l . Después de lavarse la cara y las manos los ninesempezaron a vestirse . 2. Se pusieron la ropa interior y lasmedias (o los calcetines) . 3 . En seguida se pusieron los

pantalones, la blusa y la corbata. 4. Come estosnil l es tenfan

1 Al so cal led l ace in some Spanish-American countries.

1 Also cal led bol sa (as in M ex ico) .0 Also used in the singular : el pantal bn, trousers.

0 I t is usual ly not necessary to express do bol sil lo.dopared or domen .

Only the preaent and the imper fect oi acag

h‘at arc used ior Eng iiah hase

LESSON XXIV 93

el uno siete anos y el otro nueve, no usaban pantalones

largos. 5. Para ponerse los zapatos se sentaron en la cama.

6. L os hombres usan lev ita o americana (saco) y chaleco.

7. Los ninos usan chaqueta pero no new chaleco. 8. E stos

ninos l l evaban en el bolsil lo cortaplumas nuevos que su

padre acababa de darles. 9. Ni el uno ni el otro tenia reloj .

10. M ientras se vestian, miraban la hora (the time) en el

reloj de pared . 1 1 . A siete ymedia acabaron de vestirse .

12 . Y se dirigieron al comedor donde los aguardaban sus

C . 1 . 1,0q son las prendas de vestir de 1 1 niho de

siete al tos? 2 . LUsa pantalones cortos o largos‘

f 3. 1,Usa

chaqueta o levita? 4. gUsa chaleco? 5. {E n d6nde se

sentaron estos ninos para ponerse los zapatos? 6. M ientras

se vestian, {en quemiraban la hora? 7. 1A qué hora aca

baron de vestirse? 8. LA d6nde se dirigieron en seguida?

9. LQuiénes los aguardaban en el comedor? 10. gQuél levaban los ninos en el bolsil lo? l l . gQuién acababa dedarles los cortaplumas? 1 2 . 1,Tenian el los relojes?

D. (Debs tenerse presente que not any es igual a noone 0 none; notanything a nothing ; etc.) 1 ..

J

Haven’

t you anything to write with

[ as with which ac) to ite 2 Not I . I have neither pen nor

ink. 3.WWIfimgg I haven’t anything . 5. I never have

anything. 6. H aven’t you any friends? 7. Yes, sirsxr ; I have some

friends. 8. I haven’t any. 9. We hav e not studied the lesson.

10. We have studied the lesson [for] two hours.

E . I . Do boys ten years ol d of ten years) wear long trousers?2. I bel ieve not. Boys ten years ol d wear short trousers. 3. Theynever wear long trousers. 4. Men wear long trousers and coats

and waistcoats (vests) . 5. The two children of whom (de quienes)we were speaking made haste to dress. 6. I t was cold in the roomand they were hungry . 7. They put on their underclotbes, theirstockings and their shoes. 8. They put on their blouses and neck


to see the time. 10. They did not carry watches in their pockets.

1 1 . Before entering the dining room, they combed [their hair]again (nieces w h en) . 12. At a quarter pm eight o

’

clock they

had just sat down at the tabl e. 14. They had been waiting fifteenminutes. 15. Al l began (the) breakfast with [a] good appetite.

1 1 3. Pronombres y adverbios negatives : l :

2. Cuando estos vocablos negativos siguen al verbo, el adverbio

1 14. Cambios ortogrl flcos. De acuerdo con el sistema pros6dico castel lano, con objeto de conservar el sonido del radical deuna palabra. es necesario a veces cambiar su ortografia.

a. E l verbo cuyo infinitivo termina en —jar, conserva la j.

2 . Cuando el radical de un v erbo de la segunda o tercera con

jugacion te rmina en a, e, u c, an pretérito se forma de la manera

a. Obsérvense los acentos gréficos excepcional es sobre la segunda

persona del singular y primera y segunda de l plural , y el cambio de lasterminaciones —iGy

—te en -

y6 y-

ye en l a tercera persona . E sto

se debe a que la 1 acentuada junto a las vocal es a, e, o requiere el

acento escrito; pero la y substituye a la i no acentuada cuando vs

1 15. Para expresar una accion o estado que continua del pasadoal presente, en espanol se hace uso del tiempo presente gramaticalmientras que er. inglés se requiere cl presente perfecto.

a . I gualmente, si la accion o estado continué desde nu periodo de

tiempo pasado hasta otro menos remoto, en espanol se expresa la idea

mediante cl tiempo imperfecto mientras que en ing lés se usa el plus


1 1 9. Names of the Months of the Year : enero, febrero,

noviembre, dici embre.

Al l are of the mascul ine gender.

120. Days of the Month. The cardinal numbers are

used to express the days of themonth,with the one exception

The first, the second, the third,el tres, etc. de enero.

cl cab no, horse la semana, weeklos den ts, the rest, others el sitio, place, site

able, adv., onlyel lago, lake tards, adv., late

temprano, adv., earlynecesario,

- a, necessary

partir do, to leave, depart from

pescar , to fish filfimo, - a, last

la poblacion,‘town el verano, summer

el rlo, river

hace buen (mat) tiempo, the weather is fine (bad) ; montsr a cabal lo,to ride on horseback.

veré el quince de agosto. 3. Montaré a cabal lo. 4. No me

guetaria montar a cabal lo. 5. Me equivoqué. 6. Hace

B . l . E ste verano pasaremos algunas semanas en el

campo. 2 . Partiremos de la poblacion el primero (cl uno) 0el dos de jul io. 3. Y volveremos el ul timo dia de agosto.

4. Buscaremos una casa en na sitio hermoso. 5. No seradificil encontrar una casa con jardin. 6. En la poblacion me isvanto tarde . 7. En el campome levantaré temprano. 8. Me

‘

l Also pueblo. or. it smal l , puebl ecito orman .

W N W 97

varios l ibros. 10. Si l lueve, leeremos los l ibros. 1 1 . Si hace

buen tiempo, mi hermana montara a cabal lo. 12. Yo

pescaré o nadaré en las aguas de algun lago o rto. 13. Crei

que seria necesario pm el verano en la poblacibn, peromeequivoqué. 14. No me gustarta pasar los meses de jul io y

C. l . LDbnde pasaran Vds. el verano? 2 . 1,011m

4. gQué buscaran Vds. en el campo? 5. gEn la poblacion

se levanta Vd. temprano o tarde? 6. (E n cl campo se

levantara Vd. temprano? 7. {Se acostara Vd. tempranotambién? 8. Si l lueve, aque leera Vd.? 9. Si hace

buen tiempo gmontara a cabal lo eu hermana do Vd.?

10- 1 1 . Si hace buen tiempo gen d6nde pescara (nadara)Vd.? 12 . LCreyoVd. que seria necesario pasar el verano

C. Aprindass dsmemona

Los demas de treinta y uno.

D. Tradfiscanse al espafiol las seis primeras frases y después

for-mala ise los respuestas. 1 -4. How many days has the month of

January (February, March, April )? 5. How many days are therein a week? 6. Howmany weeks are there in a month? 7- 9. The

(the) town? 1 1 . Shal l you go to the country? 1 2. Wil l he workthis summer? 1 3. Wil l he sw im in the lake? 14. Will they fishin the river? 15. I have just arrived 16. John arrivedtwo days ago.

‘ 17. Mary has been here [for] ten days

98 FI RST SPANISI I COURSE

E . l . The month ot nuary hss thirty-one dsys. 2. The

month of February has twenty-eight days. 3. January hm three

days more tban Febmary. 4. February hss four weeks : January

in (the) town. 6. We shal l go to the country the twentieth ol

June.

8. We shal l try te find a house with [a] garden. 9. Ii the weather

is finc,my brothers wil l ride en horseback. 10. 1 prcfcr tofish in the

waters ot some river or lake .

or write lettera 12. I n the country we shsl l gct up and go to bed

ear ly. 13. Sometimes in tbe city [itj woti ld be nw euary for-us

to-go-to-bed (acestsrnes) late . 14. 1 should l ike to l ive in the

1 1 6. 81 future y el cendicienal (0 future pasado) de indicativese forman ahadiendo al infinitive de los verbos las siguientes de

1 18. Todos los verbos que sufren cambios constantes en eu

dicional de una manera regular . Asi los verbos irregulares

1 19. Les nombres de l es meses del afie son del género

1 20. L es dias del mes. Para indicar los dies del mes se haceuso de los mimeros cardinales, con excepciOn de primera, que es

I t! )

if psesimo or pasade bc expressed or understoedmr if used

Those that end in —es have

the same formin the plural as in the singular .

negd sl martss. Be arrived on Tuesday.

? . trabaje les sl hades. I wesk on Saturdays.

acerdarss (us) ds, to remember

01 6: t

el dh'

scter,principal , director

la estacl dnn eason

per. o sn. la tards, in the

afternoon, or in the early evening ; per. o sn, la noche, in tbe evening

(qfter dark) er at night; d cnm school year ; el dia ds dsscanse, day

vacation time ; school ; a (en) la iflesia.to (at or in) church.

A . Contimtese. 1 . No 10 hare. 2 .

° Le diria la verdad.

3. Vendré a la. diez. 4. No pedrin venir . 5. Me pondréel sombrero. 6. No me acuerdo de la fecha.

B . 1 . La (5 103, 1 ) primavera es la primera estacion del

afio. 2 . E n la primavera apareceran las primeras fiores

hojas. 4. E l v erano es la estacion del calor . 5. E s tambiénel tiempo de las vacaciones. 6. Ustedes no tendran lecciones

que aprender ui ejercicios que escribir . 7. E l ote l lo es la

curse . 9. E ntonces iran Vds. a la escuela todos los dfasexcepto los sabados y los domingos. 10. Estes dfas seran

The time ismore specific when sn is used. \

la heja. leaf

el eteho, autumn, fal lk p h -m avens

M mto besin

rscitar, to recite

tssminar, to cnd, terminatevlsjo, -a, old

LWON XXVI 101

dias de descanso, pero los demas seran dfas de trabajo.

1 1 . Per la noehe Vds. prepararan las leccienu . 1 2. Per la

mafiana y por la tarde las recitaran'

. 13. E l domingo por lamafiana a irAn a la iglesia. 14. 1,Cudntos afios tiene el

dimeter de la escuela? 15.— No es v iejo : tendra treinta

y cince o cuarenta anos. 1 6. q ando termino el curse

pasado? 17.- No me aceerdo de la fecha : tel-minu te cl

0. 1 -4. LCual es la primera (segunda, tercera, ul tima)estacion del afio? 5. En la primavera Lqué aparecera en

nuestros jardines? 6. {De que se vestiran los Arboles?7—8. El verano (E l otofio) ads que es la estacion? 9. iCual

es el tiempo de las vacaciones? 10. LTendraVd. lecciones

que aprender en el verano? 1 1 . j En queestacion principiara

cl nuevo curse? 1 2— 1 3. Durante la semana zcuales ser in losd. 16 de descanso (de trabajo)? 14. gCuando prepararaVd.

las lecciones? 15. zCuando las recitaraVd.? 4A Hondaira Vd. los domingos? 17. LCuantos afios tiene

'

el directorde la escuela? 18. gCuando tel

-mine cl curse pasado?f E n las respuestas ascse el f tduro o eondmonal

"

de pre

babizl iad. l . gQué hora es? 2 . (Q ue hora era cuando Vd.

partie de Madrid? 3. {Q ue hora era cuando Vd. 11036 a

Barcelona? 4. 1,006 a atios tiene F el ipe? 5. iCudn

tos anos tenfa Carlos cuando muri6? 6. 1,D6nde estara

mi sombrero? (tradfizcase I t is probably in your room.)7. 1,D6nde estaranmis l ibros? (tradzizcase: They are probablyon the table.)

E . l . I studied (pr-ct.) Spanish last year .

0

2. Next year Ishal l study F rench. 3. The school year ended last month.

4. The new school year w il l begin next month. 5. Our vaca

tions are not long . 6. My friends arrived last Tuesday.

7. They wil l leave next F riday. 8. Sunday (5 103, l ) is [a]rest day. 9. Monday is [a] work day. 10. Summer is thewarm season (véase B. 1 1 . Winter is the cold season.


1 2 . Autumn is the season of fruits. 1 3. Spring is the season

F. 1 . Last year I studied Spanish. 2 . Next year I shal l studySpanish again 3. The second year wil l be more difficultthan the first year ,wil l it not? (n o es 4. The new school

year wil l begin the fifteenth of September . 5. The last school year

tions of summer) wil l last three months. 7. These wil l be monthsof rest. 8. I shal l be able to fish or swim every day. 9. [On]Sundays I shal l go to church. 10. I n the autumn I shal l go toschool Mondays, Tuesdays,Wednesdays, Thursdays, and Fridays.

‘

1 1 . The Saturdays and Sundays w il l be rest days. 1 2 . But [on]

of our school w il l be forty years old next month. 14. How old

are you? I shan’t tel l you how ol d I am. 15. Shal l you come

to see me this afternoon? 16. I shal l come to see you if I can.

17. What time is [it]? [I t] is probably about eleven o’clock.

1 8. I haven’t my watch. [I t] is probably on the table in (de)

RESUMEN GRAMATI CAL

1 21 . Los v erbos que siguen son de los que forman de unamanera‘

regular eu future y condicional (0 future pasado) :1 22. Future y condicional de probabil idad. E l future de

indicative se use amenudo para denotar probabil idad o suposicion

en tiempo presente, y el condicional para denotar probabil idad o

suposicien en tiempo pasado.

1 23. E s indispensable el uso del articulo determinado delantede las expresiones de tiempo modificadas por las palabras proxime,pasado, etc.

1 24. Los nombres de l os dfas de la semana sonmascul inos, ygeneralmente v an precedidos del articulo determinado si se ex

presan las palabras proximo o pasado o si se sobrentienden, 0 Si

los nombres de los dias se usan en sentido general . Los que ter

minan en - es tienen la misma forma para el plural que para el

l Los lunes.martes, etc. Do not repeat the adiele.


1 28. When used w ith estar, a past participle has the force

of an adjective and simply denotes a resul tant state, rather

1 29. The past participle is used with ear to form the

tenses of the pasdve voice . The participle agrees in genderand number w ith the subject.

La carta serfi escrlta por don The letter wil l be written byDonJuan. Juan.

Don Pablo fuémuerte per on Don Pablo was kil led by a thief .

1 30. With passive v erbs, by is usual ly expressed by per ;but it may be expressed by do (instead of per) after someverbs that denote mental action.

La pnerts fue abierta por cl The door was opened by the

servant.

E l es amado de todos. H e is loved by al l (beloved of al l ) .

a. For the use of the reflexive instead of the passive, see 577, 3.

But the use of to be in E ng l ish real ly indicates the passive voice in

el arquitecto, architect grande, large, bigla class, class, kind

colocar, to place

comedo, —a, comfortabl e subl r, to go up, ascendconstruir, to build, construct el techo, roof

cubrir, to cover el tejarnanl ,‘ (wooden) shingleel telefono, telephone

91 my 833

A . Contimiese. 1 . Fuf ensefiado por mi padre . 2 . Yo

estaba cansado. 3 . Me equivocaba. 4. Quiero ser amado(13mos

t A roof of tiles (te jas) is cal l ed telado.

LE$ ON XXVI I 105

B . l . Nuestra casa fueconstruida por un buen arquitecto.

2 . No es grande, pero es hermomy comoda. 3. Las paredesestan construfdas de ladril los. 4. E l techo estacubierto con

pizarra (con tejamanfes) . 5. E n el piso bajo estan la sala (derecibo), la bibl ioteca, el comedor y la cocina. 6. Cuando

tories (o alcobas) y el cuarto de bane . 7. Prefiero la bi

bl ioteca a todas las demas piezas porque tiene l ibros de

9. Tenemos una buena cocina economica. 10. Se quemacarbon de piedra en el la (it) cuando se preparan las comidas . 1 1 . E n inv ierno la casa se cal ienta por vapor . 1 2 . E l

calor se produce en un calorffero central colocado en el

C. 1 . {Per quién fué construida la casa de Vds.? 2 . {Dequéestdn construidas las parades? 3 . {Con quéestacubiertoel techo? 4—5 . gQué piezas estan en cl piso bajo (al to)?6. aCual es la pieza que Vd. prefiere a las demas? 7. 1,Por

que? 8. 1,D6nde esta el tel éfono? 9. gDonde se preparan

las comidas? 10. 1,Como se cal ienta la casa en inv ierno?

l l . j En d6nde se produce cl calor? 1 2 . gDende esta colo

cado el calorffero? 13. (Time la casa luz eléctrica o de gas?

D.

‘

1 . The door closed (as sen d) . 2 . The door was closed bythe servant. 3. The door was (estaba) closed. 4. The w indowopened (se abrio) . 5 . The window was opened by Mary. 6. The

window was al ready open. 7. The book was written in E ngl ish.

8. I t was w ritten bymy brother . 9. This cooking-stove wasmadeby Pereda and Company (Compafifa) . 10. I t is very wel l made.

1 1 . I t is said that Spanish is spoken here . 1 2 . The house was

wel l buil t. 13. I t was built by a good architect. 14. The roof

is covered with shingles. 15. The house is warmed w ith (per)steam. 16. Coal is burned in the furnace. 17. Don F el ipe is


E . 1 . My uncle has just bought an eight- roomhouse a house

of eight rooms) . 2 . I t is not large, but it is very comfortable.

3. Al l the rooms in (de) the house are warmedwith steam. 4. And

there is electric l ight in al l the rooms. 5. There are four rooms onthe first floor : the reception room, the l ibrary, the dining room, and

the kitchen. 6. On the upper floor are four bedrooms and the

bathroom. 7. The roof of the house is covered with slate. 8. The

wal ls are built of brick (view B. 9. The house was built by anarchitect who l ives in Chicago. 10. The cooking-stove and the

furnace weremade by Ayer and Company, and they are well made.

uncle and aunt were not at home, but my ‘ousin showed me (me

case“) al l the rooms. 14. He prefers the l ibrary to the other

rooms, because he loves books (5103,

1 25. Participl es pasados (o pasivos) . Si el infinitive del verbotermina en - ar, su participio pasado termina en —ado ; si el infini

tive termina en - sr 0 —ir, el participio pasado termina en —ido.

eu participio pasado: 1 . Verbos regulates en todas las demas

4. Cuando el radical del verbo de la segunda o tercera conjugaciontermina en a, e, u e, la terminacion - ide del participio pasadorecibe el acento grafico.

1 27. Cuando el participio p'sado se usa come adjetivo, sui te

1 28. Cuando cl participio pasado acompafia al verbo estsr ,

adquiere el caracter de verdadero adjetivo denotando na simpleestado resul tante y no la voz pasiva.

129. E l participio pasado se usa con cl verbo ser para format lavoz pasiva. E l participio concuerda en género y numero con el

sujeto.

FI R ST SPAN ISH COURSE

Cendlfienal Perfsct‘

I shal l have spoben, shal l have l should haw spokemshould havs

been speaking; etc.

e onrl aa Paw n

The perfect tenses of al l verbs are formed l ike those ofhablar.

134.— 1 . I had (you had, etc.) spoken is usual ly expressed

in Spanish by hab la (hab las, etc.) hablado.

El no habfa venido.

Yo no lo habla hecho. I had not done it.

2 . H ubs (hubiste, etc.) hablado is used after the temporalconjunctions cuando, when, luego que, as soon as, and the

l ike. But w ith these conjunctions the simple preterite in

Luego que hubo venido, l e As soon as he had come, I tolddi je la verdad.

(Or,more commonly : luege que vine, lo di je la verdad,as soon as

he came, I told himthe truth.)

a . Note the fol lowing idiom: l l egado que hubo, as soon as he had

1 35. I n Spanish it is usual ly best not to place the subjector an adverb between the aux il iary and the past participle

of a perfect tense .

Has John come?éLe ha hablado Vd.? Have you spoken to him?Lo he preferido siempre.

Or Past Future Perfect.

LESSON XXVI I I 109

h umrvmhmplusgo que.as soon as

la lumbre, fire

el petr61eo, coal ei l, petroleumla piedra, stone

el cobre, copper

la chirnenea,fireplace

la gal er fa, gal l ery, veranda la vela, candle

dar a, to faee; no mfis que, only, no more than; habla, there was,

4. Yo no habfa vuelto. 5. Yo lo habré hecho.

B . 1 . Hemos pasado este inv ierno en Malaga. 2 . La

que vivfamos estaba,construida de piedra y tenfa

crecfan flores tropicales. 4. Entrabamos en el patio por el

zaguan. 5. En el piso bajo habfa una tienda en cada ladodel zaguan y algunos cuartos para los criados. 6. En el piso

principal3estaban la sala de recibe , el comedor, la cocina y

el cuarto de bane . 7. En cl segundo piso no habfa mas quealcobas que daban a la cal ls 0 a las gal erfas del patio. 8. Se

alumbraba la casa con velas y l timparas de petrol eo. 9. Y

floor is cal l ed the plan bajo or cuarto bajo. the second floor the plan principalor pr imer piso, the thi rdfloor the segunda piso. etc. I f there is an entresuelo

(a fl oor betw een the piso bajo and the piso principal .w i’ h low cei l ings. and

usua l ly occupied by the janitors and other servants) , the third floor is cal l edthe piso principal . the fourth floor the segunda piso. etc.

1 10

as calentaba la casa por la lumbre de las chimeneas o de

los braseros de cobre. 10. Para guisar (o cocinar) habfaen la cocina fogones

‘en que se quemaba carbon de leha.

1 1 . E l cl ima de Malaga durante el inv ierno ha sido casi

perfecto.

C . 1 . 1,D6nde han pasado Vds. este invierno? 2 . {De

qué estaba construida la casa en que Viv ian Vds.? 3. {Q ueclase de techo tenia la casa? 4. 4D6nde estaba el patio?

5. (Que crecfa en el patio? 6. n mo entraban Vds. en

el patio? 7—9. zQué habfa en el piso bajo? (piso princi

pal ? segundo piso?) 1 0. 1,0m se alumbraba la casa?

1 1 . n mo se calentaba? 1 2. aQué se quemaba en los

fogones? 13. 1,06mo ha sido el cl ima de Malaga durante

D. 1 . Has your friend arrived? 2 . Yes, sir ; he has just (591 )arrived. 3. Has Mr . Pereda come? 4. H e had not come thismorning . 5. Has the letter been (si de) w ritten by John or byChar les? 6. I t has not been written by Char les. 7. Charles has

not written it. 8. As soon as he had finished it, I read it. 9. Thishouse has been buil t by a good architect. 10. We have l ived

in this house [for] three years. 1 1 . I t ( a: the weather) hasnot been cold this winter .

E . 1 . I have l ived in Burgos and the other towns of the north(del norte) where the courtyards are covered. 2. And I have spent

two winters in Granada and Malaga where many courtyards are

(esti n) Open (descubiertos) . 3 . I have always preferred the houseswith the courtyards open and ful l of flowers. 4. I like to sit on theveranda of themain floor and look at the flowers. 5. Last winter

the window of my bedroom faced the street. 6. Some rooms

(fl ew ) in (de) the house had no windows. 7. But each one of

these rooms had a large door that faced the courtyard. 8. I hadan oil lamp (véase B. 8) to (para) l ight my bedroom. 9. I n somebedrooms there were only candles. 10. I had a [fireplace in my

1 See XV, E xercises. footnote 2 .

i

1 12 F IRST SPAN ISH COURSE

“8801‘ l

Haber do infinitive.

fil hs ds tener hsmhre.

El ls hs ds esntsr ests noche. 8he is to (or, she wil l ) sing tonight

Comm iene que hsm lo. He hns (got) to do it.

hay. there is (are) hshrt, there wil l be

hubo, there was (were) in habido, there has (have) been

Note that the present indicative of impersonal hsber is hay and

a. The noun or pronoun used with impersonal hsher is the object

poblacion?

Sf, senor ; lss hsymuy buena . Yes, sir ; there are (some) very

3. H ey que and hay que infinitive:

There is much to study.

One has to study much.

I know, do know, amknowing ; etc.

Pu rim.

LmBON XXIX 1 13

l knm,did knw ; dc.

188.— 1 . The immrfect indicative of saber is regular .2. The future and the conditional of saber are irregular

aahrfa, etc.

189. Meaning of Saber and Conocer

1 . Sabermeans to know,knmv how,can ( know how) .

tSahe VdJ a leecidn? Do you know the lesson?

2. Conocer means to know be acquainted w ith),become acquainted with) .

1 0mm Vd. ai senor Ortiz? Do you know Mr . Ortiz?

cl aroma,‘perfume, aroma el ol fato, sense of smel lcl olor, odor, smel l

el gusto, taste is palahra, word, speech

la lmportancia, importancemenos, less, leastmade, - a, dumb,mute

la nariz, nose la vista, sight

a or al perfm e. pafimc. Note that arom is mascul ine (seeO The outermr v isiblemar is cal l ed ereja.


A. Contimla e. 1 . Yo he do cantar esta noche.

‘ 2. No

eonozeo al seaer Ortiz. 3. No sé nadar. 4. Ne supe la lec

cien. 5. Tengo que estudiar muche.

E f f . El hombre tiene ojos para ver. 2. En este mundohay muche que ver . 3. El hombre tiene efdos para eir . 4.

Mi hermano cree que la v ista es de mis importancia que elofdo. 5. Pero yo prefe rirfa el oldo a la vista. 6. A mi me

gusta muca e la mus a . 7. Ln nariz sirve para percibir losolores. 8. E l ol fato es de menos importancia que la vista oel ofdo. 9. Pero aquién no em los aromas de las flores?10. La lengua es el organo principal del gusto y de la palabra.

1 1 . Sin la lcngua no podrfamos hablar : seriamos mudos.1 2. Sin la v ista no podrfamos ver : serfamos ciegos. 13. Sin

el ofdo no podr iamos ofr : seriamos sordos. 14. Y sin la

nariz no podrfamos percibir los olores.

C. Contédese. 1—2 . Para ver (Para eir) Lqué tiene el

hombre? 3. {Q ue sirve para percibir los olores? 4. 1,c

es el organ'

o principal del gusto? 5. aCual prefiere Vd., la

vista 0 el ofdo? 6. (L e gusts a Vd. la musica? 7. gCual

es de menos importancia, la v ista 0 el ol fato? 8. gAma Vd.

los aromas de 11 8 flores?Complétcnse las siguientes f rases. 9— 1 1 . Sin la Vista (Sin el

ofdo, la lougna) .

ne podrfamos 12— 14. Sin la v ista (Sin

D. 1 . Do you know M iss Ortiz? 2 . She is to sing to-night.

3. And I amto read. 4. Did you know the lesson? 5. I had beenstudying it three hours (51 15, a) . 6. But I did not know it.

7. Does this boy know .how to read? (l Sabe l eer este

8. H e can read a l ittle. 9. But he can not write. 10. Was theremuch to do? 1 1 . There were sev eral lessons to study. 1 2. One

had to study hard (muche) in order to learn them.

t In col loquial Spanish ye vey a cantar (ei-

yo eante) ests would be

1 16 F IRST SPAN ISH COURSE

LE SSON xxx

Present Participl es

Aprender : aprendiendo, l earning

2. Radical -changing verbs of the third conjugation

Pedir : pidiendo, asking

Note that the radical vowels e and e are changed to l and u respec

tively.

The present participles of radical-changing v erbs of the first and

second conjugations are regular.

3. Som ular verbs:

Decir udo, saying

Peder : pudiendo, being able Ver : viendo, seeing

Ser : siendo, being

But many irregular verbs form their present participles regular ly.

4. Change in Spe l l ing. I f the stem of a verb of the

second or the third conjugation ends in a vowel ,— iende

becomes —

yendo (but see

Leer : l eyendo, reading Ofr : oyendo,hearing

141 . Agr eement. The present participle is invariable in

Vi a un muchscho (a uns mu I saw a boy (a gir l ) reading a

chacha) l eyendo un l ibro. book.

R eview 588, 3 and 4

142. P rogressive F orms of Verbs. Engl ish to be 4

present participle often equal s Spanish ester or ir present

participle . I r is used to denotemotion or change of condition.

L ESSON XXX

Estoy estudiando. I amstudying .

We were working .

Ve corricndo. H e is w a ning, or he goes on the run.

R1 nine iba creciendo. The chi l dWa rs 9 rowing .

Se tué poniendo pal ide. She was turni l g pale .

a . The progressive forms are mod to express an act or state as in

progress at the time to which the speaker refers. They are used l ess

often and are more emphatic in Spanish than in Eng l ish.

b. E ster is not used w ith the present participles of set , ester, hither,and tener to formprogressive tenses.

1 43. Personal pronoun objects fol low a present participle

and are attached to it so that the v erb and object or objectsformone word . The participle then requires the accentmark.

H e is waiting for me .

But onemay also say : me estaaguardando.

EXER CISES

la acogida, reception el guante, g love

edibs, goodbye, farewel l incl inarse, to bow

enuncier, to announce fntimo, - a, intimatel lamar , to cal l , knock, ring (a

la doorbel l )el cebal l ere,

’gentl eman; jeshs la ocasien, occasion, opportunity

l l erol Sir ! el pie (pi ., pies), foot

cel ebrar, to rejoice at, be v ery presenter, to present

guitar , to take off

correr, to run, hurry la reverencie , bow

dispenser,to g ive, grant; to ex seguir (i ), to continue, go on,

mac, pardon keep on

p a les, thanks, thank you el sobretodo, overcoat

haste luege, farew el l for a while, goodbye til l we meet again; otrsvez, again ; ponerse pal ide, to turn pale, grow pal e .

A. Contimiese. l . Voy corricndo. 2 . E stoy escribiendo.

3. Yo iba creciendo. 4. Yo estaba estudiando. 5. Me fui

l Pub is here the preterite of it . not of eer .

Cabal l ero is more formal than sel l er. There is no feminine form of

1 18 F IRST SPANI SH COURSE

poniendo palide, —a. 6. 4A quién he de anunciar? 7. E l

gusto era mfo.

B . 1 . L lamé a la puerta. 2 . El criadome abri6 la puerta,y yo entré en la casa. 3 . Le pregunté al criado: gE sta el

senor Gonzalez? 4. E l criado respondi6: Si, el senor esta

en casa. 5. gTendraVd. la bondad de decirme su nombre?

6. LA quién be de anunciar? 7. Quitandome el sombrero,los guantes y el sobretodo, entré en la sala (de recibe) .

8. Don Fel ipe me recibi6 cordialmente, y me dije : gComoesta Vd., cabal lero? 9. L e respondi : Muy bien, gracias,

gy Vd.? 10. Me presente a su esposa, dofia Carol ina

Herrera de Gonzalez . 1 1 . Yo me incl ine y dije : Ccl ebro la ocasion dc conocer a Vd.

, sefiora. 1 2 . Despuésel senor Gonzalez me presente a su hijo, don Carlos.

1 3. I ncl inandome otra v ez, yo le dije : Cabal lero, tengomucho gusto en conocer a Vd. 14. Don Car los respondi6 : E l

gusto es mio, cabal lero . 1 5. Al despedirme de la famil ia,yo di gracias por (for ) la buena acogida que me habia dis

pensado. 16. Haciendo una rev erencia -dije : A los pies deVd. , senora. 1 7. Beso a Vds. la mano, cabal leros. 18. QueVds. lo pasen bien (May you al l keep wel l) . 19. Cuando medespido de un amigo intimo, le digo : Adios, o Hasta luego.

C . Contéstese. 1 . gQuién abri6 la puerta cuando Vd.

l l amo? 2 . (Q ue l e pregunto Vd. al criado? 3. {Q ue lerespondi6 a Vd. el criado? 4. gQué se quite Vd. antes de

entrar en la sala? 5. gCémo le recibi6 a Vd. don Fel ipe?6. gCual era el apel l ido de don F el ipe? 7. LA quién le presente a Vd. este cabal lero? 8. Al incl inarse Vd., aque ledijo a dofia Carol ina? 9. gCual era el apel l ido de la se

nora? 10. Después 4a quién le presente a Vd. don F el ipe?

l l . aQué ls dijo Vd. a den Car los? 1 2 . aQué ls respondi6a Vd. este senor? 13. Al despedirse de

’

la fami l ia, gquéNote this common omission of on case.

1 20 F IRST SPANISH COURSE

formada con los verbos ester o it y el participio presente. E l

verbo ir denota movimiento o cambio de condicion.

a. Las formas progresivas se usan para expresar un acto o estado

en ejecucién en e l memento a que se refiere el sujeto de la oracion.

E stas fermas se usanmenos y sonmas enfaticas en espanol que en inglés.

b. E l verbo ester no se construye con cl participio presente de los

143. Los pronombres personal es complementarios siguen al

participio presente y toman el caracter de encl iticos, es decir

que van unidos a él formando una sola palabra. E n este case el

participio presente l leva el acento grafico.

LE SSON xxx:

Imperative Mood

Smew s P wnar.

(you) speakI I . Aprender : aprende (tfi), apr ended (vosotros, - as), (you) l earnIII. Vivir : vive (til ) , vivid (vosotros, —as) , (you) l ive

The imperative mood is used onl y affirmatively. In nega

tive commands the subjunctive is used .

1 45. Sub junctive M ood. P resent Tense

Pw mn SI NGU LAR P wm

eprende

Pr om

vivhis

LESSON XXXI 1 21

146. The Present Subjunctive (1 ) may be used to express

direct command or wish; or (2) 1t may be used m sub

147. Forms of H ebler Used to E xpress a Direct Cemmend or Wish.

Amman vn N E GATI VE

Smear-as

hebl e Vd. no hebl e

(que) heble l et himspeak (que) no hablo 61, let him not

Pw m

no hebl emes, let us not ask

hebled (vosotros, - ee), no hebléis (vosotros, - as) do not

(que) heblen el los, l et them (que) no hebl en el los, l et themnot speak

Al l regular v erbs of the first conjugation are thus inflected .

R egular verbs of the second and third coniugations use

similar ly the forms of aprender and vivir given in

145.

a. I n the third person, the que may sometimes be omitted. Withoutque the command is more direct.

1 43. The Spanish present subjunctive used in di rectcommands is general ly to be expressed in E ng l ish by let andthe infinitive, if the subject is not in the second person. See

a . But if letmeans allow or pevmit, it is to be translated by dejaror permitir : déjeme Vd. entrer, let me go in; permits Vd. que Juanhebl e, let John speak, permit John to speak (l it., permit that John speak) .

b. In the first person plural one may say either estudiemos or vamose estudiar, let as study. Let us not study is no estudiemes.

1 Or que 6! hebl e, que el l os hebl en, etc.

122 F IRST SPANISH COURSE

the object pronoun es, you, yourselves : sentees (for sea

ted-os) , seat yourselves; except ides, go away, from irse, to

go away.

2 . The final — s of the first person plural of the present

subjunctiv e is omitted before the object pronoun nos, us,

ourselves sentémenos (for sentemos-nos) , let us seatourselves.

1 50. For'

the position of the personal pronoun objects of

a v erb used to express a command or w ish, see §85.

a . But if the verb is introduced by que, a personal pronorm objectprecedes the v erb : que lo traiga el la desde luege, let her bring it at once.

b. The present subjunctiv e, second person, w ith or w ithout que,may also express a mere w ish : que sees fel iz, may you be happy;

l vivs el reyl long l ive the king !

la dosis,dose

emerge, —a, bitter fel iz, happyapetecer, to have an appetite la fiebre, fev er

la medicine,medicineel eutembvil , motor car, automobil e observer , to observe

beber, to dr ink la pil dora, pil l

la el pul se , pulse

deber,must, to be (expected) to cl remedio, remedydébil , weak e l resfriado, cold (a disease)

e l rey, king

dolor, pain, sorrow ; dolor de tel efonear, to tel ephone

A . Repttase con cl verbo en plural . 1 . Habl e. mas al to.

2 . Hable Vd.mas al to. 3 . Hable él mas al to. 4. Aprendel a

l ecci6n . 5. Aprenda Vd. la l ecci6n . 6. Que el la la aprenda.

R epttase negativamenfe . 7. Tel efonea al médico. 8. Cometodo lo que apetezcas (anything you wish) . 9. Témela Vd.

1 0. Agitela Vd. 1 1 . Sentaos. 1 2 . Sentémonos.

B . 1 . Carlos, telefonea al médico que estoy"enfermc.

2. Si,senor ; l e telefonearédesde luego. 3. Ya telefoneéal

124 F IRST S ‘l l SH 000l

E . 1 . t n1 was il l ,Ch etelephoned toDr . Heredia. 2 . The

latter (Este) came to m: u se in his motor car . 3. Char les

Opened the door for-him (i t 4. Taking oil his hat, his gloves, andhis overcoat, he came into (entre en) my room. 5. I said to him:Good day, doctor ; I amvery il l . 6. He answered : Let (5148, a)me see your (ls) tongue and take your (el ) pulse. 7. You have a

cold, but you are ne t very il l . 8. But, I answered, I have [ti] headache, and I haven

’t [any] appetite. 9. You haven

’t [any] fev er,

said the good physician. 10. I took your (el ) pulse and yourtemperature (is temperature) . 1 1 . H ere are twel ve white pil ls.

1 2 . Take one ev ery two hours, and drink a great deal of water.13. And here is a bottle of medicine. 14. Take a teaspoonful

fifteen minutes before each meal . 1 5. I n the morning you

may (puede) eat anything you wish. 16. Do not eat much at

(de) night

144. Mode imperative . E l modo imperative solo se usa en la

el subjuntivo.

orden o deseo directo; o (2) puede usarse en clausulas subordinadas.

147. Fermes del verbo hablar en expresiones de mende o

Todos los verbos regulates de la primera conjugacion se con

jugan como cl verbo hablar . Los v erbos regulares de las segunda y

aprender y vivir (véanse los 55144,

e . E 1 vocablo que se supr ime al gunas v eces en la tercera persona.

Sin que, la idea demando resul ta mas directs .

146. E 1 presente dc subjuntivo,en expresiones demando directas,se traduce generalmente al inglés mediante el vocablo let y cl infinitive, con tal que el sujeto no sea de la segunda persona .

a. Pero si let significa dejar o per-itir, debe traducirss por estos

LESSON XXXII

b. E n la primera persona plm-al se puede decir estud emoe o n moe

a estudh rJ fi ue etudy. Ld m not dudy equivale a no estudiemoe.

1 19.— l . La - d final de la segunda persona plural del imperativo

2 . La - s final de la primera persona plural del presente de subjunti vo se omite delante del pronombre complementario nos.

150. Para la colocacion del pronombre personal complementode un verbo en expresiones de mando o deseo, véase el 585.

a. Pero si el verbo va precedido de la voz que,el pronombre personal

6. E l presente de subjuntivo. segunda persona, con la voz que 0 sin

LE SSON xxxn

R adical -Changing Verbs. 1 . Imperative Mood

Present Subjunctive

Cerrar, to close

Pw m Puma .

d erre

1 26 FIRST SPANISH COURSE

SsntIrJe feel Damir. lo slesp

Pedir,to askBarnum Pecan .

Note that in the present subjunctive, as in the present indicative,the radical vowe l e chmgu to l e or hand the radical vowel o chsnges to

m when the root is stru sed.

In the third eonjugationw wel e changes to hmd the rsdiod w wel o chmges wmin the first

1 62. Subjunctiv e in Sub stantive Cl eaned — The present

w ish (55146, I t is also used to express an indirectcommand or w ish, after msndsr, to command, order; pedir (i) ,to ask; querer (ie) , to w ish; preferir (l o) , to prefer ; sconsejsr ,to advise; de jar , to let, al low ; prohibit , toforbid, and the l ike.

mm nds que yo cierte ls H e ordemme to close (that 1 shal lclose) the door .

I w ish you to be (that you maybe) happy.

Prel erlmos que ls escribe 61. We prefer that he write (that heshould write) it.

Prohibe que tn entree en I forbid your entering (that youshould enter ) that house.

Eng l ishfl

by : (1 ) the simpl e subjunctive (as in thaths write) ; (2) shal l ,A clanse thst is the subiest or the object of s verb is cal led s substantive

1 28 FI RST SPANISH COURSE

3.— S1, sel l er ; mi M re desea que le compre las poesfas

de E spronceda. 4. Yo también necesito comprar varioslibros. 5. En mi bibl ioteca ya tengo muchas obras clasicas.6. Tengo las Obras eomple las de Calderon de la Barca y lasObras escooidas de L0pe de Vega. 7. El profesor de caste

l lanome aconseja que busque (51 14) una buena edicion del

M ale . 8. Me dice que es la obra mas importante de lal iterature castel lana. 9. Aquf tiene Vd. na buen ejem

plar, ilustrado y bien encuadernado. 10.— Voy a pedir le

al dependiente que me ensene otra edicion mejor que esta.

l l . — Aquf tiene Vd. una que acaba do publ icar (591 ) lamejor casa editorial de Madrid. 12 . E s una edicion de lujoencuadernada en doce vol t

’

imenes. 13. l Cudnto vale la

edici6n7— Vale veinticinco pesos. 14. E s cara; pero la

tomo. 1 5. gQuiere Vd. que lamande a su casa? 16.— Si ;

bagame Vd. cl favor de mandarmela a casa.

B . Conl éslese. l . jQuiere Vd. que entremos en la l ibrerfa?2 . {Q ue quiere su padre que le compre Vd.? 3. 1,Ya tiene

Vd. muchas obras en eu bibl ioteca? 4. gTiene Vd. las Obras

completas de Calderon de la Bares? 5. gTiene Vd. las Obras

escogidas de Lope de Vega? 6. LCual es la obra masimportante de la l iteratura castel lana? 7. jQuién escribié

el Quijole? (M iguel de Cervantes Saavedra.) 8. gQuién leaconseja aVd. que busque una edicion del Quijole? 9. jCom

pr6 Vd. una buena edicion del Quijolef 10. g,ot

volumenes tiene? 1 1 . aCuanto vale la edicion? 1 2 . gLa

mand6 el dependiente a la casa de Vd.? 1 3. [H a l eldo Vd.

esta obra importante? 1 4. aDesea Vd. leerla?

C. Repilase,mando usted como sujeto de los verbos subordinadas.

1 . Deseo dormir bien. (Deseo que Vd. duerma bien.)2 . Car los desea cerrar la puerta. 3 . Ana prefiere escribir la.

4. Preferimos comprar otra edicion. 5 . Quierea casa . 6. Te aconsejo que no entres en esa

aconsejo a Vd. que no entre, etc.) 7. Prohibimos que tli

1 29

entree en el la. 8. No te de jarnos cntrar. (No Is dejamos aVd. entrar .) 9. Tu padre te pide _que no entree. 10. El

profesor me escribe que lo compre . 1 1 . A ti te dice que no

lo compres (A Vd. le dice, 12 . E l padre do Juan lemanda que vuelva en seguida (Su padre le manda a Vd.

que,

D. l . Havs you in your l ibrary a good copy of Don Qrdzols

(del Quljols)? 2. Yes, sir ; I have a handsome copy very wel l

bound. 3 . Where did you buy it? 4. I found it in a Madrid bookstore (l ibrer ia de Madrid) . 5. My teacher wishes me to buy a

good edition. 6. He advisesme to look for an il lustrated edition ofthis classic work. 7. He prefers that I should read Don Quixotein Spanish. 8. He says (that) he w il l not permit me to read it inEngl ish. 9. Why do you not

,ask your teacher (a as profesor) to

select (5152) the edition? 10. I shal l ask himto select it and buyit for me (y me la compre) . 1 1 . Are there many important worksin (the) Spanish l iterature? 12 . Yes, sir ; the works of Cervantes,

Calderon, Lope de Vega,andmany others (otros muchos) are veryimportant. 13. I have not read the poems of E spronceda, Zorril la, and Becquer, but I intend to read them. 14. I t is not worth

a ~ile to (No val e la pens de) read al l the poems of Zorril la.

1 3. He wrote some poems that I do not l ike . 16. Which is thebest edition of Bécquer

’s works? 17. The one which (La que) Vic

toriano Sdnchez has just publ ished. 18. Ask the clerk (Pida Vd.

al dependiente) to show it [to] you. 19. I w il l take it (La tome) ;but I desire you to send it tomy house (véase A.

1 51 . Verbos que sufren cambios constantes en eu vocal

radical . 1 . Mode imperative . 2 . Presente de subjuntivo.

Adv iértase que en cl presente dc subjuntivo, como en el presente de

indicativo, la vocal radical e se cambia en is o i, y la vocal e se cambiaen na, cuando sobre la raiz cae e l acento prosédico .

E n la tercera conjugacion (y no en la primera o segunda ), la vocal

radical e se cambia cn i,y la vocal radical o se cambia en u,en las personasprimera y segunda del plural .

130

También se usa para expresar una orden o desee

ingla per (1 ) el siniple subjunti vo. (2) M ahould om y y el infini

tive , (3) el infinitive solamente, y (4) el gerundio.

va bos de mando.

158. 8i el verbo principal asi como el subordinade en una

frase tienen un misme sujetemn espanol se usa el infinitive en ves

eipal y el suberdinado tengan diferentes sujetes 6152) . E n este caso,en espane l selo se usa el infinitive después de determinados verbo. ;

tales come mandar, dejar, y algunos otres, especialmente cuando el

Some I rregul ar Imperatives

Becit zdi, decid, say (te l l ) Venir : ven, venl d, cemeI r : ve, id. ge

155. Stem of the Present Sub junctive. 1 . The present

subjunctiv e has, as a rule, the same stemas that of the first

person singular of the present indicative .

1st Pers. Slng .

Cenecer : eenozc-e ; conesa-a,—as,

—a,—ames, - l la, -an

Decir : dig-e ;R acer bag-e ;

Venir veng-e ;


or denying, such as dudar, to doubt, and negar (ie) , to deny.

I doubt that (whether ) he is (or

bel ieve, decir, to say, estar seguro dc, to be sure of , and the

case they take the subjunctive .

Cree que es tel iz. I behave that he is happy.

But, No creo que sea fel iz. I do not bel ieve that he is happy.

is in doubt.)

a. Similarly,no dude,no niego,and the l ike,may take the indicativeto stress a fact : no dudo que es fel iz, I do not doubt that he is happg ;no niega que es verdad, he does mt deny that it is true .

b. Note that the Spanish present subjunctive may express either

present or future time, and that it is sometimes best translated intoEng l ish by the present or the future indicative.

cl pals, country

package, etc.) el porte.postage

el correo,mail , post ofi ce sal ir,’ to go out, l eave

costar (us), to cost el sel l e, stamp; sel lo de cerree,

eclm,

throw , put 0 sel lopostal ,postage stamp

creo que sl (que no), I think so (not) ; esperames que sl (que no),we hope so (not) .

i Post oflice is also casa de corrmSal ir is irregular in some tenses (see

LESSON XXXI I I 133

A. 1 . Acabo de escribir algunas cartas a mis amigos en

5.— Si ; tenga Vd. la bondad de ir a buscar diez sel los de

cince centav os cada uno. 6. Este es el perte de una carta

a un pals extranjero. 7.—1,Quiere Vd. que l l eve las cartas

9. Temo que Vd. no l legue a tiempo. 10. Dude que puedal legar antes de las nueve . 1 1 . aQuiere Vd. que certifique

las cartas? 12. Apenas puede creer que haya tiempo

para ese . 1 3. Penga Vd. l es sel los y eche las cartas en el

busbn. 14. E s lastima que no tengamos sel los de corree

en casa. 15. Pero me alegro de que esté cerca el cc. reo.

16. e ee Vd. poder l legar al corree antes de las nueve?

1 7. Si, senor ; creo que st. 18.— Yo espero que sf ; pero

no estoy seguro de que pueda hacerlo. 1 9. No me parece

probabl e que l legue antes de las nueve. 20. Hagame Vd.

el favor de traerme diez tarjetas postal es de dos centavos

cada una. 2 1 . Mafiana env iaré un giro postal de cuarenta

pesos a una casa editorial de Bogota. 22. Dude que tenga

B . Contesteee. 1 . 4A quiénes he escrito ye? 2 . jDendev iven mis amigos? 3. gTenemes en casa sel los de corree (osel los postales) ? 4

— 5 . q al es el porte de una carta (de unatarjeta postal ) a un pals extranjero? 6. 4A qué hora sale

el cormo de la manana? 7. aCree Vd. que yo pueda l l egaral corree antes de las nuev e? (respuesta : Sf, senor ; creo que

puede, etc. o, No, senor ; no creo que pueda, 8. {L e

parece a Vd. probable que pueda l l egar a esa hora? 9. gE sta

Vd. seguro de que no pueda l l egar? 10. jQué env iaré yomafiana a una casa editorial dc Bogota? 1 1 . gCree Vd. que

tenga tiempo para hacerl e hey?Hm is here the present subjuncti ve corresponding to hay.

134

poder hacerlo. 4. Me alegro de poder hacerle . 5. E l esta

seguro de peder l lep r a tiempe . 6. gE staél segurode poder

Repttase con yo sobm tendido, pero no eapresado, eomo srdeto del

no tener sel los.) 9. Quiero que Vd. vaya a buscarl es.

10. Desee que Vd. l leve las cartas al corree . 1 1 . Temo

que Vd. no l legue a tiempo. 1 2. E spero que Vd. pueda

D. 1 . Bring me five pestal eards. 2. I desire yeu to bring me

(one) . 4. The postage stamps cost five cents each (one) . 5. Have

it. 7. Your father wishes you to post 1 this letter . 8. Please post

it at once. 9. We hope that you wil l buy some Spanish books

(l ibros en espanol ) . 10. And we hepe (that) you wil l read them.

1 1 . I fear (that) you may not read them al l . 1 2 . Do you bel ieve(that) F erdinand has read Don Quixote ? 1 3. No, sir ; I do not

bel ieve (that) he has read it. 14. He doesn’t say (that) he has

read it. 15. And I bel ieve (that) he has not done so (lo) .

E .

’

1 . When does the mail for Cuba (para Cuba) leave? 2. I t

leaves every third day (cada tres dfaa) at hal f-past four in the afternoon. 3. Wil l you (éQuiere Vd.) post this letter? 4. I f you have

the time, please register it. 5. I prefer that you should register al lmy letters. 6. Is the post office near? — Yes, sir ; it is very near .

7. Good! I am glad (that) it is near . 8. But this letter hasn’t

10. Put one stamp on this envel epe and bring me the others (lesdeml s) . 1 1 . I have many other ’ letters to write . 1 2 . What isthe pestage of a letter to a foreign country? 13. The pestage ot

’

t To pa t - ecbu al cerree er echar en el buaba.


LE SSON xm v

1 58. Subjunctive in Substantive Clauses, Continued .

1 . The subjunctive is require d after such impersonal expressions as ea precise, it is necessary; imports , it is important:convi ene,

l it is proper ; es posibl e, it is possible, and the l ike.

E s precise que él diga la verdad. I t is necessary for him to (that heshould) tel l the truth.

Importa que l l eguernes tem I t is impertant for us te (that we

R e es posibl e que ye le haga. I t is not possible for me to do it.

as in Engl ish, if it does not have a definite subject, and itmay be used if, in Spanish, its logical subject is an unstressed

Nos imperta l l egar temprano. I t is important for us to arrive

ear ly.

No es posibl e hacerlo. I t is not possible to do it.

Nome es posibl e hacerle. I t is not possible for me to do it.

1 59. Imperfect (or Past) Sub junctive. Spanish has two

the fol lowing endings to the stemof the preterite indicative,

l .- ase,

- ases,—ase,4 aemos, —aseis, - asen

1 .- iese,

- ieses, —iese,- iesemos, - ieseis, - iesen

Convenir is inflected like u nit

LESSON XXXIV 13,

Sd Pem Pl .

2. hsbl-ara,—aras,

—ara,- l rames, -arais,

- aran

l . pid- l ese, —ieaes, - ies'

e,- l esemos, - ieseis, —ieaen

a . I n subordinate clauses either formmay be used, but the form in- ra is more common in Spanish America.

5. Note the absence of l in fueren, etc., and in dijeron, etc.

160. Use of the Imperfect Sub junctive. 1 . I f the principni verb of a sentence is past or conditional , the sub

Ye quer ia que Vd. fuera fel iz. I wished you to be (that youmight

Temfames que 61 no l l egara We feared that he would not

arrive early.

H e denied that it was true.

He serfa posible que Pablo lo I t woul d not be possible for Paul

But (51 53) ,Yo quer ia ssr fel lz. I wished to be happy.

Temiamos no l legar temprano. We feared that we should not

I t would not be pomible te do it.


2 The pmsent perfect er the imperfeet mbjtmetive isused after the present tense if the time ef the mbordinate

l lerar, te weep, eryla maml ,mamma,mother

aun, even;afin, yet la manga, sleeveel betdmbutton remendar ae), to mendh ummttle box man tmmo reqm t n k

la ropa, clothes

castigar, te p|mish rote,- a, broken, torn

cumpl ir, to fulfil subir a, te ge up te, cl imbel dedaL thimble las tijeras, scia ers; unas tijerss,desceser, te rip a pair of scissers

el hile, thread, l inen

dejd de l lorar, he stopped crying ; ayu cumphe eche anomhe was

A. 1 . Juanito se rompe siempre la ropa. 2 . Cuando se

rompiola chaqueta al subir a un drbe l ,acudioa eumamay le

hal loroto un bolsil lo y descesida una manga. 4. E l la buscb

tma aguja e (and) bil e , el dedal , las tijeras y la cajita debotones, y remendola chaqueta. 5. Para castigar a Juanito,la madre no le permitib l levar mas aquel dfa eu traje nuevo.

rotos y una gorra v ieja. 7. Ayer cumpl ib Juanito echo silos,pero es todavia muy (very much of a) nifie . 8. Nopuede

l Diminutive ef cajmboz. fi Diminutive ol Ju/n .


negb que fuese verdad. 13. No serta posible que yo lo

hiciera. 14. Yo querfa ser fel ia. 1 5. E l dudoque tuviesemes tiempo. 16. E l los sentian muchisimo que estuvieramesenfermos.

E . 1 . I t was net pesdble for me to go to the post ofiice. 2. I t

was necessary that yeu sheul d pest the letter. 3. I t was impertant

it. 5. Do you believe that he has put stamps on the envelopes?6. No, sir ; I can scarcely bel ieve that he has done so. 7. I doubt

that he has bought [any] stamm. 8. Did Johnnie tear his coat?9. Yes,air ; andhe asked hismother tomend it. 10. Did shemendit? 1 1 . I doubt that she has mended it yet. 1 2 . Did she permithim to wear (l l evar) his new suit? 13. No, sir ; she told him to

put-on his old suit. 14. Did Johnnie cry? 15. Yes, sir ; he crieda long time (muche tiempo) and his mother punished him.

1 6. Did he stop crying when his mother punished him? 17. No,

F . 1 . Annie (Anita is the daughter of Mr . andMrs. Enriques.2 . She was five years ol d last Monday. 3. She is a handsomedark-complexioned- l ittle-girl (trigoel iita 4. But she cries when

her mother washes her face with water and soap. 5. And she cries

evenmore when hermother brushes her teeth. 6. Yesterday Annietore her new dress. 7. She went weeping to her mother and askedher tomend it. 8. H ermother told her to go and get a needle andthread. 9. While she wasmending the dramshe asked : H ow did

cl imbing (al subir a) a tree. 1 1 . To (Part) punish Annie hermother told her to wear an old dress. 1 2 . She forbade her (Is)to cl imb (5152) the tree [any] more . 13. She said that it wasnecessary that she should stop cl imbing trees (5103, l ) . 14. And

that it was too bad that she hadtorn (bubi era rote) her new dress.15. Annie was very sorry that she had done so (l o) . 16. She toldher mother that she would not c l imb the tree again (otra vez) .17. The mother kissed Annie anc the child stopped crying .

l Diminutive of Ana, Anna . R egar or preguhtar?Diminuti ve of tr izue l la.

LESSON XXI V 141

159. 8ebjuatlvo en cl l uselas substantlvadaa — l . Se use el

mbjuntivo después de expresienes impersonales tales eomo es

2 . Despu6s de la mayor parte de estas expresiones, ss usa el

infinitivo cemo en inglés si carece de mrjete determimdq y también puede marse si el sujeto logico es un prenembre personal

afiadiendo las siguientes terminaciones al radical de la tercera

a. En lss cl riusulas subordinadas puede usarse cualquiera de las dos

b.

160. Use del imperfecto de sub juntivo. 1 . Si el verbo princi

pal de una frase estaen tiempo pasado o condicional , el verbo subordinado generalmente estaen cl imperfecto de subjuntivo2. E l presente perfecto 0 cl imperfecto de subjuntivo se emplean

después del presente si cl tiempo de la accion indicada por cl verbo

LE SSON m v

1 61 . Subjuncti ve in Adjective! Clauses. The sub

junctive is used in adjectival clauses (introduced by a

No encentré a nadie que ha I did not find anyone who spoke

142 m SPANIBR com

2. I f the relstive pronoun has an indefinite antecedent.

s s lookh g for s msn b sny

M Yom k s un hom‘

a. I knew s msn (- some dcfinitemsn) who spok0 8panish.

M u m m u . . u 1{e promised to give s prise to

shun s que ssctlbi om cl the stud ent - sny student)who should write the bu t

M W m m lo s l - somessctl hl d el msjot temt .

Todo vlsjc 'o que tome este l w psssenger (whoever hemsy

lu who shal l takc this tmin wmhfllsts ds prlmm clsse. l navc to bw a fin t-clsss ticket.

3. I n clauses containing whoever , whatever, however .

Whoever homay be.Sss lo que sss. Whatever itmay be.

However good itmay be.

162 . The present indicativ e of cser, to fal l , oft , to hear,is

Vsl er : vslzo vsl emos

What is the present subjunctive of these verbs? (see 51 55)

163. The future indicative of ssl ir and vsl er 18


l l . Deseo dos o tres que no sean muy v istosas. 12 . E l me

13. E ste invierno les corbatas v istosas estan de mode .

14. No encontré ninguna corbata. que me gustase . 15. Pero

compre dies pares de cal cetines y alguna ropa interior .

16. Cuando hube escogido estas piezas, lo dije al dependiente

queme las cargara en cuenta. 17. M e contest6 que vendiasiempre al contado y no al fiado. 18. Pagué la cuenta y

rogue al dependiente que me 10 mandase todo a casa.

19. For la tarde recibi los paquetes. 20. Los desaté y eu

B. Comatose. l . gCuéntos pesos gasto Vd. boy?

2 . 1,0u6nto costaron los guantes de cabritil la. que Vd. com

pro? 3. gCuanto val ian los paiiuelos de hilo? 4. LPrefiere

Vd. los pafiuelos de hilo a los (those) de algodon? 5. LPre

fiere Vd. las camisas blancas a. las de color? 6. 1,Prefiere

Vd. las camisas con pechera de hilo 0 con pechera de seda?

7. 1,Cutintos cuel los compro Vd.? 8. {L e gustan a Vd. les

corbatas v istosas? 9. mm de mode? 1 0. gQué color

l e gusts. a Vd. mas? l l . 1,Prefiere Vd. comprar al fiado 0 al

contado? 1 2 . Cuando Vd. compre. un traje (un vestido) ,

adesea Vd. que el dependiente se lo cargue en cuenta? 1 3. O

aprefiere Vd. pagar la cuenta desde luego? 14. gPagoVd.

la cuentn de boy?

0. Rmfiawmon el verbomincipal en el presenle de indicativo.

1 . Yo buscaba una corbata que no fuese v istosa. (Yo buscouna corbata. que no sea v istosa.) 2 . No encontré ninguna

que me gustara. 3. No teuian corbatas de color que no

v istosas. 5. Yo encontré una que me gustaba. 6. Busca

8. gNo

145

encontré ninguna que costara menos. 10. Si,senor ; yo

encontré una docena que costaban menos. 1 1 . gE ncontro

ninguno que hablara inglés. 13. Yo encontré a uno que

D. 1 . We are looking for a boy who speaks Spanish. 2 . Do

you know a boy who speaks Spanish? 3. I do know (Si conozco)one who speaks Spanish verywel l . 4. H e promised to give a dol larto the student who shoul d w rite the best exercise, whoever he

might be . 5. And he gave the dol lar to the one who wrote the

not be worth a dol lar . 7. We desire you to hear al l that (todo loque) hemay say. 8. I t is necessary that you should hear it. 9. Weheard al l that he said. 10. We are looking for sil k handkerchiefs(psfiuelos de sods) that cost twenty-five cents each (one) . 1 1 . Have

you any that cost that amount? 1 2 . No, sir ; but I have some thatcost thirty cents each (one) . 1 3. I do not see any (ninguno) thatI l ike. 14. I have some that you wi l l l ike (fut. ind) . 1 5. They are

E . 1 . What did you buy to-day at R odriguez’

s shop? 2. Ibought a ready-made suit (na traje hecho) and some underclothes.

3 . The suit costme twenty dol lars and the underclothes ten dol lars4. Did you not buy shirts and col lars too? 5. No, sir ; I didn

’t

find any (ninguno) that I l iked. 6. I looked for some coloredshirts w ithout cuffs, but I could not find them. 7. Do you know

why white shirts 1 ) cost more than colored ones (Isa docolor)? 8. White shirts are of better l inen (do hilo dc majorclass), are they not (ano es 9. I asked the clerk if hehad some red silk ties ties of red si lk) that were not verybright-colored. 10. H e told me that bright-colored ties are in

fashion this year . 1 1 . I bought one dozen white handkerchiefs thatcost me ten cents each (one) . 1 2. I do not know whether theyare (si son) of cotton or of l inen. 13. I f they cost ten cents each

(one) , I do not bel ieve that they are of l inen. 14. You w il l have to

pay twenty or twenty-five cents for (por) each one if they are (of)l inen. 15 . Did you buy the articles (cosss) for cash or on credit?


1 6. I told the clerk to charge themon aocount. 17. He amweredthat they didn’

t sel l on credit. 18. He said (that) they always

sold for cash. 19. 1 paid the bil l and received the things this

LE SSON m vi

tive is used in adverbial clauses :1 . After the temporal conjunctions cuando, when, antes

que, before, hu ts que, until , luego que, as soon as,mientras

(que), as long as,whil e,and the l ike, if future time is impl ied .

Cuando vents. s verme. l s When he comes to see me hal l

No lo vends Vd. sates que Do not sel l it before l see it.

yo lo ves.

l l egsrs el tren.

s vsq empre l e redbo m dhhnm wwn he am lo m m , l

always rcceive him cords‘

all y; cuando vh o s vexme, lo rscihi eordislM when he eame to see m, l rwetd himeordiaay.

2. After psrs quq in order that, de modo (msners ) que,so that, con ts! m or dmme m prw ided lhat, s

l Adsun thstmodifies s va b h odbdm sdvm “ s.

a bots, high shoe, boot - high

shoe)el portsmonedss,pmselas repsrsdones, repairs

el la ssstn r ls, tailor shopcl la sombrerer ls, hat shop, hatter

's

el frsc, evening cont,“dress ” el sombrerero, hatter , dealer in

cost

el “bow ler“ la suels, sole (of a shoe) ‘

la u pstartg shoe store

la medidq measure

ls bots de montsr, riding boot; e l sombrero de sls snchs, broad

brimmed hat; el traje do etiqueta, evening clothes, dress ” suit; memsndé hscer un trsje, l had, or l ordered, a suit made; me sientr. (ome cae) bien, it fits me wel l

A . l . Entré en una sastreria. 2 . Me mandé hacer nu

traje, y el sastre me tom6 la medida. 3. M e pregunt6 el

sastre si querfa l evita o americana (saco) . 4. Me dijo

que la l ev ita estaba mas de moda . 5. Yo l e contesté que

preferfa la americana (el saco) aunque estuv iera mas demoda la l ev ita . 6. También me mandé hacer un traje de

etiqueta, frac y pantalon negros y chal eco blanco. 7. No

compro nunca los trajes hechos. 8. No me sientan (caen)

muchos objetos : el reloj , el portamonedas, las l laves, un

pafiuelo, un cortaplumas y un lapiz o una plumafuente.

I nmost Spanish-American countrierucal l ed a pato (o u pstbn) dogun s.or u n to do hul a (as in M exico) .

Al so cal l ed (as in Mexico) .

The sol e of the foot is 1! plants de l pie .

LESSON XXXVI 149

1 1 . Después fuf a una zapaterfa donde habia un buen surtido

de toda clase de cal zado. 1 2 . Compré al dependiente un

par de botas, dos pares de zapatos y un par de zapatil las.

13. También compré on par de chanclos (zapatos de goma)que me pondré cuando l luev a. 14. Mandé poner mediassuelas a un par de zapatos v iejos. 1 5. No me gustan lasbotas de montar porque me lastiman los pics. 16. Pero

lo dije al dependiente que compraria un par de botas demontar con tal que no me lastimaran los pies. 17. No

las compre hoy, pero las compraré cuando vuelva otra vez,

siempre que tenga dinero. 18. F at también a una sombrereria. 19. Compré al sombrerero un hongo y un sombrero de fiel tro. 20. Compraré nu sombrero de paja de alaancha cuando l legue el verano.

B . 1 . {E n d6nde entr6 Vd.? 2 . Cuando Vd. mand6hacer un traje, gqué le tom6 el sastre? 3 . {Que le pre

gunto a Vd. el sastre? 4. aCual estaba mas de moda,la levita o la americana (el saco)? 5. gCual preferia Vd.

aunque no estuv iera de moda? 6. q ales son las prendas

(parts) de un traje de etiqueta? 7. gPor qué no l s gustan

a Vd. los trajes hechos? 8. (Q ue l leva Vd. en los bolsil los?9. gEn d6nde v enden el camdo? 10. gQuién vende cl calzado? 1 1 . gQué clase de calzado compr6 Vd.? 1 2— 13. E n

el inv ierno (En el v erano) 1,prefiere Vd. l as botas a los

zapatos? 14. gCuando se pondraVd. los chanclos (zapatosde goma)? 1 5. jQuémand6 Vd. poner a un par de zapatosv iejos? 16. jPor quéno le gustan a Vd. las botas de montar?17. gComprara Vd. un par con tal que no le lastimen los

pies? 18. jEn d6nde venden los sombreros? 19. gQuiénvende los sombreros? 20. jPrefiere Vd. el hongo al sombrero de fiel tro? 21 . q ando compraraVd. un sombrerode paja? 22 . gQuiere Vd. que sea de ala ancha?

C. Lease A., usando la tercera persona de los verbos en l uoar de

la zm'

mera.

D. 1 . When (u ge t hora) wil l the train arrive? 2 . I shal l

wait until the train arrives. 3. I shal l leave (Partiré) when the

7—8. He asks (He asked) him not to sel l the piano before Marysees (saw) it. 9. He sold it before Mary saw (vim ) it. 10. Weshal l speak so as not to offend anyone . 1 1 . We spoke so that wedid not oflend anyone. 1 2. I shal l buy the house provided youmake the repairs. 13. Wil l you (aQul srs Vd.) make them?14. They said (that) they would learn the lesson even if theystudied al l night. 1 5. But they did not learn the lemon al though

they did study al l night. 16. I f ready-made suits fitted himwel l ,he would buy one . 17. I f he had the money, he would have a

good suit made. 18. I f straw hats were in fashion, I should buyone. 19. I f it were (hiciers or hiciese) cold, you would prefer afelt hat, would you not? 20. Should you wear (aUssr ls Vd.)riding boots if they did not hurt your feet? 21 . I f I rode on horseback, I should wear riding boots.

E . 1 . Mr. (5103, 2) Martinez is a (574) tailor and he has thebest tailor shop in (the) town. 2 . When I wish a suit that wil l fit(5161 , 2) me wel l , I go to his tailor shop. 3. His suits cost morethan ready-made suits (5103, but they are much better .

4. When (the) autumn comes (118688 l l egar) , I shal l have a woolensuitmade . 5. Unless the suitfitsmewel l , I shan

’t accept it. 6. And

I want a suit that has a- lot-oi (muchos) pockets. 7. I n one vest

(waistcoat) pocket one pocket of the vest) I carrymy (el ) watchand in another my (el ) penknife. 8. I carry my (lss) keys in a

trousers pocket. 9. There are many kinds of men’s suits : those

with (los de) frock coat, with (do) evening coat, sack coat,

jacket, etc. (etcéters) . 10. I n the morning I use [a] sack coat

and I use [a] frock coat in the afternoon; but at night a (sl )dress coat ismore suitable (propio) . 1 1 . Mr . Gonzalez bought

this morning a pair of high shoes (boots) . 1 2. He told the shoe

maker to put half soles on (s) the old shoes

shoes (boots) . 14. As soon as the rainy season (ls estscidn ds

l luvias) begins, he w il l buy a pair of rubber overshoes (goloshes).

FIRST SPAN ISH COURSE

LE SSON XXXVI!

jOjsIh (que) ‘vivsmil snosl 0h, that he may (or, l hope hewil l ) l ive a thousand years!

Oh, that he might (or, I w ish hemil sfiosl would) l ive a thousand yearsl

jOjsl l (que) yo nudists I wish I oould do it l

hacerle !

168.

1 . Yo quifiers vender ls csss. I shmi ld l ike (or, l should be glsd)to sel l the house .

Yoquislers que l s coinprsse I wish you wouldbuy it.

(o comm ) .

Vd debtsrs hscer lss repsrs You ought to (or, should) makethe repairs.

Quiero vender ls csss. I want to sel l the hmme.Quim q d h compre. I wish you to buy it.

clones.

2 . The conditional is also thus used.

H e gestsr ls mucho hscerlo. I should be very glad to do so.

El la prefer-iris pssesrse en She would prefer to go driving .

I“.

Wi l l ( a am, art, is, etc., w il l ing) is expressed by quier-o,—es,

—e, etc.

Shoul d ought to) is expressed by/debier-s, - as, etc.

gQuiere Vd. venderls?

LESSON XXXVI I 153

170. Future (or H ypothetical ) Subjunctive. This tense

may be formed for al l verbs byadding the fol lowing endings

I : i sre, -sres.-sre,

- l ren os, -srel s, - sren

I I d I I : - tu s, -4eres, - Iere,- l tren os, - isrets,

-terea

Sd Pera Pl .

Ba lsa m -area ; habl-sre, -sres, -sre,-¢rsmos,- srel s,—sren

Pedtr : ptd-leron ; ptd- lere,- tsres,

- iere, 4m - l ereis,

E ster : estuv-leroagestuv-ierq- teres, d ose, 4“ —ierds,

stern of the preterite,.

third person.

171 . Use of the Future Subjunctive. The future sub

Spanish of to-day it is rarely used except in proverbs, legalexpressions, etc. I ts place is regularly taken by the pres

Wherever you go, do as you see.

(dJ‘When in Rome do as the

Si algdn sccioaists pidiere w I f any shareholder asks that the

pide) que la retmioa se

Trser, to br ing

Sarcoma Pam

trajesm

l Since i is omitted fromtrsjeron (the ending is - eron instead of - isrou) .it is also omitted from trsiese. trsjers. and trsjere. See also dijeron urom

156 F IRST SPANISH WURSE

huy it? fi l eheuld study more. 7. 1 must study more.have fmfl to smdy more. 9. 1 should studymore if l hsd thetime. 10. 8ring rne s glsss of water. l l . Plesse bM it st

12. 1 wish you would bring it now . 13. The home is buiit ofbrick(s) . l t l whh my house to be built ‘ of stom. 15. 8hould

16. 1’lease

have (

F . 1 . Please tel l the lsundrymsn to come for the clothes [on](the) Mondays. 2. And tel l him to brhig the clean clothes on

should not be put‘ in boil ing water, beeame they shrink.

I should l ike ’ the l inen and cottoa clothes to be washed ‘ in hot

water . 6. Tel l himalso that l should like the cufis and ool lsrs of

themirte wel l starched. 7. But l ehould prefer lemstarch in the

shirt bosoms. 8. And I don’t wsnt any stsrch in the underclothes.

take a ride (pssearme s eshsl lo) this afternoon. 3. Wil l you not

come with us? We are going to take a drive in a uass ssmos sn)motor car . 4. No, thank you; I should prefer the exercise of

riding (588,3) on horseback. 5. But I shouldwant a saddle horse :

I shmi l dn’t want to take a ride on a driving horse. 6. 1 wiah you

would choose a gentl e horse, because I amnot [s] good horseman.

7. I shw ld l ike a good saddle, but l shmi ldn’t want spurs. 8. I

a fast horse? 10. Yes, sir ; I should prefer a fast horse, provided

it would plense me (me gustsds) .

IN N XXXVI“ 157

2. Tambien se usa el condicional en este sentido.

170. Puturo (o htpot‘tiee) de subjunti vo.- u m tiempo se

forma en todos los verbos snadiendo al radical do la tercera persena

naciones:

171 . Use del tutare do subjuntivo. El future dc subjuntivoindica m oondicidn o hipdtems. En el espahol habhsdo hoy on

dis, rara vez se staples esta forma excepto en proverbios, espresiones legales, etc. Se substituye en e l lenguaje cor

" iente por el

presente dc subjuntivo, o por el presente de indicati vo si so use

con la oonjuncion condicional st.

rsdical uma ymxcepto delantc de las terminaciones que empieeenWH O M !

a. La y de hnyd y huym forma partc de l a tenninaddn.

LE SSON m vmI n this Lesson and in those that follow there is a rw iew afmles oj

’

grammar given in preceding Lessons , with the moreimportant eeceptrbm to the rules .

174. Gender of Nouns. Nouns ending in - o are usual l ymu cul ine, and those ending in —s are usual ly feminine .

E xceptions. 1 . The name of a male be ing is mascul ine. even if the noun ends in —

a.

el artists,mm, in.

2. Lamsno,hand, is feminine, and el dis, day, ismascul ine.


3. E l maps,map, and some words of Greek origin endingia -ma or - te, l ike el poeme, poem, and e l plenete, planet,

are mascul ine}175. Number of Nouns. A noun ending in a vowel

adds -

g and a noun endmg in a consonant adds - e g to

E xceptions. l . A noun that ends in a stressed vowel

or diphthong adds - es to form the plural .

mbi. ruby; rub les. rubies f or.kins; rem.fine!

a.

2. Nouns ending in unstressed - es or - is have the sameformin the plural as in the singular .

Gm ie, los Gercfe

ing to take from, ask of , and the l ike, take the dative of the

person.

Pido un favor ami padre. I ask a favor of my father .Lo comproal senor Garcia. H e bought it of Mr . Garcia.

Note also: l e pido un favor, I ask a favor of him; se lo compro, he

177. An Eng l ish noun used as an adjective is general ly

expressed in Spanish by a noun preceded by do or para.

Une teze pere te. A teacup (une taze de te is a cup

of ten) .

178. Study the inflection of regular verbs of the first

conjugation.

‘ Thus el cl immd imate. el idiome, language el diploma, diploma . 01

programs, program. el tel egrams, tel egram, el tsme. therne. tor-ima m “.

am m wut ie eometg kiteh ew


del (on the) muel le antes que salga el buque. 1 7. {Buenol

Yo veo a los sefiores do Garcia y a los senores de Gonzalez

B . Costume. 1—4. (Usense, somem mtas w ales,A. 1 ,3,8y 5. jPrefa

'irfa Vd. un camarote bajo (M ow ) cubiertao sobre cubierto? 6. 40mm l iterw (0 cam e) qmsieraVd. en el camarote? 7. tCuande se mares Vd.? 8. jE sta

el mar tranquilo o agitado? 9. J,Ya desaparecieron l as olas?

1,Cree Vd. que sea agradable la travesfa? 1 1 . gQuiéneshan venido ai muel l e para despedirse de Vds.? 1 2 . (L e

gusts. a Vd. la Vida (l ife) a bordo de un buque? 13. a isiera

Vd. ser marinero? 14. LPreferirfa Vd. ser pasajero?

el l ibro, los l ibros) , pluma, mano, dia, agua, artistaartiste hombre,mujer,hermano,hermana,carta,planets,papa,mama, idioma,hacha, cuchara,cura,pie, ingles,martes,canapé (m. : sofa) , sinopsis (f . : synopsis) , rey, sefior Ortiz,sefior Heredia, rubf, free luz, reloj , cafe, alma, aguja,

D. 1 . I asked the man when (a que here ) the train wouldarrive. 2 . I asked the man for a ticket. 3. I asked him to give

me the ticket at once . 4. Did he buy the gold watch fromMr.Olmedo? 5 . Yes, sir ; he bought it from him. 6. Did you buyChar les

’horse? 7. Did you buy this horse fromChar les? 8. Did

you take (ti-seas quiter ) it from your sister? 9. No, ma’am; I

didn’

t take it from her . 10. Please bring me a coffee cup.

1 1 . P lease bringme a cup of coffee . 1 2 . And bringme also a glass

E . 1 . Today we leave for Buenos Aircs. 2 .— How far is

Buenos Aires fromMontev ideo? (véaseA. 8) 3.— I t is (Hey) two

I Distinguish betw een pregnan t , and pedir or roger .

161

hundred kilometers more or h s (mas o menos) . 4. - Is thesteamship that you wiil take eu erafl arge or sme l l ? 5. - It isnot very large, but it is fast. 6 — Have you al ready bought your

tickets? 7.— Yes, sir ; I heve bou ht two tickets fromthe agent

(sgente o boietero) , oae for me aad the other for my brother .

8.— I am glad that your brother is going abo to Buenos Aires.

9. Where is your stateroom? — We have a stateroom on deck

1 1 . — Do you get seasick if the sea'

u reugh? 1 2 .— When the sea

13.— When shal l you go aboard the boat? 14.

— I shouid go

aboard now if l could. 1 5. I shal l ask en ofiicer if l msy fluedo)go aboard now . l 6. 1 shal l ask him to let me go aboard at onee.

17. But before going (588, 3) aboard l should l ike to teke leaveof my friends on the wharf . 18. I see the parish priest and his old

mother . 19. Do you bel ieve (that) they have come to say goodbyeto us? 20.

— No, sir ; they have come to take leave oe . end

Mrs. Nuhez. 21 . — Do you fear a storm? — No, sir ; to-day there

wil l not be [a] storm. 22 . The waves have al ready disappearedand the sea is calm. 23 . One of the sailors toldme that there wil ibe many pamengers on the ship. 24. Yes, sir ; I bel ieve (that)there wil l be more than two hundred persons on board, without

174. Género de los nombres (o substantivos) . Los nombres

que en singular terminan en - o son, por regla general ,mascul inos ;y los que te rminan en - a son generalmente femeninos.

Excepciones.— 1 . E l nombre de hombre 0 animal macho es

2. R eno es femenino, y die esmascul ino.

on -me o - ta sonmascul inos.

vocal forman el plural ahadiendo una - s, y los que terminan en


mm dabm p ph y mm L y todos los nomhs-es que terminen

en el plural la misma forma que en el singular .

1 76. Dative do “pu eden — Eu espanol los verbos guitar,pedir, etc.

,rigen al dativo de 1a persons .

177. E l nombre irx lfi usado en cal ithd de adjetiw se trathi ce

o pera.

W N W

m M ant hi rdJose the h al —o of tM nns

2 . - i, one huw ,

a. M M M lose ia fi ai syl labb : “ u Sas'

at E l i sa


Ests hombre es rieo. This man is rich.

Estos hombres son los ml s These men are the richest in the

ricos del mundo.

Juan esmi smigomas fntimo. John is my most intimate friend.

a. When there is no real comparisonunostmay be expreseedh muy,or the suifix — fsimo : esmuy ufil , or es uti l iaimo, it ismost usdul .

1 83. Study the regular verbs of the second and third

conjugations

el l i, there

etreveser (is), to cross (over)

el la mal ete, val ise, (hand)bagel cochecemg ' sb eping car meter en, to put in or into

el cochecomedor , dining car la pempe, prairie, plainla

el

el cuero, leather

el

01 dril, duck (cloth)

el bil l ete sencil lo, onc-way ticket; el bil l ete de ide y vuelte,‘ round~

trip ticket , mafiane por la mafiana, to-morrow morning ; pasado

mahana,the day after to-morrow ; por supuesto,of course ; estaheci- l e

(o erreg lsndo) el haul, he is packing his trunk; hey de todo, there iseverything ; hece mucho calor, it is very warm; resul te ml s hereto,it is cheaper ;

' tengo genes de, I long to ; aqua l e perece e Vd.? what

is your opinion? what do you think (about it)? si l e pursue a Vd., 3

you think best (approve) .

A . 1 . 5A qué hora sal e el tren para Santiago de Chile?

2 . E l tren expreso (o rapido) sale a las nueve y diez dei

n

Al so el eoehe dormitorie, el“Pul lmen” (as in M ed co) . or el

“deep

h e.

t Or compertimisato. ‘ Or rapido.

L iteral ly , of going and returning . L iteral ly , it results chm .

LE SON XXXIX 165

la mafiana. 3.—3Qué le parece a .? i namos ese

tren mahana por la mafiana? — No, sefior ; mafiana no

mafiana si le parece a . 8. — J,Qué tra,je debe l levar unoen el tmmde h na o de rhi y qné zapatos, de cuero o de

mos la sierra, haramas frfo que en ei Iahrador . 1 2.—1,Po

dremos meter is maletas en los depu tamentu ? 13 . Sf ;con tal que no seenmay grandee. 1 4 tu n co

l 5.— Si ; hay de td e . E than

16. jQue le parece a Vd.? zSer fa mas conveniemte (hater)sacar bil l ete w ncil lo (de ida nada mas) , o de ida y vuelta?17.

— Si Vd. piensa volve r a Buenos Aires, le acm jo quecompre bil lete (o boleto) de ida y vuelta. 1 8. M tamasbarato que dos bil l etes sencil les . 1 9. Yo mcaré un fi l lets

y de al l f v oy por (by) mar a los E stades Unidos. 21 . 0uesta

menos veM por mar desde Valpm iee a los E stafi s Unidos

que desde Buenos Aires . 22. Adam , hace muche tiempo

que tengo ganas de ver a mm y e l canal de Emama.

23 .— 1Bneno l MM a a las m y media tomamnos el

tranv ia pam ir a la estacién del terr oearrfl .

B . 0mm . 1

7. 4De quiénee tiene q ue fi pedirse

antes de partir? 8. 3A d6nde v a Vd. por ferrocarrii?

a tomm'

el vapor’? I Q De VM o ga dénde ué Vd.

por eaper? 1 1 . 2Qué chided tiene Vd. gam de ver?

‘ fi e euu‘ alons m ld hc n fi fi nt.

166 F I RST SPANISH COURSE

12 . j Hace mucho tiempo que Vd. piensa visitar a L ima?1 3. otro lugar (place) tiene Vd. ganas de ver?

14. tTomara Vd. nu automov il para ir a la estacién del

ferrocarril ? 1 5. zPreferirfa Vd. tomar el tranvfa? 16. Si Vd.

prefiere el tranvia, dfgame por qué lo prefiere. 17. q al es

la tarifa (fare) del tranvfa? (Respw sta: In terifadel tranvfa

C. Repl icas, ornitiendo los nombres. 1 . gTiene Vd. algtin

amigo? (gT iene Vd. alguno?) 2 . Tengo un amigo. 3. No

ul timo) volumen. 7. E l tiene cien pesos. 8. Vd. tiene un

zosa, cansados, baratas, fuerte, intel igentes .

E . Formulense frases que contengan (1 ) an nombre modifieado

par mic, - as aw l (blue) ; mal (0) . - a; M me) ; mi s f i cil ;(2) dos a mis nombres modificados por blancos, - as; negros,- as; pobres ; caros, —as ;mas pobres; mas caros, - as; util isi

mos, —as ; varios, —as .

F . 1 . We shal l leaveBuenos Aires for Santiago de Chile the day

the morning . 3. Before departing we must take leave of al l our

friends and of some acquaintances. 4. My father wil l get our

tickets to-morrow if they wil l permit himEto doj so (si se lo permiten) . 5. We shal l take a carriage or a motor car to (para) goto the railway station. 6. The street (t ram) car would be cheaper ,of course . 7. But we have a lot (no m atch ) of parce ls and handbags to carry w ith us. 8. I should pretes to pay more and take anautomobile (motor car) . 9. We must buy many things before wepack (5153) our trunks. 10. I wish I could wear (Quisi ere poder

plains . 1 1 . I t wil l be very warmal l (the) day on the train . 1 2. But

there wil l be much dust, and the suit would soon be soiled (sudo) .13. When we cross the mountaim between (entre) Argentina and

168

2. Algunas veces un nombre en plural vamodificado por varioa

adjetivomodiflca a uno de los infividuos exprew dos por el nombre.

anteponiendo ml s al positivo, y su super lative anteponiendo cl

articulo determinado o un adjetivo posesivo al comparative.

a. M m se trata de vudadem eol a pal abra mse trhduoe por muy omediante la terminacién - falmo.

Lesson xx.

184. Comparison of Adjectives, continued — The fol low

buena,major, cl major, good, better, the best.

pequefio

muche,mi s,much,more or most.poco,manos, l ittle (few ), less (fewer ) or least (fewest) .

a . Mayor means larger and manor,mnal ler, in quantitative expres

sions such as en mayor (manor) cantidad, in larger (smal ler) quanti ty.

6. Most, used w ith a noun or pronoun, is general ly expressed by la

186. Spanish adverbs are compared l ike Spanish adjectives.

a . The article is used w ith a super lativ e adverb only when the ad

verb is fol lowed by posible or a l ike expression : Pablo ea quien mi sestudia, Patd is the one who studies most; l l egué loml s pronto poslbla,I came as soon as possible.

LES ON XL 169

m m m)m w hq (tbe)m187. Correlative ths thc, fol lowed by comparatives, is

usual ly expressed in Spanish by Tanto

Cun toml s gana, (tanto)ml a The ma e he uma the more he

Can to mu s-M m The ta -M hsa the lemhe m ts.

a. with

which tanto h never used: min uas fl sm ml am mmm h

m a ths m e hs spsnds .

2. Before a numeral ,more than and less than are expremedby mas de and manos ds.

H emos gastado ml s de dan We have spent more than one

m um menos de diez anos. She is less than ten years old.

3. Before a clause (beginning w ith a verb) , than is usual ly

de lo que ; but than is del que (or, de la que, de l os que, delas que ) when the noun object of the principal verb is understood after de l (or, de la, de los, de las) .

Hace mi s frfo de l o que Vd. I t is colder than (what) you think.

Tenemos ml s l ibros de l os We have more books than (the

que tenfamos. books which) w e used to have .

188. Study the inflection of the radical -changing v erbs ofthe first class 244 including errar and ol er

and jaw (i


EXER CISE S

bajar (se) ,to descend,al ight,getout

el barrio,part (of a city), suburbbastante, enough; bastante new (is), to snowbueno, good enough la nieve, snow

cuarenta, forty

derecho, —a, adi ., straight, soportar , to endure, support

right; adv., straight ahead tanto, so much, asmuch

agreeable

tronar (us), to thunder

seguir derecho, to go straight ahead; h cm de huespedeg board

ing house ; hace buen (mal ) tiempo, the weather is good (bad) ; haceviento, it is windy; no mi s que, only

A . 1 . gMe hace Vd. el favor de indicarme un buen hotel?2 . Con mucho gusto . E n mi Opinion, el mejor es el H o

te l A . que da a la Puerta del Sol en la esquina de la cal le de

B . 3. Para ir Hote l A., toma Vd. el tram/ 1a que pasa por

aquf y baja Vd. en la Puerta del Sol . 4. O si prefiere ir

a pie,Vd. sigue derecho hasta l legar a la igl esia . 5. Y luego

dobla (la esquina de) la primera cal l e a su derecha (a eu ia

quierda 6. Si Vd. busca una casa de huéspedes,hal laralas

mejores en C ., el barriomas demoda de la poblacion. 7. Yo

v iv i muchos afios en la casa mimero 18 de la cal l e de D., a

poca distancia de la Puerta del Sol . 8. Me gusta muchoMadrid,pero nome gusta su cl ima. 9. E n el verano hacemucho calor y en el inv iernomucho frfo. 10. No puedo soportar

los calores del v erano ui los frios del inv ierno. l l . Mas me

I Mano is understood.

0 Note the plural forms when uwd in this sense.

171

gusta el cl ima de Mdlaga, donde no hace ai frio ui calor.

12. En mi Opini6n, la primavera es la mejor estacién del

y no l l ueve tanto. 1 4. E1 inv ierno de Nueva York es también mal fsimo. 15. Ayer hizo un tiempo bastante bueno.

16. Pero anoche no hizo mas que relampaguear, tronar yl lover toda la noche . 17. Boy hace mal tiempo. N ieva

desde la mafiana, y ahora hace tanto v iento que no puedosal ir a la cal le . 18. E l v iento y la nieve son muy desagradahles. 19. Mafiana el term6metro centigrado marcara

(wil l show) diez y ocho grados bajo cero. 20. Dies y ocho

grados centfgrados bajo cero equivalea aproximadamente

B . 1 . En an opinion acual es el mejor hotel de la poblaci6n? 2. [A qué plaza da? 3. gPuedo tomar el tranv ia

para ir a ese hotel ? 4. (E n d6nde he do bajar? 5. Si

prefiero ir a pie, Lqué direccion debo tomar? 6. J,D6nde

podria hal lar una buena casa de huéspedes? 7. 1,0ual es

el mimero de la casa en que v iv i6 Vd. tantos anos? 8. gE sta

cerca de la Puerta del Sol ? 9—10. gSabe Vd. por qué no

me gusta (por quéme gusta) el cl ima de Madrid (Malaga)?l l . 1,c es la mejor estacion del afio en E spana? 1 2 . gPor

qué? 13. gHizo buen tiempo ayer? 1 4. gR elampague6anoche? 15. [L e asustan a Vd. los rel ampagos (l ightning)?16. gTambién trono? 17. {L e asustan a Vd. los truenos

(thunder)? 18. aY l lov i6 después? 1 9. Cuentomas relam

pagueb y tron6, (tanto) mas l lovio, tverdad? 20. {L e

gusta a Vd. la l luv ia? 21 . aE sta nevando boy? 22 . Pues

(Wel l then) , hoy hace mas frfo de lo que hacia ayer, 1,verdad? 23. [L e gusta a Vd. la nieve? 24. actiantos gradosbajo cero (o sobre cero) marca ahora el termbmetro?25—26. 1,A que temperature Fahrenheit (centfgrada) hierveel agua?

s 2 1 2 (100)


27. 41A qué temperatura Fahrenheit (centfgrada) so congela

(freezes) el agua? 28. Conque (So that) nueve grados

Fahrenheit equivalen a cinco grados centfgrados, no es

0. Dense los tres grados de comparacibn de los adjetivos grande,fuerte, malo, hermosa, buena, ricos, y pequefias; y de losadverbio: bien, pronto, ymal .

D. 1 . Most men are lazy. 2 . This is the most interesting(intereaante ) lesson of al l . 3 . And it is themost useful . 4. Char les

is tal ler than Anna . 5 . She is older than he. 6. But he is larger

than she. 7. She is more than twenty years old. 8. I t is colderthan I thought. 9. I t is warmer than it was yesterday. 10. The

colder it is, themore I l ike it. 1 1 . Themore it thunders, themoreit rains. 1 2 . Themore I have, themore I want. 1 3. The less you

study, the less you wil l know . 14. The ear l ier he comes (l l egue),the bette r . 1 5. The faster she wrote, the more mistakes shemade.

16. John has fewer friends than he had (ten fa) last year . 17. Maryhasmore friends (f .) than she used to have. 18. We receive mor eletters than we received last summer . 19. We receivedmore than

ten thismorning .

E . 1 . Do you prefer a boarding house to a hotel ? 2 . Yes,sir ; I prefer a boarding house because it is less dear . 3. And in

my opinion the cooking (l a cocina) is better in a good boardinghouse . 4. Do you bel ieve that M rs. H ernandez’s boarding houseis the best in (de l a) town? 5. I t is one of the best; but I do notsay (that) it is the best of al l . 6. As a rul e, the more you pay, thebetter the cooking is is the cooking) . 7. Please direct me toM rs. H ernandez’s boarding house . 8. With great pleasure . You

go straight ahead until you come (dsese l l egar ) to the church that

is on the corner of Preciados Street. 9. Then you turn the cornerand fol low Preciados Street until you come to a large house that

is on the corner of M . Street. 10. The number of the house is 25.

1 1 . You w il l find the boarding house (that) you are looking for

on the main floor of this house . 1 2 . The rooms (las habi tadonea)

32 (cero) .


188. Than. l . Than se traduce generalmcnte por que.

2 . Las expresiones more than y less than antepuestas a un ad

jetivo numeral se traducen por mi s do ymenos de .

3. Ante una clausula (conteniendo verbo) , than se traduce pordol que (do la que, do los que, do los que) cuando la comparacionse hace con un nombre de la cl ausula principal ; 0 do lo que cuando

la comparacion se refiere a un adjetivo o adverbio.

L E SSON XL I

PER SONAL PR ONOUNS

1 90. The Spanish personal pronouns used as the subjector object of verbs

PLURAL

Simmer I nmancr Omncr

nos, us nos, to us

m. 108 l os, to them to

f . las them, f .)

a . El l o is rarely used as the subject of a verb, except in the expression ol l o es que the fact is that. E ngl ish it, as subject, isusual ly not expressed at al l in Spanish. As direct object, it is lo (m.)or la (j .) when it refers to a definite thing, and 10 (n.) when it refers toa statement or idea.

R elampag'uea,i l uove, nieve. I t l ightens, rains, snows.

I found the book : I found it.

I See 579, footnote.

Smaunan

Di nne r Osme'r I x nru cr Omncr

me,me me, tome

lo or l o,‘him, it

h , her, itto 111m, 10 her

10, itto it (u, to her )

LESSON XLI 175

I sold the house : I sold it.

No lo croomos. We do not bel ieve it.

b.

used, but their use is not sanctioned by the Spanish Academy.

See also 5542, 51 , 75—77, 79, 80.

usted, you to you

PL URAL

Sumner DI BE GI ' Ow ner

m. los

f ~ les}you to you

a. Usted and ustedes are of the second person in meaning, but theyrequire the verb in the third person.

182 . So, himself , herself, oneself , itself , yourself ; themsel ves, yourselves (see1 . So, w ith a singular verb, sometimes I .s the force of

E ngl ish one, people, etc.

, used as indefinite pronouns.

So dice . One ea,So creo que es verdad. Peon ‘

e bel ieve that it is true.

2 . Some intransitive verbs may be used as reflexives,with change of meaning .

it , to go dormir, to sl eepirae, to go away dormirse, to fal l asleep

1 93. Study the inflection of the radical -changing verbsof the second and third classes —25l ) .

Usted,- os

Smom a

Dinner Ow ne'r

m. l o or

f . In

FI RST SPANISH COURSE

el scolto, oil el jarro, jug,“pitchor

el la l echuga, lettuce

el azdcar. sum is non , (Eng l ish) walnut

cl blzcocho,biscuit’

1a carnodocamera,mutton maladela

descansar, to rest

el service

cl (M ore,match '

el vino tinto, red wino

el guissnto, pea‘

on bnon ordomin good order ; sn prhnor lugar, in the first place;tengo (mocha) hambro, I am (very) hungry; tengo (mocha) sod, Iam (very) thirsty; tengo (macho) mono, I am (very) sleepy; tengocuidado, I amcareful ; [tongs Vd. cuidadol be careful l look out! piords

A . 1 . Después de pasearnos a pie toda la tarde tenfamosmucha hambre . 2 . E ntramos en un hotel y nos dirigimosal comedor . 3. E l mozo (camarero) v ino y nos di6 l a lists .

4. M ientres leiamos la l ista, el mozo puso sobre la mesa unmantel l impio, servil l etas, platos, vases, cuchil los, tench

dores, cucharas para sopa, cucharitas, sa], pimienta,aceite y v inagre . 5. En primer lugar pedimos lorsiguientes : sopa, pescado y ensalada de lechuga. c 3

pués pedimos came de earnero asada, papas (patata s , y

guisantes. 7. Por reg la general , prefiero la came de vaca

(de res) a la carne de carnero . 8. Pero hoy no habfa mas

que came de carnero. 9. E 1 mozo (camarero) nos traje

pan y v ino tinto sin pedirlo nosotros (without our ordering) .10. Para mi (For my part) lo mas dificil es escoger los pos

Or ol el evador (as in Mexico) . Or ( al lots.0 The l ittl e w ax matches; so common in L atin countries, are general ly

cal l ed cor l l lss in Spanish (but are cal l ed ceril l os'

in Mexico) .

Or chfcharo (as in Mexico and some other Spanish-American countries) .


eonospondisntes. I . You (m.) are tired. 2. You U.) are il l .

3 . He saw you (m.) yesterday. 4. I saw you this morning.

5. We told you the truth. 8. We gave you a present. 7. You

fel l asleep. 8. Did you go away?

E . 1 . 1 am very tired and l am very hungry. 2. We havowalked about (per la) town al l (the) day. 3. I t is said that theyserve excel l ent meals in the restaurant of this hotel . 4. Should

you l ike to dine here, or should you prefer to go to another

restaurant? 5.— No, sir ; I am tired of walking about town,

and I shmrld prcfer to dine here. 6. Waiter !— I am eoming(cease XVI I I , D. 2 y sir. What do the gentlemen wish?

7.-Bring me soup and fish, and lot (5148) the soup be hot.

8.— Wouldn't the gentlemen wish salad? To-day we have a good

lettuce salad. 9.— Bring us salad after the fish, and bring us

oi'

and v inegar. 10. I l ike a lot of oil on (on) the salad, but Idon’

t l ike pepper. 1 1 . — Do the gentlemen wish beef or mutton?— Bring us beef and fried (trl tas) potatoes. 12.

— Verywel l ! am bl oat) , sir ; soup, fis

‘

r, lettuce salad, roast beef , and

wine? 14.— I l ike (the) redwine,butmy friend prefers (the) white.

15. Waiter ! Please bring me another napkin : this [one] is tom.

16. Here is (Agni tiene Vd.) another, sir . Do the gentlemenwish dessert? 17. Bring us a smal l cup (una tacita) of codes,and cheese and biscuits. 1 8. As [a] tip he r much shal l we give

the waiter? 1 9. The dinner wil l cost two a. l iars. Let us give

himtwenty cents. 20. Let us go to the hotel oflice the office of

the hotel ) and ask for a room. 21 . On the second floor we havea large room,with two beds, that faces the square. 22 . I s there

[an] elevator in this hote l? No, sir ; I am sorry to say (that)

first floor if you would prefer it. 24.— Very wel l ! Let

’s go to bed

I amvery sl eepy. 25 . Please send (mandar ) to the room a jug ofwater and glasses. 26.

— Very wel l , sir, and I shal l also sendsomematches and a candle . 27. Good night,airs. May (5150,b:risers que) you sl eep wel l .

l Diminutive of tons.

179

pafioles uM os como sujeto o complemento son los siguientes :

a. El l o rara vos so usa oomo sujeto del verbo, excopto en ls oxprosidnel lo s! goo. E l it ing lds, come sujeto, casi nunca se traduce al espatlol .

Como complemento directo, it equivale a lo (para el mascul ino ) y !s(paro el femenino) cuando se refiere a una oosa determinada y concreta,y lo (para el noutro) cuando se reficre a una expresion o idea.

b. Las formas femeninas del dativo la y lss se usan a menudo; perosu uso no est‘sancionado por la Real Aeademia.

m. “m m z o s o

a . Ustod y ustedos son, por su significado, de la segunda persona,

pero piden el verbo cn la tercera persona.

192. 1 . So, usado con un verbo en singular, equivale fmcuentemente a one, people, etc., en inglés, usados como pronombres

cambiando entonces de significado.

LE SSON XL I I

1 94. P ersonal Pronouns, continued. Spanish object

pronouns usual ly precede their v erb.

But an object-pronoun fol lows its verb and is attached

to it when the v erb is an infinitive, a present participl e, or

an affirmative imperative (or subjunctive used lmperatively) .See 5588, 2 ; 143 ; and 2 .

a. I f the sentence or clause begins With the verb, the object-pronoun may fol low , but this rarely occurs in col loquial Spanish :

pl l como, dice cl juez, it pleases me, says the judge.

195. Reflex ive so, whether direct or indirect object, al

ways precedes another object-pronoun.

I t seems to me .

See also § 80, 2.


a. With m is eonmlgo; with thee is condgo; and wtth himel f, hacal f. etc.. is eon-lac.

“

See also 5581 -82 .

197. I f Engl ish myself , thysel f, himsel f, etc., are emphatic,they are to be expremd in Spanish by the reflexive pronounin the prepositional form,modified by mismo - s,

- os,- as) .

H e ongsfio ami mlamo —a) . l deceive mysel f .E l la so hur ls do s! ndsma.

198. I n the plural a reflex ive verb may become reciprocal .Usual ly no distinction of form is made in Spanish betweenreflexive and reciprocal verbs; thus, nos engal lamos maymean we deceive o urselves, or we deceive each other or one

another . But a reciprocal verb may be made expl icit by theuse of e! uno al (del ) otro, arms a (do) otros, etc.

So ongafian cl uno al otro. They deceive each other .

So burlan unas do otras. They make fun of one another .

199. T he definite article is required before a noun usedin apposition w ith a personal pronoun.

“l os. los alumnos do We students desire a vacation.

seamos una vacacion.

Ustedes las senoras nunca You women never gossip about one

i Latin met-um, locum and occur s became mice , tiao, and si gn in Old

Spanish. and later the preposition con was prefixed.


anfiteatro) con entrada, un peso. 13. Un asiento de palco

costaria mas, por supuesto. 14. No somos bastante ricos

para ir a palco. 1 5.—1,Y a qué hora se levanta el telon?

— A las ocho en punto. 16.—

LY hay buenos actores

(o artistas)?— 1Ya lo creo! los mejores del pats. 17.—[Esta

bien! Vamos a tomar los oil letes, porque ya son las siete y

cuarto. 18. Yo preferida una butaca de la primera fila si

no estan todas ocupadas . 19. Temo que no quededesocupada ninguna butaca de la primera fila, pero vere

mos. 20.— Y después del teatro iremos al Café Real a

cenar , si le parece . 21 . xVamosl {Apresurese Vd., que

(for) se hace tarde ! No tax-dataen levantarse el telon.

B. Comm . 1 . gL e gusta a . ir al teatro? 2 . {A qué

teatro quisiera Vd. it? 3. {E n d6nde se pueden leer losanuncios del teatro? 4. aQué quiere Vd. ver, tragedia,sainete, o zarzuela? 5. 1,Por qué? 6. 1,Le gusts a Vd. ir

al teatro de variedades? 7. gPor qué? 8. {L e gusts a Vd.

el cinematografo (e 9. 1,Por qué? 10. mamaiuncion esta noche en el Teatro de Calderon? 1 1 . (Se estrenauna nueva comedia? 1 2. LQuiénes son los autores (authors)de la comedia? 1 3. 1,Cuanto cuesta la entrada? 14. {A

qué hora se levanta el telon? 1 5. {H ey buenos actores (oartistes)? 16. 1,En d6nde preferiria Vd. sentarse? 17. gCree

Vd. que queden desocupadas algunas butacas de la primerafil e? 1 8. Después del teatro, as d6nde iremos? 19. 3Aqué?

20. {Se hace tarde? 21 . gTardaraen levantarse el tel bn?

C. 1 . Give it to Ferdinand. 2 . Give it to him. 3 . Do not

give it to Ferdinand. 4. Do not give it to him. 5. Give it tome.

6. Do not give it to me . 7. Tel l the truth tome. 8. Do not te l l

it to her . 9. Bring me a napkin. 10. I shal l bring it to you at

once. 1 1 . Donot bringme a torn napkin. 1 2 . H e l ikes it. 13. She

does not l ike it. 14. I wish to do so (lo) . 1 5. You are (est! ) doingso now . 16. He presented himsel f tome . 17. Does it seem (messfigursrse) to you that it is possible? 18. Come with me . 19. I

LESSON XL I I 183

can’t go with you (2a pen . 20. Have you a letter for me?

21 . I haven’t any letter for you (2a pers. 22 . John deceives

himself . 23 . Charlesmakes fun of himself . 24. They deceive eachother . 25. Theymake fun of each other . 26. You students oughtto study more . 27. Men should never gossip about one another .

28. I agree to (Convengo en) it. 29. I insist upon (l nsisto en) it.

D. 1 . Have you read the advertisements of the theaters in theafternoon paper? 2 .

— I have read al l [of] them in the morningpaper . 3. At (En) the Calderon Theater a new tragedy by JscintoBenavente is given for the first time to-night. Should you l ike tosee it? 4. No, sir ; I want to enjoymyse l f, and I should prefera comedy or a farce . 5 . Wel l (Does) amusical comedy is

'

given

(so represents ) to-night at the Lyric (L frico) Theater. We’l l gothere, if you think best. 6. I don’

t l ike the music of musicalcomedies. I prefer [grand] opera. 7.

— Al l right l ' Let’s go and

(s) see a farce by the Al varez Quintero brothers. I enjoy greatly(M e diviertomuchisimo con) their comedies and farces. 8. Wil lthere be [a] performance to-night? I should say so! There is

[a] performance every night (todss iss noches) . 9. Should

you l ike to take a box? No, sir ; we aren’t rich enough to take

a box . 10. Let’s take an orchestra seat or a seat in the first row of

the balcony. l l . H ow much does a seat in the first row [to

gether] with admission cost? 1 2 . As a rule it costs a dol lar, butit is dearer to-night. 13. According to the advertisement, it wil lcost a dol lar and [a] half to-night. 14. And when (a que hots)does the curtain rise? Promptly at hal f-past eight. 15. Then

(Puss) we must hurry. I t w il l not be long before the performancebegins. 16. Yesterday I went to a vaudev il le theater . The per

formance was w retched (msl l sims) . 17. There was a Spanish

actress who sang very wel l , and a Japanese (jsponés) acrobatwho did wel l enough. 18. But the rest (lo demss) of the performance was not good. 19. To (Pars) tel l the truth, between us,

I prefer motion pictures to a vaudev il le performance a per

formance of vaudev il le) . 20. Al l right! L et'

s hurry , for it’s

getting late, and I want a seat in the first row . 21 . We haven'ttaken tickets yet. I fear thst al l the best seats may al readybe


occupied. 22 . Let’

s catch (fleece tomar) the street (tram) car thatis coming up the street.

194. Pronombres personal es, continuacion. E n espafiol los

pronombres complementarios preceden generalmente al verbo.

Pero el pronombre compl ementario sigue al verbo y va unido a61 si esta en infinitive , participio presente , o imperative (0 sub

mentario puede seguir le,pero esto ocurre rara vez en e l lenguaje usual .

195. E l reflexive se, ya sea como complemento directo o indi

recto, siempre precede a los otros pronombres complementarios.

196. Forums de los pronombres personal es con preposicion .

Cuando los pronombres personales van regidos por una prepo

sici6n se usan las siguientes formas: 1 . mt, ti, él , e l la, e l l o, no

sotros - as, vosotros—ss, e l l os

- as.

2 . Usted y si también se usan con preposiciones.

a . Cuando con se usa con mi, ti, o sf, la preposicion y el pronombrese unen formando una sola palabra, y la combinacion termina con In

197. Si las expresiones inglesas myself , thyself , himself , etc.,son

enfaticas, deben traducirse al espafiol mediante sl pronombrereflexive con preposicién,modificado por mi sma - a,

- os,— as) .

1 98. E n el plural un v erbo reflexivo puede vol verse reciproco.

Por regla general , en espai iol no se hace distincion de forma entre losverbos reciprocos y reflexivos; asi, por ejemplo, nos engsnamos

puede significar nos engafiamos a ne sotros mismos o nos en

gafiamos cl uno al otro.

”Pero un v erbo reciproco puede hacerse

expl icito mediante las expresiones e l uno sl (del ) otro, ones a (de)otros, etc.

199. E l articulo determinado se requiere ante na nombre usadoen aposicion con nu pronombre personal .


And the article may be used

El hsblst demssisdo es un vicio. To talk toe much is a vice.

Me enfsds d que Vd ne quiers I t angers me that you are

wil l ing to do it.

4. To expressmeasure .

Die: centavos ls docens. Ten cents a dozen.

Apeso el metro. (At) a de l lar a meter .

203. Study the changes in spel l ing that occur in

fiectien of verbs 239

smaril lo,—s, yel lowla svens, oats

cl sro, - s, clear, bright

detrl s do, behind

en frente do, before

la gsl l ins, hen

el grsno, grain

la hacienda, large farm, plantation

cl huevo. eggis l egumbre, vegetable vigilar, to watch over , guard

eehsr de means, to miss (a person or thing) ; poco fal te pars que secayera, he almost fel l ; poner hum to lay eggs; 4,u ha sido de a?

what has become of him?

A . 1 . Ne nos gusta la v ida de la ciudad durante la esta

cien de les calores. 2 . N uestra famil ia tiene una haciendaa quince kilemetres de la ciudad y al l f pasamos el veranotodos los afies. 3. Nos divertimos mas en el campe queen la ciudad . 4. Tenemos cabal los de sil la y nos pa

seames a cabal lo casi todos los dfas. 5. M i hermana no

i I n some eeuntries. as in Mex ice . a readable aarden is cal led hortsl iss.

cl msfz,maize , Indian cornis msnzsns, appleis nsrsnjs, orangeel nido, nest

cl pl jsro, birdla pm . pear

el pez. (l iving) fish

el pl l tsne , banana

el trigo, wheat

LESSON XL I I I 187

tiene cabal lo, porque no is gusta montar. 6. La primeravez que montb a cabal lo poco fal te para que se cayera, yno ha querido montar después. 7. A poca distancia de la

y clara. 8. Nos divertimos muche pescando en este lage .

9. En un jardin en frente de la casa tenemos l indas fieresblancas, amaril las, azules y rojas. 10. Detras de la casa

hay una huerta en la cual (in which) as cul tivan muchasclases de frutas y legumbres (verduras) . l l . Enmi Opinion,las manzanas y las peras son lasmejores frutas. 1 2 . Siente

muche que en este cl ima no se produzcan frutas tropi

ca'

ss come la naranja, cl r‘

i tano y la guayaba. 1 3. E n nu

corral hay gal l inas blancas a las cuales echames grane .

Penen muchos hueves. 14. Los pajaros hacen su nide en

labradores, que cul tivan los campes, se levantan temprano ytrabajan todo el dia. 16. Cul tivan varies clases de cereales,come el trige , el mafz y la avena. 17. E l afio pasado

tenfamos nu hermoso perre que v igilaba la casa. 18. E l

pebrecite (poor thing) muri6, y ahora le echames de menos.19. En la hacienda hay vacas Jersey que nos dan leche .

20. E n el verano la v ida del campe es muy agmdable .

B. Contéstese. 1 - 2 . gQué v ida is gustamas a Vd. durantela estacion de les caleres (de l es fries) , la (that) del campee la de la ciudad? 3. 4A qué distancia de la ciudad tieneeu famil ia la hacienda? 4. {Se pasea Vd. a cabal lo? 5 ”P

er

que no quiere montar a cabal lo su hermana? 6. we. as

divierten Vds. pescando? 7- 8. 1,1 ) 6nde es“ el jardin (l ahuerta)? 9— 10. gQué se cul tiva en el jardin (en la huerta)?1 1 . En an opinion gqué frutas son l as mejorm? 1 2 . aPer

qué no se pueden producir al l f las frutas tropical es?

13. gQué frutas tropicales? 14. gE n d6nde estan las gal l i


ass? 15. gQué penen? 16. 4D6nde hacen les pajaros eu

nide? 17. LA qué hora se levantan les labradores? 18. gT ra

bajan muche? 19. LQué cereales cul tivan? 20. gQuién

vigil aba la casa el afie pasado? 2 1 . gQué ha side de él ?

22 . {L e echan Vds. de menes? 23. jQué raza de vacas

tienen Vds.? 24. {Dan leche? 25. (Cuando tendran Vds.

ganas de volver a la ciudad?

C. 1 . Avoid (E vitad) the bad (n.) and seek the goa l . 2 . Men

do not comprehend (no comprenden) the infinite . 3. We shal l dothe same. 4. I prefer mine (n.) to yours. 5. Write as fast as

possible. 6. Study at least two hours. 7. I knew how good she is.

8. We knew how il l you are. 9. We are studying Spanish.

10. Spanish is not difficul t. 1 1 . Do you speak Spanish? 1 2 . This

letter is written in Spanish. 13. Women love flowers. 14. Horses

are streng . 15. Dogs are useful . 16. Gold is worthmore than iron.

17. Mr . Perez left yeste rday. 18. Good day, Mr . Martinez.19. Captain (risese espiti n) T revifie is a Mexican. 20. I took 06

my gloves. 2 1 . I washed my hands . 22 . The children washedtheir faces. 23 . John has lost his hat. 24. We arrived lastmonth.

25 . We shal l leave next Friday . 26. I s Argentina a richer countrythan Mexico? 27. Mexico has more inhabitants (habitantes)than Argentina . 28. H e was born in Spain. 29. H is w ife was

born in Peru. 30. Havana is the largest city in (de) Cuba. 31 . To

eat too much is a v ice . 32 . Oranges cost thirty cents a dozen.

33. This cloth (patio) is sol d at two dol lars ameter .

D. 1 . My fr ther has a large-farm (at) fifty kilometers fromBoston. 2 . We spend al l our summer vacations vacations of

the summer) en (en) the farm, because it is cooler there . 3 . Mybrothers l ike to ride on horseback Every day. 4. I do not (l ikeit) . The first time (that) I rode on horseback I almost fel l [off].5. Since then (entonces) I have not ridden (no monto) en horseback. I prefer te ride en (en) [a] bicycle . 6. I used to have a dogthat I loved dearly (tiernamente) , but the poor thing died a yearago. 7. At night he used to guard the house, and during the day(de dis) he fol lowedme everywhere (per tedss psrtes) . 8. There


2 . Cen les nombres de algunos pafses. E ntre el los se cuentsn

come los l stsdos Unidos, y también los siguientes °

a. Ia nombres de ciudsdcs, por regla general , ne l l evan el artleule

3. Paramodificar a un infinitivo e una clausula sujcto de verbe .

4. Pars expresarmedids .

LE SSON H IV

ml . Omission of the Definite Articl e. The definitearticle i s emitted in Spanish, though required in Engl ish :

Santiago, capital de Chile. Santiago, the capital of Chile.

Al fonso the Thirteenth.

soc. Omission of the Indefinite Articl e . I t is regularly

omitted '

1 . Before an unqual ified noun in the predicate2 . Before a noun in apposition.

Lims, ciudsd del Perfi. L ima, a city of Peni .

3. Before cierto, a certain, otro, another, ciento, a hundred,mi l , a thousand; and after tah such a.

4. In many idioms, such as

H e doesn’t say a word.

jQué li stims l

LESSON XL IV 191

Possessive Pronouns

d myomm b m h-mm h-mm). thnedmo tlsm lom lu mm h

am mm b m mm mm ). yomol mro at m lom locmm u

Prefiero h eu s de Vd s ls mfs. I prefer your heuss to mine.h de Vd es ml s grsnde que ls Yoms is larger than mine.

The possessive pronouns require the definite article in

Spanish though not in Engl ish.

a. But the definite article is used w ith a possessive in the predicate

only in a question beginning with which,or in answer to such a question.

E s mfo.

gQue l ibro es el de Vd.? Which book is yours? — This oneEste es el mfo. is mine .

gCul l de lss plumss es ls Which pen is mine?— This is

Esta es ls de Vd.

208. The definite article may be used with de 61, de e l l a,

etc., instead of suyo, etc., to make the meaning clear or

emphatic (see also

Tengo el l ibrode el znotengo I have his book : I haven’t hers.

el de el l s.

Prefiere h csss deVd s ls de H e prefers your home to theirs.


zoo. Study the inflection of hsbcs (i257) , sor and

it (i

ls molsstis, trouble

la opottnnidsdmpportunityoi

oi prostsr, to lend, show

el conplomimengagement

oi respeto, respect; m petos, re

dsnt o dq within

saludos, to salute

cl servidor, la sorvidors, servant

ovltsr, to avoid, help - avoid) subsa ibir, to subscribe, sign

histfidco, - s,historic(al )

l l uy sedor mlo, My dear Sir ; su sprecisble csrts, your favor ; no

hsy novedad, al l is wel l ; sin novedad, w ithout accident, as usual ; mohal lomojor , I am better ; «a domelts, he has returned, he is back;

gqué tsl sigoe VdJ' hew are you getting on? ds ls uns, it is striking

one ; dsn iss dos (tres, etc ) , it is striking two (three, no sirvo

psrs u dq it is good for nothing ; su stento y soguro servidor, your

1 5 de Junie de 1918

Querido Pablo

H ey l l egué a Granada sin novedad, y pienso permaneceraqui ocho dias. La verdad es que estaba cansado cuandol legué, pero ya me siente mejor . H e em decir que Granadatiene muchos monumentes hist6ricos y desee verlos todos.

Hagame Vd. cl favor de decir al sefier Velazquez que estarede vuel ta dentro de quince dfas. Bien sé que lo doy a Vd.

mucha molestia, pero no puedo ev itarlo. gQué tal sigue

i nn novecientos diez y ocho.

194

Enrique que le daba a l’able? 9. gPer queno pudo Enrique

oscribirmds? 10. l Quéhera dib? 1 1 . zPor quolo pidiOEnrio

que a Pablo que lo dispensal-a? 1 2. ;Qué cosa ne ssrvta

para nada? 13. 106me acab6 Enrique la carta?

14. ;D6nde estaba 0arles Poroda y Gald6s cuando cs

cribib la carta a Tomas Hidalgo y R ivera? 15. (Cual es

la fecha de esa carta? 1 6. l Cual es la direccion del senor

Hidalgo? 17. (Que acabé do recibir cl sel ler Pereda?

18. l Qué se apresuré a hacer? 19: 1,Qué lo agradecio al

sel l er Hidalgo? 20. l Cen que deseaba que contase el senor

Hidalgo? 2 1 . 19 06 lo presenté al sel l er Hidalgo? 22 . l me

C. 1

of Spain. 5. My father is a physician. 6. My uncle is a lawyer .

7. Both (Los dos) are Amer ica n . 8. Mr . Carducci is a tail r r .

0. His brother is a carpenter (carpintero) . 10. Beth " r Ital ians.

1 1 . They used to l ive in Pisa, a city of I taly. 12 . A certain friendof mine (amigo mio) toldme so (lo) . 13. Another friend of minedenied it. 14. H e did not be l ieve such a story. 15. That mannever wears a necktie . 16. What a pity that he does not dress(risers vestirso) better l 17. Present my regards to yr n people

(a los suyos) . 18. He presented his regards tomy peopl e

nombres. 19. He has his books. 20. She bas her books. 21 . Have

you your books? 22 . We have our books. 23. He read her letter.24. She read his letter. 25. Did you read their letters? 26. I

prefer my house to yours. 27. Do you prefer your house tomine?28. Whichhouse is yours? 29. Whose house is that one (aquél la)?D. 1 . Hotel Grands,Granada.

Apr il 25, 1 918.

Granada ismore inte resting than Sevil le (Sevil l s) . I t is not solarge, but it has the Alhambra which is the most interesting his

‘Note that which houee is outm whil e which al ene is onfl .

LESSON XL I V 195

toricsl menument in Spain. I t wss built by the Moors (msros)

I was very tirsd and nearly il l when l srrived yosterday, but l

feelingmuch bottor. Tel e . Poros thst I shal l be back in awenk.

I can't stay longor (ml s tlsfl s0) this time (m ). but l hopo to

return next year . I t hss struck half-past throo and l hsve an

onpm ont at four o’clock.

Ferdinand.

33 San Cristobal Street, Barcelona.

May 5, 1918.

Mr. Henry Valera Ortis,

Dear Sir

We have just received your favors of the 2nd and 3rd instant

and we make haste to answer thc'

. We are very grateful to youand your wife (estimabl e sel l ers) for al l that (lo que) you (Vds.)have done for our daughter during her il lness, and we hope that

we shal l-be-able (5153) some day to repay you [for] the many

good services that you have had the kin dness to show our beloved

We present our respects to you (Vd.) and al l your family, and

M Snpresion del articul o determinado. E l articulo determinado, aunque necesario en inglés, se suprime en espanol :

1 . Generalmente ante el nombre en aposicion.

2 . Ante el adjetivo numeral quemodifica a un titulo.


206. Suprosl dn del articulo indeterminado. Generalmente

se suprime

3 . Ante las veces cierto, otro, siente ,mil ; y después de tal .

207. Pronomhres posesivos. Obsérvese que en espatie l los

pronombres posesivos requieren cl articulo determinado y no lo

requieren en inglés.

cado (atributo) solamente en las preguntas que empiezan per cul l oque (adj) e en la contestacien a estas preguntas.

M6. E l articulo determinado puede usarse con do 61, do el la,

etc., on vez de suyo, etc., para dar mayor claridad o énfasis a la

LE SSON XLV

210. Demonstrativ es. Study —62.

a . That of, the one of , etc., are usual ly expressed by ol (la, 10, los,lss) do.

La pluma doacoroy ls doore . The steel pen and the gold one

(l it., The pen of steel and that

21 1 . R elative Pronouns

que, who (whom) , which, thatcl cual (1s cual , lo cual , los cual es, lss cual es)el que (la que, lo que, los que, los que )

quion—os), who (whom)

cuanto - a,- os,

- as), al l who, al l that

60170 H .w e. i s), whose

21 2 . Uses of the Relative Pronouns. 1 . Que, the mostcommon of the Spanish relative pronouns, is invariable. I t

who (whom),which


5. A Spanish relative pronoun can not be omitted, norcan it precede its preposition, as in Engl ish. Compare

tal king about with el hombre do quien

habl sbamos.

21 8. Study the inflection of tenor ostar

and andar

afeetl simo, —a (sin e, -a) ,most ofrecer, to offer

pedir (i) prestado, to ask the

loan of, borrow

apurado, - a, w ithoutmoney el placer, pleasure

la culpa, faul t, guil t

cl duofio, owner procursr, to attempt, trypromoter, to promisetomar prestado, to borrow

me hace fal ta, I lack, I need; no puedo manos do hacer le, I can’t

objection to doing it; aqua hay do nuevo? what is the news? lo

logré, I succeeded (in doing so) ; no es mfa la cul pa, it is notmy faul t;Vd. tiono ls culpa, it is your faul t; no de jo Vd. do hacerle, do not failto do so ; no hay nads do particular, there is nothing unusual

A. l . Cal le de Preciados,M atanzas, Cuba8de Enero de 1 918

Querido Juan

Me hace fal ta dinere . gPuede Vd. enviarme un giro postalde cincuenta pesos ere? Si me presta esta suma, prometo

pagarsela el primero del mes que v iene. No me agrada

pedir prestado el dinero que necesite , pero esta vez no puedomenos de hacerlo. Siente muchfsime molestar a Vd. y si

tiene inconveniente en prestarmelo, no 10 bags . No es miala culpa de hal larme apurado (sin dinero) en esta poblacion.

Se 10 expl icaré a Vd. cuando lo vea . H e procurado tomar

prestado aqui ol dinero que me fal ta, pero no lo logré . La

verdad es que no tengo a quien dirigirme . gQué hay de

LE SSON XLV 199

nueve en la Habana? Aqui nohay nada de particular . No

Suyo afmo,Fel ipe .

2. Cal l s de F rances, 85

Sel l er Den Carlos Tamaye y Baus,Puerta del Sol , 10.

Tendriames gran placer en que nos hiciese Vd. cl honor de

comer con nosotros mafiana per la neche . E spero que no

tenga Vd. ningdu otro compromise que nos prive de su

compania en esta ocasibn.

Mi marido tendrael gusto de hacerl e una v isita hey para

saludarle y para ofrecerse a acempafiar le (accompany you)mafiana cuando v enga a nuestra casa.

Quedo de Vd. S. S.,

Q. S. M . B .,1

Mercedes Garcia de Ndfiez.

A 21 de diciembre de 1918.

B . Contestese. 1 . 4A quién escribib F el ipe? 2 . gCual es

la fecha de su carta? 3 . {Que lo hacia fal ta a F el ipe?

4. gCuanto dinero querfa que lo env iase Juan? 5. gCuando

prometiopagarsele? 6. {L e agradaba a Fe l ipe pedir prestadoel dinero que neces itaba? 7. gN e pude menos de hacerle?8. l Tenfa F el ipe la cul pa do hal larse apurado (sin dinero)?9. l Cuando se lo expl icaria a su amigo? 10. LDonde pro

curb tomar prestado el dinero que lo fal taba? 1 1 . {L o logre?t S. 8. Q . S. M . B. here is to be read seguro sorvidora one anmane boss.

This very formal expression is new l ittl e used except in inv itations, an

nouncements. etc. When aman thus addresses a woman. the correspondingformal expmfi on is S. 8. Q . S. P . (pies) B . I nstead of do Vd. S. 8. Q . S. M .

(P .) S., one also finds S. S. S. 0. B. S. M . (P .) ou seguro servider qua

boss on mane (sus pies) . I n ordinary social and commercial correspondence . it is new customary to omit Q . B. S. M ., or to use in its place Q. E .

S. I . - quo estrocha su mano. who clasps yonr hond.


1 2. {Per qué no? 1 3. gHabia al ge (anything) de particularon Matanzas? 14. gDonde estaMatanzas?

1 5. LA quién escribie la sefiora dofia Mercedes Garcia deNdfiez? 16. LCual es el nombre de bautismo (de pila)de esta sonoral 17— 1 8. gCual es el apel l ido de su padre

(de sumarido)? 19. 1,E n qué tendrfan gran placer la sefiera

y sumaride? 20. gPara cuando inv ite e‘la al senor Tamayoa comer con el los? 21 . 1,Para qué tendrfa el marido cl gustodo hacer una v isita al senor Tamaye? 22 . gCual es la fecha

de la invitacién?

was speaking . 3. The young lady whom I saw this morning .

4. The beek that he borrowed fromme (me pididprestado) . 5 . The

man that borrowed the book. 6. The book of w . lch we were

speaking . 7. The house he bought. 8. The house in which he

l ives. 9. I hav e written to M r . H errera’s daughter who is in N ew

York. 10. I have written also to M rs. Martinez’s son who is in

H avana. 1 1 . Do you knew a book which is (5161 , 2) more interesting than this [one]? 1 2 . Do you knew the author of this book,who is [a] great poet in my opinion? 13— 1 4. This boy (This

girl ) is the one who toldme so. 15- 16. These men (These women)are the ones who took it (se lo l l ovaron) . 1 7. What do you want?18. Tel l me what you want. 19. I be lieve you don

’t know what

you want. 20. What did he buy? 2 1 . H e wil l (quiere) not tel l

me what he bought. 22 . H e is working harder (mas) ,which pleasesme greatly (muche) . 23. H e told us the truth, which (n.) sur

prised (sorprondio)

D. 1 . Cal ls de San F ernando, 15, Buenos Aires.

May 5, 1918.

me a postal money order for (do) seventy-five

dol lars? I am w ithout money. I hav e spent the last dol lar thatI had. I tried to borrow some money from (a) an acquaintance,

but he would (quer ia) not lend it to me . I haven’t [any] friends

in this town. I f you wil l lend me that (esa) amount, I promise

202 FI R ST SPANI SH COURSE

3.

que. etc., 0 per quien- os) .

4. Las expresiones neutras that which 0 what thatwhich) quehacen referencia a unamanifestacion o idea, so traducen por lo que,y el neutro which as comdnmente lo cual .

L E SSON XLVI

214. Intorrogativo Pronouns

quién-os), who (whom) cul l —os),which

do quien—os).whose cuanto - a,

-os,- as), how

qué,what (which)

a . In questions, which used as an attributive (or adherent) adjectiveis qué : aquo l ibro quiere Vd.? which book do you wish?

b. I n exclamations, what (a) or how is qué : zquobonito nifis l whata pretty gir l ! jqué pi l ida ostfis l how pale you are !

21 5. Indefinite Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives

demo (1 .—os.

- ss). some. are .

a few

muche —a,—os,

- as) ,much,manypoco

—s,- os,

—as), l ittl e, few

uno —s,—os,

- ss), one, some todo —s,—os,

—ss), al l , every;

cada (adi ., each, every (n .) everythingcada une —a), each one misma —a,

- os,- as), same, self

tanto —a,- os, as (so) much

los (l ss) domfis, the rest (many)cualquiora (cusl esquiors) , any tal , such, such a

(one) at al l , whatever

LESSON XLVI 203

mi me -Momma . Something is better than nothing.

E very man should do his duty.

Todos losmuchnchos jun bene la pelotn.

Va n! teatro todnl lu noches H e goes to the theater cvery (each)(cada noehe) .

Nol qulere a los doo.

l urid el milmo dh .

fil mismome lo dl jo.

I never passed such a night.

(Tiene Vd.w af t— No tengo. H av e you any pears? I haven’t

any .

6. A l ittle (denoting quantity) is un poco de : gpuede Vd. prectarmeun pooo de dinero? oan you lend m a l ittlc nwney f

c. Cunlquiern (cul lel quiern) may lose the final - n when it precedes

the noun it modifies.

Cudquier hombre es bueno pm Any man is good (enough) forthat.

But,Pm eao cualquiera es bueno. F or that any one (at al l ) is good.

d. Rev iew 51 1 3 .

216. Study the inflection of poner saber

caber and poder

A train leaves every two hours.

H e l ikes us both.

H e died the same day.

H e told me so himsel f .We should l ike two others.

204

“M o. 4 . adi .mum. ado .rooxpodir (l ), to forward

asistir, to be present (at), atromidr, to remit, sendrostrlsrso, to catch cold

casarso con, tomarry, getmarried

la w anna besel onlaco, union,marriage ls

enojarse, to get angry; eno cl templo, temple, churchjado. vofifiearso, to be held or per

fijamonto, with cer tainty formed

l s nodciq news fitem) ; las notl

geul ndo tud noficias do Gl ? when did you hear fromhimlast?a los pocos afios do ostar squf, after being here a few years; 3,u hay?

what’s the matter? aqué tiene Vd.? what

’s the matter with you? no

tengo nada, there's nothing the matter with me ; do vez on cuando,

fromtime to time ; tuvo lugar, it took place ; si mal nome acuerdo, ifI remember rightly ; guards cams, he stays in bed; tengo miedo, Iam frightened; some ol vidd, I forgot.

A. l . México,‘ 5 de Jul io de 1918.

Querido Carlos

gCuando tuvo Vd. noticias de Pedro? A los pocos dfas dcestar en México recibf una carta de él , pero no he vuel to a

escribirme después. LQué tendraque no quiere escribirme?

gCree Vd. que esté enojado conmigo? Yo l e escribo de vez

en cuando, pero no contests a mis cartas .

1,Ha ofdo Vd. que Francisco se casé con la hija de los

sehores de Montoya? L a ceremonia rel igiosa se verificé en

l Within Mexico itsel f . the word México usual ly means the city of

Mexico} The country as a w hol e is usual ly spoken of as In R epubl ics Moxi

esna. but official ly it is bal l ed los E stados Unidos M exican“. The official

spe l l ing is México and moxicano, but the pronunciation is always “Ghee


Juan una carts de Pedro? 6. zHa vuelto Pedro a eseribirle

después? 7. {Sabin Juan lo que tenfa Pedro? 8. gTemia

que Pedro estuviera enojado con 61? 9. gCudndo lo ea

cribfa? 10. LContestaba Pedro a las cartas de Juan?

1 1 . gCon quien as cost) F rancisco? 12 . gEn d6nde se

verificb la ceremonia rel igiosa? 13. gCuando as verified?

14. iCudndo tuvo lugar la ceremonia civil? 15. gPudo asie

tir Juan a las ceremonies? 16. i Por qué no? 17. zCutnto

tiempo tuvo que guardar cama? 18. gE s bonita 0 fee

(homely) la esposa de F rancisco? 19. gE s rico o pobre el

padre de el la? 20. zQué cosa le remiti6 Juan a su amigo?21 . 4A casa de quién remiti6 Juan la carta? 22 . LQue lerog6 a eu amigo que perdonase? 23. 1,0m se subscr.

’

46

Juan?24. aQuiénes son los padres de dofia Jul ia? 25. gQué

tenfan el honor de participar a Juan? 26. gQué lo suplicaron

que se sirviera hacer?

C. 1 . What a pretty gir l ! 2. But how pale she is! 3. What ahandsome horse you have ! 4. How gentle he is l 5. Whose horsehave you? 6- 7. Some one (No one) toldme so. 8. Have you any

10. I do not know any one there. 1 1 . Have you anything that is

(5161 , 2) better than this 1 2 . I haven’t anything better.

13. Have you any apples to-day? 14. No, ma'am; we haven

’t

any to-day. 15. We have neither apples nor pears. 16. E veryman ought to getmarried. 17. Al l men ought to work. 18. Theyought to work every day except Sundays. 19. I bel ieve every

thing (5212, 5) he says (dice) . 20- 21 . A train leaves every hour

(every N o hours) . 22 . A l ittle (poquotlo) boy askedme for a l ittlemoney . 23 . I gave hima few (unos pocos) cents. 24. He l ikes us

both. 25. He doesn'

t l ike either one of us (No nos quiere ai a

uno ni a otro) . 26—27. Did you buy another (the other) house?

28. They receivedmany other (otras muchas) inv itations. 29. She

told himso hersel f . 30. M r . Hidalgo arrived the same day. 3 1 . He

ought not to do such a thing . 32 . 1 never pamed mch a day.

LEfi ON XLVI 207

33. Whatover amount homay oflor mo, l shsl l sccopt it.

amount (st al l ) . 35. Aro thero as many womon as mon hero?3&Thore sronot somsnymen as women.

D. 1 .

June

Do you know that Paul Palaciomarried thodsughter oe . and

in the church of Saint Anne,May 5, at 10o’clock in (do) themorn

ing if l remember rightly. The civil ceremony took plaee tho samoday. As I was il l , I couldn

’t go attend) . I M t cold andhad

to stay in bed several days. Paul’s w ife is pretty, and her friends

say that she is very charming . I hope to have the pleasure of

knowing her soon. I send you herewith the invitation that theHidalgos were good enough to (tuvieron la bondad do) send (caviar)me. I forgot to te l l you that the lady

’s father

'

18 exceedingly-rich

(riqufsimo) .When did you hear from Ferdinand last? He doesn’

t write to

him, but he didn’t answer my lette r. Do you think (dress croor )

he is angry w ith me? I haven’t done anything that could ofiend

him, so far as I know (que yo sopa) . Can you tel l me what is thematter with him (lo que tiene)?I have [got] to send this letter to your father

’s house, as I don

’t

know your address. Pardon the delay with which I answe r yourletter . Don’

t fail to w r ite me al l the news of Guanajuato. Nothinghas happened here (Aqul no hay novedad) , except Paul

’

smarriage(ls beds ) .

Behaveme ever your cordial friend (véase A.

Charles.

2 . E scribasc, siguiendo cl modelo do A. 2 . M r. and Mrs. HenryHidalgo y Bazan have the honor of announcing the approaching

l The lady’

s maiden name was Maria Ortis.


snd thoy heg you to bo kind onough to bo present at tho rel igiou

oeromony which wil l be pcrformed in tho church of SaintAnno thsfifth dsy of nextmonth st w o

’clock in themorning.

Gusdslsjsrs,April , 1918.

a. En las interrogaciones, el adjetivo which, antepuosto al nombrequo modificq so traduco por la palabra qud.

b. En hs u chmacionq lu palabras what o how se traducen por la

21 5. Al gunos pronombres indoterminados y adjetivos pronomlnsl os :

en espafiol .

b. A littlo, denotando cantidad, es un poco do.

c. Cuslquiors (eualosqul ors ), cuando precede al nombro quomodificg puede perder la -s final .

LESSON XLVI I

Cardinal Numerals

l l once

1 2 doce

1 3 tres

1 4 catorce

1 5 quince

1 6 dies y seis ‘

17 dies y sioto

18 diez y ocho .

1 9 dioz y nuove

som e

1 Or dl ociséis. diodsiots, etc.


a . For the apocopation of primoro and tercero, see 5179, l .

is usual ly taken by the cardinals.

E l capitulo cincuenta.

i . tres cuartos ; un quinto (or 1a quinta par-to) ; 96, an decimo

(or In décima parts ) ; etc.

From 11; to i s. fractional numerals are commonly formed by add

ing - avo to the cardinal after dropping a final vowel , except the —e of- siete and - nueve : f r, un onzavo ; 1

’s. dos dozavos ; i s, cinco

1 31; is is centésima (parts) ; “lo-c, la milésimaa . H alf (a ha l f, one half, half a) as substantive, is expressed by Is

mitad ; as adjective, by medic —a).

One hal f of my goods.H e worked a hal f day.

x , (mul tipl icado) perdividido por

-h ) 1 8°n (iris-l es t )

5 - 3 - 2, cincomenos tres son (o es igual a) dos.3 x 3 9, tres (mul tipl icado) pot tres son nuevo.

9 : 3 - 3, nueve dividido por tres son tres.

221 . Study the inflection of venir hacer

and querer

‘Ono may also say una torcora parto, dos quintas partss, nna m116sima

L ESSON XLVI I 2 1 1

alrededor do, around, aboutcéntima centimew rcpra, purchase

ch'

eo ,-a, smal l, l i ttl e

de‘ do, since, from

div iéir, to di vide

el dblar,dol lar (of U . S. A.)

estadounidonse,‘ of the United

gordo,- a, stout, fat

hispanoamericano, —a, Span variar to vary

da una vuel ta, it makes a turn, revol ves; el sol sal e, the sun rises;

o1 sol so pone, the sun sets; por todo, al together ; as cdmo so vende?

how is it sol d? what is it sold at? hace sol (Inna), the sun (moon) is

A . 1 . E1 afio es el espacio de tiempo en que la tierra da

una vuel ta compl eta al rededor del 801. 2 . E l she so div ideen 4 estaciones, en 1 2 meses, en 52 semanas, y en 365 dies.

3. E l mes tiene poco mas de 4 semanas. 4. La semana es

el especie de 7 dfas, de los cual es el primero es el lunes y elul timo el domingo. 5. E l dfa se div ide en 24 horas; la hora

se div ide en 60minutes ; y el minute as div ide en 60 segun

dos. 6. E n el v erano el sol sal e temprano y se pone tarde .

7. En el inv ierno sale tarde y se pone temprano.

B . 1 . La unidad monetaria de E spafia es la peseta, que

val e poco menos de 20 centavos norteamericanos (estadounidenses) . 2 . La peseta se div ide en 100 céntimos. 3. La

moneda de plata de 5 pesetas se l lama popularmente“duro”;

E stadounidonso (or estadunidonso) is a new word that has not metwith general acceptance . I n Spain and in South America the Americans ofthe United States are usual ly cal l ed nortoamorlcanos or yanquis.

el mercado,marketla monodq coin

multipl icar, tomul tiplycl niguel , nicke l (meta l )la onza, ouncela plats, silver

el real ,” (in Spain) nickel

(in M exico, etc.) shil l ingor bit

I ,

la tierra, earth, land


25 céntimos son uh“real .

”4. A veces la moneda de cobre

de 10 céntimos se l lama v ulgarmente perra gorda (o

perre y la de 5 céntimos “perra chica” (o“perre

chico

5. E l peso es la unidad monetaria de la Argentina, Chil e,Cuba

,México y al gunos otros paises hispanoamericanos.

6.-E l peso se divide en 100 centavos. 7. E l valor del peso

varfa desde 40 centavos norteamericanos (estadounidenses)hasta 50 centavos . 8. E n Mex ico la moneda de 25 cen

tavos se l lama también popularmente“dos real es.

”

C. Cordéstese. 1 . aQué es el aho? 2 . 1,E u cuantas esta

ciones se div ide el afio? 3 . gCuales son? 4. {E n cuantos

meses se div ide el afio? 5 . aCuales son? 6—7. LE n

cuantas semanas (gE n cuantos dias) se div ide el ano?

8. gCuantas semanas tiene el mes? 9. {Que es la semana?10— 1 1 . gCual es e l primer (el ul timo) dia de la semana?1 2 . zCuales son los dias de la semana? 13. $1311 cuantas

horas se div ide el dia? 14. gE n cuantos minutes so div idela hora? 1 5. 1,E n cuantos segundos se div ide el minute?1 6—1 7. {Sal e el sol y se pone tarde o temprano en cl

v erano (en el inv ierno)? 18— 19. gCual es la unidadmonetaria de E spafia (de México)? 20- 21 . gE n qué so

div ide 1a peseta (el peso)? 22—26. gCémo se l lama también la moneda do plata de 5 pesetas ; (la moneda dc cobrede 10céntimos ; lamoneda de cobre de 5 céntimos ; lamonedade plata de 25 centavos)? 27—28. gCual es el valor en

centavos norteamericanos (estadounidenses) do In peseta

espahola?

D. Contéstese. 1 . LCual es la suma (sum) dc y2 . Si de quito queda? 3 . Si

l Because the image of a l ion on the coin is humorously assumed to

resembl e a dog .

I n those prob l ems read 8 as peso or pesos.” I n some countries

the S is sometimes pl aced after the number : thus, 1 58 1 5 pesos.


June, July, August, September, October, November, December.7. Some months are longer than the others (los domss) . 8. For

instance (Per e jemplo) , January has thirty-one days while (ontanto que) February, as a rule, has only (no tiene mi s que) twentyeight days. 9. February has only four weeks, while January hasnearly four weeks and a hal f . 10. The days of the week are Mon

1 1 . I n Spdn and in the Spanish-American countries Monday is

the first day of the week and Sunday is the last day. 1 2. Sundayis the day of rest, and the others are work days days of work) .13. An (Ls ) hour is divided into sixty minutes, and 8. (e l ) minuteis divided into sixty seconds.

G. 1 . Tu : monetaryunit of Spain is different from(diferente do)that a . the Spanish-American countries. 2 . For in

stance, in Argontian and 11 1 Mexico, themonetary unit 18 the dol lar,which 18 divided into one hundred cents, while in Spain it is the

poseta,which is divided into one hundred centimes. 3. The Spanish

sil ver duro has approximately the same weight as (quo) theMexican dol lar . 4. A Spanish

“r eal ,

”as a rul e, is worth less

than a Mexican real ,” because the Mexican

“r eal” is of sil ver.

5. I n Spain there are copper coins of one centime, and of five

and ten centimes. 6. I n Spanish America the smal lest coin, as

a rule, is that of one cent.

21 7. Numeral es cardinal es :

a . Para el apocope de uno y ciento, véase cl 5179. Obsérvese cl

b. Para la supresién de un ante las palabras

.

cien(to) y mil , véase

c. Mi l l da es nombre mascul ino: su plural es mil lones. R equiere

d. En numeros compuestos, y se coloca ante el ul timo numeral ,eon tal que el mimero que l e preceda sea menor de ciento.

e. E n espaflol sélo se cuenta per cientos haste.W ; de en

adelante se emflea mil .

LESSON XLVI I I 21 5

a. Para cl apocopo de primoro y tercoro, véase cl $179, 1 .

b. En espafiol se hace poco uso de los ordinal es despuéa de décuno.

En su lugar se usan los cardinales .

21 9. Ndmoros quebrados : — Desde hasta se formanlos niimeros quebrados afiadiendo —avo al m’

imero cardinal despuésde supr imir la vocal final excepto la - o de - sioto y

- nuovo.

a. H alf (c hal f, one hal f, half a) eomo substantive se traduce por

la mitad ; como adjetivo, por modio —a).

220. Signos aritméticos :

LE SSON XLVI I I

ADVE RBS

222 . 1 . Aqu l , set ,here, hither ; ahl , there (near the personaddressed) ; al l f, al l l , there, thither (more remote) .Aqu l and al l f denot e a more specific and l imited place

than do seaand silt .

Von sci .

Ven aqul . Come right here.

2. M acho,much, a great deal ; muy, very.

Ha ostudiadomueho.deal ) .

She is very il l .

b. Very, when standing alone, is muche, as muy can never stand

alone : dos interosante e1 l ibro? — sf,muche ; i . the book interesting ?


3. Both st if , and yes, may be used as intensive

adverbs.

381 no lo crool

jsi par-l id estamahana l Why, be left this morning !

Ahora sl lo creo. Now I do bel iev e it.

Esc al quo os hueno. That is indeed good.

4. Ya, al ready, now, in time, indeed; ya no, no longer,

Now we understand.

H e wil l return in due time .

We lo cree l I shoul d say so l

Ya no tengo dinero. I have no more money.

5.—mente . I n Spanish, adverbs may be formed from

many des criptive adjectives by adding - mente to the feminine singular oi the adjective, as correctamente (fromcorrecto) , correctly, fscilmente (from facil ) , easi ly, etc.

a . When several adverbs in -mente modify the same word, —mentois omitted from al l but the last: habl o Vd. clara y distintamente,speak clearly and distinctly.

223. Agreement of Subject and Verb. A verb agrees

w ith its subject in number and person.

Yo soy, I am; tfiores,you are; Vd. y Juan son,you and John are . etc.

a . When subjects are of diff erent persons the v erb is in the first

person plural if any of the subjects is of the first person; and it is inthe second person plural if the subjects are of the second and third

You and I are .

H e and I are .

224. Study the inflection of dar val er

sal ir and vet


7. La unidad de peso del sistema métrico decimal es el

gramo, que es igual ai peso de un centimetro cdbico de agua

madamente a 1 5 granos ing leses. 9. En cl comercio la

pesa mas usual es el “kilo" o kilogramo, que tiene mil

gramos, y equival e a pocomds de dos l ibras inglesas.

‘

B . 1 . gCual es el tamano de este cuarto? 2.- El sue lo

es un cuadrado de 5 metros de lado. 3.— E s decir, 1 1a

superficie del suelo asciende a 25metros cuadrados? 4. Si,senor . 1,Y cual es la al tura de las paredes? 5.

— Tienen

3 metros de al tura. E l wcho, por supuesto, tiene la misma

6. jTiene Vd. una caja grands en que quepan todos misl ibros? Tengo unos 100 l ibros,pocomas omenos. 7. Aquitengo una. E l tamafio de esta caja es de un metro de largo,75 centimetros de ancho y 50 centimetros de hondo. gCree

Vd. que sea bastante grande? 8.— No, senor ; necesito

una caja dos vecesmas grande que ésa. 9. No tengo otra

mas grande. Los l ibros de Vd. deben de ser muy grandes.

10. Ya lo creo. La mayor parte de los vol timenes son

0 . Contéstese. 1 . gQuésistema de pesas ymedid ishanadoptado E spana y los pul ses hispanoamericanos? 2—4. gCual es

la unidad de longitud (de capacidad para l iquidos, de pes o)en el sistema métrico decimal ? 5. gCual es mas largo, elmetro o la. vara ingl esa? 6. q antas pulgadas inglesastiene un metro? 7. {Quemedida se emplea para medir las

grandee distancias? 8. gCual es mas largo, el kilometroo la mil la inglesa? 9. gA qué fraccion (fraction) de mil la

l Severnl ol d names of weights andmeasures are stil l occnsional ly heard

in Spanish-spealring _

countries, v im: l ognn. league (about 3 miles, or 5 ki lometers) ; mil la, mi l e; vara. yard (32 inches) : pic, f oot; pul gada, inchtonelada, (on ; quintnl . hundredwmaht; mobs. 85 pounds; l ibrn. pound; etc.

See debo: do in General Vocabulary .

LWON XLVI I I 2 19

equivale sl kilometro? 10. gQué medida se emplea paramedir los terrenos? 1 1 . LA cuantos “

acres”equivale la

hectares? 1 2 . q al es sl volumen de un l itre? 13. LA que

medida inglesa es aproximadamente igual ? 14. En Espafia

i se miden 0 se pesan los aridos? 1 5. E l peso del gramo

qué volumen de agua destilada es igual ? 16. gA cuantos

granos ingleses equival e aproximadamente el gramo?17. 1,Cual es la pesa mas usual de que se sirven en el

comercio? 18. gA cuantas l ibras inglesas es aproxima

comodo, completo, cordial , débil , fuerte, igual , real , tr iste.

E . 1 - 3 . What is the length (width, depth) of this box? 4—6. I t

is one meter long (w ide, deep) . 7- 9. What is the length (width,height) of this room? 10—12 . I t is 3 meters long (wide, high) .1 3. What is the thickness of this woolen goods? 14. I t is one

centimeter thick. 1 5. What is the thickness of this board (table )?16. I t is 3 centimeters thick. 17. What is the distance fromHavana to Santiago de Cuba? 1 8. I t is (K ey) about kilo

meters. 19. How far is it from N ew York to Cadiz? 20. I t is

about kilometers. 2 1 . H ow far is it from Boston to SanFrancisco m a straight l ine (en i laca recto)? 22 . I t is about

kilometers. 23 . H ow far is it fromPhiladelphia to Chicago?24. 1 L is about kilometers. 25. I f the fl oor of a room is fourmeters square, how many squaremeters are there? 26. Contestese

a la pregunta anterior .

F . 1 . He is nothere . 2 . Come he: e. 3. Come right-here (aquf) .4. She is not there. 5. There (Al l i ) in Havana it is warmer thanhere (act) . 6. I s she very il l ? 7. Yes; very. 8. Why, I saw herthis morning ! 9. I ndeed I don’t bel ieve it. 10. I also have seen

her to-day. 1 1 . Now I do bel ieve it. 1 2 . I don’t (Yo sf que no) .

13. Have you already finished? 14. I have al ready finished.

1 5. When wil l he return? 16. I t w il l not be long before he returns.

17. He wil l return in due time. 18. I should say so l 19. Now we


understand each other. 20. Wil l you lendme a dol lar? 21 . I can’t;

I hsven’t any more money. 22 . John and l study a great deal .

23 . You and John do not studymuch.

0 . I . Has Mr . Moral es a plantation in Cuba? 2 .— I should

say sol He bought five hundred hectares of fertile land (terrenos)for which (los cual es) he paid only fifty dol lars gold a hectare.

He intends to grow tobacco (sembu r tabu o) . 8.— How many

acres are five hundred hectares equal to (disuse : To how manyacres, 4. You have only to (No tiene Vd. que hacer mi s

que) mul tiply the number of hectares by two and a hal f and you

w il l have the number of acres. Do you understand (it)? 5. Ididn’

t understand (it) , but now I do (ahora st to entiendo) . 6. I t

is easy, if one (uno) knows (subs) the rule! 7. Do they use the

metric system in Cuba? 8.— Yes, sir ; they use it in al l the

Spanish-American countries. 9. What is the size (tameflo) ofMr .Morales

’

s house? I t is twenty-fivemeters long by tenmeterswide. 10.

— What is the height? 1 1 .— There are only two

stories, but the ceil ings of the rooms are high. 1 2. I t is-probablyabout (5122) eight meters high and it has a flat roof . 1 3.

— How

far is it fromhis plantation to Havana? 14. I t is about (E s cocade) one hundred kilometers in a straight l ine . 15. How manymiles are one hundred kilometers equal to? - 16. About sixty.

To reduce (Par s reducir) the kilometers tomiles, we mul tiply thenumber of kil ometers by six and strike off (quitamos) the last digit

(dfgito) of the product. 1 7. The resul t is not exact (en cto),but it does pretty wel l (sirve bastante bien) . 18. I n Cuba are

l iquids bought and sold by l iters? Yes, sir . 19. I s wheat soldby bushels (fanegas) or by kilograms? By kilograms . 20. I n

the weste rn (occl dental es) states of the United States that formed

part of Mexico before 1848 al l grains are sold stil l by (the) weight,

222. Adverbios. 1 . Aquf, act ; chi ; al l f, sil l .

Aqe f y al l ! senal an un lugar mas determinado y circunscrito queel que sefialan act 0 sl it.


o. Por also means Mrowh, by,

El ladren antro por la n n

b. Before an infinitive, to, meaning for the sake qffi n w chanas jor,

fi ghting to enter .

Lo hizo para engaflarma. He did it to dcceiveme .

226. Conjunctions. 1 . Y, or e be fore initial i or hi

(not before hie and. O, or u before initial 0 or no or .

Padre ymadre, father andmother . Padre e hijo, father and son.

Cinco o seis, five or six . Sl ate u ocho, seven or eight.

But, hel eahoa y hiedra, ferns and ivy.

2 . Pero,mas, sine, but. P ero andmas are synonyms, but

pero is the more common. Sino is used h er a negative

statement that is ofi'

set by an affirmative statement.

21 lo dice,pero (omas) yo no H e says so, but I do not bel ieve

lo cree. i t.

No voy a Caracas sine a Be 1 am not going to Caracas, but

to Bogota.

3. Donde (interrogatively, d6nde) , where, is often mademore expl icit by prefix ing a, ea, or de.

La casa en donde vive. The house in which he l ives.

Where are you going?gDe deride viene a ? Where does he come from?

227. Word Order . 1 . When a v erb precedes both its

subject and a noun object or predicate adjective, the sub

per .

The thief entered through the

H e caught me by the hand.

They pay me five theusand dol

lan a year (per ycar) .

LESSON XL IX 223

jeet is placed before the object or predicate adjective if thesubject be the shorter, but if it be longer it follows.

gComwd la eaaa au aanor Did your father buy the house?

padre?

gcompre an padra todas eataa Did your father buy al l these

caaaa? houses?

gl a ueil la M cidn de caate Is the Spanish lesson ensy?

l lano?

gEa la leccidn fdcil oM idi ? Is the lesson easy or difficul t?

2. I n a subordinate clause, the subject often fol lows theverb if there be no noun object.

Eaperaremeahaata que l l egue We shal l wait until the train

el tren.

228. Study the infl ection of a ir caer

and ofr

abonar, to credit

acuaar, to acknow ledge

apartado (do correos) , post

ofl ie cbox

arrejar , to thmw , cast

cantar, song , poemconfermidad, approvalcheque, check, draft

detal lar, to itemizeespera, expectation la remesa, remittanceextracto, summary, statement respecto do, w ith regard tofactura, bil l retirar, to retire, take out

en rdstica, in paper covers, unbound; Muy senores mfos, DearSirs; sfrvase Vd., please ; arroja un sal do a mi favor , there is (shown)a balance in my favor

EXER CISE S

e l imports, amountla l ibrer ia, bookstore

manifestar (ie ), to advise (of),inform (of)

la orden, order

particular, especial , private

pr6ximo pasado, last (month)el recibe , receipt, reception


L ibrerfa General de L uis Contreras 1

Correos : Apartado 55 Tel éfono 1695Madrid, 10de Junie de 1917.

Muy senor mfo

Contesto a su grata (carta) de fecha 20 de mayo ppdo.

pr6x imo pw ado) para manifestarle que el precio de la

obra de RodriguezMarin,Quijote,publ icado en laColecci6n de“Clasices castel lanos,

”es de 3 ptas. en rustica cada tome,

R especto de la edici6n critica del mismo autor, estan ya

publ icados 5 tomes y el que fal ta, para completar les 6 de

que se compondré dicha obra, se publ icara dentro de este

ano.

Vd. atento y seguro servidor,Q. E . S. M .

Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vds. recibe de su apreciablecarta de fecha 10 del actual , a la cual me apresuro a con

testar . Sfrvanse Vds. env iarme per corree las obras quesiguen, todas encuadernadas :

Poemof The Cid, edici6n de Archer M . Huntington.

Cantor de Mto Cid, edici6n de Ram6n M enéndez Fidai.

Don Quijote, edici6n crftica de Rodriguez Marin .

De Vds. atento y seguro serv idor,

Thismay be free ly translated Lewis Contreras. Publ isher and Booksel l er .

publ isher is un editor ; an editor of a review or newspaper is un redactor .

0When tel ephoning - this is general ly read either mil seiacientoa noventa

y cinco or dl az y esta nueve cinco.

0 For the distinction betw ee n vol umen and ton e see vol ume in the E ng

226

se dice : PM sendme bymail f 14. I have creditcdfivemdasto your account. 1 5. 1 0horge fioe pesetas to your account.

16. 1,06mo se dice : Dear Si r,Dear Sirs,Dear Madam, etc.

(etcétera)? 17. {Demo se dice : Yours trul y,Sincerely yours,

his son. 3. I have a letter for you. 4. I t was written by Mr . Gon

sales. 5. I w il l give you (Le doy a .) my watch for your ln'

cycle.

merrow I leave for Santiago de Chile . 9. I am going for (per)six months. 10. I shal l go by steamer . 1 1 . H e entered throughthe door. 12 . He caught me by the arm (brazo) . 1 3. I fought

(Yo pe l ee) for my (la) l ife . 14. H e went out through the window .

15. They earn eight per cent. 16. They pay him three dol larsa day. 17. Mother and daughter, father and son, al l were in.

18. The father andhis sondied. 19. There are nine or ten volumes.

20. There are ten or eleven. 21 . Was it (mi-a) [a] woman or [a]

(Octavio)? 24. He is not a Spaniard but a Frenchman. 25. But

he has studied the.Spanish and E nglish languages. 26. He is not

going to Buenos Aires but to Montevideo. 27 H e tal ks of nothingbut (of) Montev ideo. 28. Where do they l ive? 29. The house in

which they l ive is near the post office . 30. Where do they come

34. Is the book inte resting? 35. I s the Spanish exercise difficult?36. I s the exercise easy or difficul t? 37. DidJehn sel l al l hishorses?

38. Did your brother buy a horse? 39. DidMary write an inter

esting lette r? 40. DidMary’s sister write a letter?

I have pleasure in acknow ledging the receipt of your kind letterof the l oth inst .

,in which you advise me that the critical edition

of the complete works of Calderon de la Bares costs ten pesetas

LESSON XL IX 227

bound. Please sendme by mail this edition, beund, and alse the

Lope de Vega, SelectedWorksTirso de Mol ina, Complete Works

Please sendme with the bil l a (el ) statement of my account, andI shal l sendyou acheck to balance (aal dar ) it.

2. Dear Sir

I have pleasure in sending you herew ith a (el ) statement ofyour account brought-up-te (cerrada) June 30, 1919.

1918.

(Haber)

July l st (Jul io BalanceDec. (Dbre.) 5 My bil l

1919.

March 24June 30.

As you wil l observe, there is a balance in my favor of

pesetas which I charge to you on a new account, begging you toadvise me if you do not find it correct (exacto) .

Very sincerely yours,

225. La prepoaicionea per y para. For puede traducirsemediante per 0 para. Si la voz inglesa for significa jor the sake of ,on acceunt of o in exchange for, se traduce mediante per ; si significa

preposito o destino, se traduce per para.

a. For también significa through, by, per .

b. Delante de un infinitive , la preposicién ing lesa to se express an

espanol mediante por euando significa for the sake ef o in mhange


228. Conjuncionea — l . Y, e ante i 0 hi iniciales (y, y no

0, 86 use ante hia o, u ante o— u ho— iniciales

2 . Pero, mas, sine, significan but. Pero y mas son sinonimes;so use pero con mas frecuencia . Sine se usa después de una ex

3. Donde (en forma interrogativa donde) se hace amenudomasexpl icitamediante las preposiciones antepuestas a, en y de.

227. Orden de las palabran— l . Cuando el verbo precede al

sujeto, y también al substantive cemplementario 0 al adjetivo predicado (atributo) , el sujeto precede a cualquiera de estas dos con tal

que seames certo, pero ls sigue si esmas large .

2. E n cl ausul as subordinadas cl sujeto sigue muchas veces al

LE SSON L

229. There are many augmentative and diminutive suf

fixes in Spanish, which occur commonly in col loquial lan

guage . The foreigner shoul d use them w ith the greatest

caution. I t is general ly safe to use - i to —cito,—ecite) , but

it is best to avoid the other suffixes until one has becomefamil iar w ith their use . The suffixes are attached to thestemof a word after it has dropped a final unstressed vowel .A few of the more common suffixes are given below .

230. Augmentative Sufi xes. —6n —ona) and - azo - a)denote largeness, with or w ithout grotesqueness. F emininenouns usual ly become mascul ine upon adding the suffix- 6n, unl ess sex is indicated.

Aquel la mujeraza/ es su her That large woman is his sister .

Trfigame Vd. un cucharon. Bring me a large spoon.

230

232. Study the infl ection of decir traer

and conducir

la firma, signature

los lmprm q pr lntedmatterla l etra de cambio, bil l of

asegurar, to assure, insure

“W o w w l lect (a bil l ), cash la madera,wood(GM )

01 904160, order (a! roads)el plazo, time l imit01 weapecto, announcementreducido, low (price)

la expedicién. sending. shipping

hacer el ective, to cash (a check) ; pardons Vd.,pmdenme ; a vuel ta

A . 1 . Voy al Primer Banco N acional a sacar $50 (acobrar un cheque de 2 . gConoee Vd. al banquero?3 .

— No, senor ; pero conozco al cajero. 4. Sfrvase Vd.

hacerme efectivo este cheque . 5. Se le olv idé a Vd.

endosar el cheque . 6.—Perdone Vd. 7.

— E scriba Vd. :

“Peguese a la orden del Primer Banco Nacional ,” y ponga

su firma aquf. 8. E sta bien. Ya lo firmé. 9. aQuiereVd. bil l etes de banco u ore? 10. Prefiero los bil letes debanco. 1 1 . Ahf los tiene Vd. M uchas gracias.

B. 1 . Muy senor mfo

Deseo tenga Vd. la bondad de remitirme a vuel ta de

corree cl P rospecto y otros impresos de esa universidad .

2 . Muy senor mfo

Adjunto le remito a Vd. en giro postal importe deun afio de subscripcién a L a E sj

'

era, que ls ruegome envie aesta direccion.

Créame de Vd. atento seguro servidor .

LE SSON L 231

Per mes,

Sirvanse Vds. remitirme su catalogo y l ista de precios.Espero que me concedan los preci os mas reducidos.

Bande les las gracias anticipadas, soy de Vds. S. S.

Tengo el gusto de remitir a Vd. per este misme corree

Le concedemos a Vd. un descuento del 5% (pe r ciento)en ew e de page al contado, o uh descuento del 3% si el

page as el ectric. a 30 dies desde la expedicion del envfo. Si

Vd. exige uh plazo de 3 meses, no podemos otorgar ning lindescuento de los precios corrientes.

Podemos asegurar a Vd. que haremos cuanto sea posible

para servir sus pedidos a su entera satisfaccion. E l importede el los puede ser env iado en l etra de cambio, cheque o giro

postal .

En espera de sus grates ordenes, quede de Vd. atto.

y a. 8. q. e . s. m.,l

Juan Rodriguez.

Tengo cl gusto de acusar a Vds. recibe de eu apreciable

carta y el catalogo de su casa .

Sirvanse Vds. enviarme los artfculos detal lados en la l ista

que les remito adjunta. Al recibe de su factura l es remitiremos el importe en cheque sobre Nueva York. R ogamos

Seme businemhouses prefer the nnal l l etters here to capitala.

232 FI RST SPANISH COUR SE

los en cajas de madcra.

Se reitera de Vds. atento y seguro servidor .

C. Contéstcee. 1 . 1,Ad6nde fuéVd. a sacar dinero (a cobrarun cheque)? 2. zConocfa Vd. al banquero? 3. gQué ledijoVd. al cajero? 4. (Q uese l e ol v id6a Vd. hacer? 5. gQuéls dijo aVd. el cajero que escribiera? 6. gTuvoVd. que firmarel cheque? 7. gPrefir ib Vd. los bil letes de banco al ore?

Para las reepuestos a las siguientes preguntas véase B. 4, supo

niende que am acaw u escri bioa venom . 8. gQuélo remiti6 a Vd. per corree cl senor Rodriguez? 9. LDe qué

material es dijo que esti n hechos los artfculos? 1 0—1 2. aQuédescuento ls concede a Vd. en case de page al contado? (siel page se efecttia a 30dies desde la expedicion del env io? si

Vd. ex ige un plazo de 3meses?) 1 3. gQué ls aseguré a Vd.?

14. gComo puede remitirse el importe de los pedidos?1 5. gCémo se subscribi6 el senor Rodriguez?

D. L ee palabras en letra bastardi l la deben traducirse per diminatives e aumentotices. Johnny was crying . 2 . H is motherspoke to him. 3. L ittle-son, what 18 the matter w ith you? (au

4. Alas ! (jAyl ) dear-l ittle-mother, he answered. 5. Last

week the l ittle—bird - ito) died. 6. Now the kitten is dead. 7. And

the l ittle-chi ld kept on crying (siguio l lorando) . 8. My l ittle-sister’s

name is Mary (M ar iquita) . 9. She has a l ittle-house. 10 I n the

l ittle-house there are l ittle-chairs and a l ittle-table . 1 1 . I n a l ittle

cage there are several tiny-birds- il l os) . 1 2. A dol l ie l ives in the

l ittl e-house. 13. I n a l ittle-garden there are many tiny s.

14. Very-near the l ittle-house there is a yard. 1 5. In the yard thereare a l ittle-horse, a l ittle-dog, and some tiny-hens . 16. I n this yard

a teaspoon would seem a large-spoon. 17. Any (Cual qui er) manwould seem a big-man. 18. Any (Cual quiera) woman would seem

E . 1 . I must go to the bank and (a) draw some money. 2. I

spentmy last dol lar thismorning. 3. Do you know the cashier?

234

Ioa aufijoa ae afiaden al radieal de h palabra dmpnb de hahu

smo anmantatlm : -6n (-ona) y - aao - a) aumentanaimplemente la idea del pesitivo, oen o sin idea de menstruosidad.

mfijo -msalve el easo de indiearse el sexe.

231 . Sal joa dlmlnntlvoa : - l to,- il le y - aalo expreasn idea de

de earinoo eonmiseraeion; -mo, indifereneia omenosprecie ; -nato,menospreeio o burla.

veces demas de una sflaba que terminan en -n o - r.

conmonosilabos, con pal abrsa que terminan en -e, y con aquel las que

tienen el diptongo radical io o ne.

c. Todos los diminutives se usan principalmente con nembrea; perotambién ae usan con adjetives, participioa y adverbioa, para expru ar


mend-oJ l eam nprend-er. to leam

In regular verbs this stem is the basis of al l forms except

2 . I n the case of radical -changing and irregular verbs thestemof the third singular (or plural ) of the preterite indicative is the same as that of the two imperfect (or past) sub

junctives and of the future (or hypothetical ) subjunctive :

Pedir, to ask : pld-to (pid- ieron), he asked (they asked) ; impf. ruin“

,

pl d-teee, etc., pid-iere, etc.; fut. mini , pie-tore, do.

Sober, to know : sup-o (eup-l eron), he knew (they knew ) ; imfl .

237. The R egul ar Verb. There are three regular conju

gations in Spanish characterized by the vowels of their

for the second, and — ir for the third. But, as a matter offact, the endings of the second and third conjugations are

the same except in four out of their numerous forms, that is,

and in the second person plural of the

I NFIN ITIVE MOOD

hnbl-er, to speak aprend-er , to learn v iv-ir, to live

Present (Gerund) Present (Gerund)

THE VE R B 237

l epeak, do epeak, am I learn, do leam, am I live, do lt°

0e,m

habl-o spread-o

habl -e spread-e

Imperfect Imperfect

I spoke,was speaking,ueed to epeak; etc. used to leam; ete. enab l ing “

aprend- fe

amend-feeaprend- fn

aprend- fen

I apoke, did epeak; I l ieed, did l ive,'

etc.

habl-6 Viv -f

al eo in the eonditionnl of al l three eonjugntions the accent remeinl on thecame vowel throughout al l the forms and is always written.

[ M enuh in

I ehould epeak

hablar -fa

hablar- fee

hablar-ia

hablar-fame.

PL 2 habl-ed

(letme) speak; etc.

I M Iearm’ dc.

I rhmdd leam,

‘

dc.

aprender-(e

aprender- la

aprender-(n

aprender-fan

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

(letme) learn; etc.

I ehal l lr’

ce; dc.

I ehould liee; dc.

vivir-fen

Viv-id

Present

(that I may) l ive,(letme) li ve; do.

Viv-l ie

I haee epoken; elc. I had epoken; etc.

he hablado

has hablado; r.‘c. hubiste hablndo; etc.

I had epolcen; elc. I shaU haoe epoIren; etc.habia hablado; ele. habré hablado; etc.

I dimdd have epoken; dc.

habria habladonuc

SUBJUNCTIVE

(That I may) have I should have spoken;spoken; etc.

hubiera habladc; etc.

thetical ) Perfect

(That I might) haoe I (may or ehal l ) haaespoken; dc. epoken,

’

etc.

a. moode end teneee give ( l ) the E n¢ l ieh nemee(fi the Spenhh nnmeeJ o whieh preferenoe ie g iven ln thh book. end (3) the nnmeeg in n in the Gmmdtiea de la lenoua cadel Iam (Mndrid. 1913) publiehed by the R oyel

Par r-rem.

THE VERB 241

(dombiuntlvo)

(do subjuntivo)

future

M Nem rddm wmerdty of Chioeco M l fl l 3) . whieh difler from tha e to

whieh peduenee h given in thh book ere : M M deecripfl ve ; haul . ”M s t pefl fuM ez habh hM M pu fect; hube Mada m ”

238. Compound Progressive Tenses. The present par

Certain verbs of motion or rest such as ir , to go, quednr,to remain,may appear instead of enter in this comtruction.


239. Changes in swung — l e is a regular tendency of

consonantal sound at the end of the stem (found ordinarily

ing of the endof the stemis necessitated. This is so not onlyfor regular verbs but for many others also.

1 . Verbs in —c-er change c to qu to keep the k sound

(“hard” c sound) :

Buecer, to seek

l et Sing .

2 . Verbs in -

g-sr add to the g an unpronounced u to

keep the“hard” g

'

sound:

M 0 10 Pay

l at Sing .

3. Verbs ia —gu-sr take a diaeresis over the u to show

Au rigasr , lo ascertain

4. Verbs in — z-sr change 2 to c, w ithout involving any

Cum , lo hml

l et Sing .

N . B. I t is to be noted that only seven forms of the verb inflexion


diphthongal endings - l e aud —is- to y, as unaccented t can

Cre-er, to bel ieve ; cre-yendo (for cre-iendo) ; ere-yo (for ere-lo) ;ere-yu an (for cre-ieron) ; cre-yeee (for ore-ices) , etc.; ore-yen

(for cre -iera) , etc.; cre-yere (for ore-iere) , etc.

Cu clu-ir, to conclude; w nclu-yendo; oonclu-yo; conclu-yeran; etc.

2 . The 1 of the endings 4 6 and - is disappears after

al l verb stems ending in n or h and after certain irregular

preterite stems ending in j :

m mboil ; bul lendo; build; bul leron; bul leee; etc. ; do.

Grutl -ir , to grunt; grun-endo; grub-6; grun-eron ; etc. ; etc.

243. Verbs in - isr and —usr. A certain number of verbsm - is.r and - usr (to be l earned by practice) take a written

crie, cries, crie, crfen

etsvisr , to adorn, confisr, to confide, contn rh r, to oppose,m , densher,lo chal lenge, desconflsr , lo distruel , desserlsr , to rave, desvlnr, to divert,

guide, inventnrisr ,

restri sr , lo chil l , tel egrsflsr, to telegraph, vecisr, lo empty, vnrisr, tovary ; scentunr, to accentuate, stenner, to attenuate, conceptusr, to con

ceive, etectusr, to efiectuate, exceptusr, tr ecept,mdunr, to graduate,habitusr, to habituate, insinuer , to perpetunr , to m utate,

puntunr, to punctuate, situsr, to situate, vel u“ g lo appraise.

a . A considerable number of verbs do not take this accent; cf .

can“, to qfll l ial e,mac; sauncier, to announce, snunclo; spremisr, to

THE VERB 245

m enu d o; cen timto ehanmcambio; “m aca w -sate,

etc.

R adical-changing Verbs. Under certain condi

tions some verbs change their radical (root) vowels e to is

or l and o to ue or u. The conditions are such as to make

L I ! tedthe radical vowel e becomes lc

accenthe radical vowel o becomcs uo

the radical vowel c becomes lo11 . "m m

the radical vowe l o becomes uc

the radical vowel e becomes l - lc— or - l 6"W t“tbe radical vowe l o bccomes u of the llexional

I I I . I f accented the radical vowel c becomes lI f unaccented the radical vowe l 0 becomes l before a fol lowing

- e - is-

, or- ld of the flexional ending

jugation verbs. The change of accented e to is and accentedo to us can occur in only nine forms, v iz., al l the singular

subjunctive and the second singular of the imperative; al l

other forms show the original e or c. The endings are reg

ular. These verbs il l ustrate the class

1 . Cerrsr, to close

Imperat.

cerrase, etc. Fut. or H yp. Suty'

. cerrare, etc.

2. M .b mdada |l

Impa ct.

regular as of the second conjugation

3 Contaminated

Impa ct. contsd

I ny . Suki.

N . B. The pnst participle of thie verb and of other verbsm-olmis irregular .

to ah olvefi h udh ; disolver , to diu ol ee, disuelto; resolver, to resolve,

participles; thus mover, to mave; mum , I nm ate ; movldo.


(cf . the mimic verb cemer, to sift, d emo, adquirir, to

Adqul rl r and lnquirl r have l in the

249. Jugar, to play, had original ly an 0 stem (cf . Latin

have u

Pres . I ndie. juego juegas iuega juegan But jugamos jugais

Imperat. juega But

250. Clu e I I . — This includes only verbs of the third conjugation w ith the radical vowel e or 0. As in Class I, the e

becomes is and the 0 becomes ue when accented . Unac

cented, the e becomes 1 and the 0 becomes it before an

immediately fol lowing —a — i e or - ioof the flexional suffix ;

1 . Sentir, to fu !

siente

ma vans 249

l aw. w e . mm,

Fut orsin l

'

Mk .

2 . “ Ja cket,

0

duermen But dormimosPrismsw . duerma dw mss duerma

durm-smos dam -dis duet-manImpa ct.Imfl . I ndie . dormia, etc. (rcg .)

damnistcdormimos du mistcia

Fat. or

a. The only simple o verbs in Class I I arc dormir andmorlr, to die;in the past participle morlr has only tbe irmgular form muerropedect tensu thh if inmnsit ive means died : el bombse b :

hm muu to d bombrq they have kil led the man. But in the perfect

tenses of the refleadve verbmstadomast participle ofmstsr , to kilt'

,must

be used : el bembrc se bs mstsdo, the m n has kil led hims'

el f. Wi ththe verb to be, and equivalent verbs, muerto - s,

- os,- as) natural ly

251 . Class [I L — As in Clam II, so here only third conjugation verbs are concerned, and, furthermore, only thosewith the radical vowel c. This changes in precise ly the samecases as in Class II, except that here the e becomes i bothunder the accent and when unaccented and followed by

As to the stem of the imperfect and fut ure forms of the subjunctiveof radical -chang ing v erb . see 5236, 2 .

250 F IR ST SPANISH COURSE

—s - i e- , or- l o. The original e maintains itsel f hm mtbe

cases in which it persists in Class I I .

Pedl r,to ask

my . taste . pedfs, etc. tu g .)

-ra Imp; Sula“

. pid-iera, etc.

Fat. or

252. Changes in spel l ing of the end of the stem occur

here

Corregir, to correct : Pres. I ndia , 1 st Sing . corrijo

2 . gu (i, e) drops the u before o or s

3. Af ter it,— is and - lolose their 1

Prat. I ndia , 3rd Sing . cia-6, P l .- se Impf . Subj . cia-ese, etc.

Fut. or H yp. Subj . sin-ere, etc.

253. Verbs in - efr are of Class III. In them the i of the

stem ending and that of the — ie and 46 in the fiexional

252 Finer spu rs}: comes

a. The c is dmply cbanged to s inmecerfio roch snd its da ivative

changing verbs of the first clsm. Hence tbe forms msso;mm , etc.

m a rin ate.

vathe ia

the l ike) . I n their present forms (indicative, subjunctive,and imperative) they add y to the u of the stem (buoyo,

All

state d prev iousl y (cf . 5242) an unaccented 1 between vowels

w il l be written y in tbe third person of the preterite indica

tive, in al l the forms of the two imperfects and the future

of

m mflu

buy-as buy-e huimos huis

buy-en

Imperat.

Imp]. I ndie . hula, etc. (may)

retain the diaeresis only before a wr ittm l

«st imumemmmma sbmmm .

m yomrettn h m ru dc.


Participlcs

Impa ct.

h i with a w ly den whp d dztfi ; for thcm e phenome

Sl ur, lo b

Pra w n” eras

sé sed

M I flfi . “ ” i n sea m -m m oer-an


first phual of tbc impmntiq smosfl et us oo wso used ss an inteb

first plural of the present mbjimctive. Vsysmos is restricted to the

occurs only in clsuses that are independent or sppsrcntly so.

end-ea. de (m)

Imperat. M d!» dc (M o)Fat. I udic. andar-é andar-as, etc. (rem)

Put. or

a. This verb is per fectly regular as of the first cenjugation in itsinfinitive, participles, present tenses, and future, conditional , and im

perfect of the indicative . Wi th the stem fl ay- it is of the second

Dar, to give. str ike

Imperat.


Ca rd. I ndic.

pondr-las, etc.

P004".“a (M o)

and the imperfect-s

Participles

Imperat.

hue-los, etc. (reg .)


Cabot,b h M i l

that ssber hss a reduced form sé finstead of sspo) in the present indieative, first singular, where cabss has quspo. The interchange of -

p

and- b- in the present st

ern, the contract infinitive basis for tbcmdic

podr -é podr-as podr- ti podr-emos podr-éis podr-nn


Pres. I ndie. sag-o as-as ss-imos as-en

Al l the other form are perfectly regular as of the thirdconjugation.

Val or, to be worth

Imperat. val or vale

Imnf. I ndia val -la val-tas, etc. (rem)

-se Impf .M . (rem)- ra

gum. Suki. (rep)at. or

H yp Sula.

(res )

274. Sal ir, to go out. come out

Imperat. sal

The other form fol low the model of valor.

Caer, tofa”

The other forms are regular ; they show the change of unaccented 1

between vowels to y, as in cayo,w h en, cayese, etc.

here, as in the case of the two verbs

to the present stemfor the 1st singular

THE VER B 263

oy-en

Impsrat. oy-e

The other forms are regular ; they show the change of unaccented i

between vowels to y, as in oyo, oyeron, oysse, etc.

a. Note the three present stems : oig- before -c and - s ; oy— before

-e ; ard o— before- i.

Trser, to bring

-ra‘

Impf . Subj .

a . Traer and verbs in -ducir have a preterite stemin - j- sfter which

the - i- of a dipbthongal ending is lost.

Conducir, to conduct


Imperat.

oonduj-imosImp]. Suki . conduj-ese

oonduj-ésemos

conduj-éramos

aducir, deducir, inducir, producir, reducir, seducir ; in the present

V-OIDOS v-en

w ro Imp] . Suki. v -iera

a. The ful l stemve- cl the present is reduced to vh before - e,as in

v-er, v-as, etc. ; the preter ite stem is v

The derivatives in - ver ,e .g .,sntever,prover,are coni as above.

Proveer, to provide, has the ful l stemprove throughout and is reg

ular in its conjugation. I t has, however, both provetdo and provisto as

the past participle.

280. I rregul ar Past es. Four verbs of the thirdcubrir, to cover, escribir, to

282. LIST OP VERBS

verbs. The verbs with inceptive endings -csr or - cl r preceded by e

vowel ) are not included: they simply fol low the models giv en in $255.

In the case of derivatives, reference is made to tbe conjugation of the

by (is), (no). or (1) placed after the verb. The numbers refer to para

shnegar (is),to renounce : 240, 2; stel lar (us), to blow with bel lowssforsr (us), to give a charter

abrir, to open : p.p. ir r ., 280

m (“d o to dim s M Wirr ., 245, 4

abstenerse, to abstain : irr ., 258

sbui lolar (us), to make fritter

shaped: cf. abufluelar, reg .

acertar (is), to hit the marksclocsrse (us), to stretch out,

brood : 240, l ; 246, l

scordsr (us), to resol ve, remind,tune ; —se (us), to remember

scostar (us), to lay down; — se amolar (us), to whet(us), to lie down move: (us), to remove, dismiss

screcentsr (is), to increase sndar, to go,wal k : irr ., 262

adestrar (is),to guide : ateo sdies sntedecir, to foretel l : irr ., 267

trar, reg.

adherir (is), to adhere

sdormir (us), tomake drowsysdquirir (is), to acquire : 248, 2

255, a;

sl ebrsrse (is). to squat, cowersl ants: (is), to breathe, encourageal ignsbrsr (is), to break the w ings

almorzar (us), to breakfast : 240,4; 246,

3

d onu t (no). to l ensthen : 240. 2 ;246, 2

antever. to foresee : in ., 279

specsntsr (is), to grazespercol lsr (us),to col lar, snatch

W to seize by the l egs

upb eat. to pl ease : in , 281

L IST OF VERBS

specter spootsr.

to postmove,W.

m to squeeze. pmmobs! (no). to approve

strender (is), to rent, hire

srrepentirse (is), to repent

m ender fie). to ascend

seentsr (is), to seat, set downasentir (is), to assent, acquiesce

sserrsr (is), to saw

eselsr (us), to level to ground,

ssoldsr (ue) . to hiresecular (as), to assonate, be in

assonance

stender (ie), to attend,mindsteneree, to abide, hold : irr, 258

attempt a crime, reg .

sterrsr (is), to fel l : sterrsr, to

stestsr (is), to cram, stufl : ates

tsr, to attest, reg.

strser, to attract : irr .,277;atravesar (is), to cross

atronar (us), to make a thunder

ing din, stun

eventer (is), to fan, w innowavergonzsr (no), to shame : 240,4; 246, 3; 246, 5

szolsr (no), to shape w ith the

bendedr, to bless : in .,267; 242,2

brufiir, to burnish : w , 2

bul l ir, to boil : 242 , 2

267

cloesr (ne), to cluck : 240, l ;

in , 281

comprobsr (us), to verify, con

conducir, to conduct : im, 278

255, a ; 242, 2

confer lr (is), to confer

caer, to fal l : in , 275

eslentsr (ie), to warmcen t

cehir a), to gird: 242, 2 ; 252, 3

corner (lo), to si ft; bud

cerrsr (is), to closecimentsr (ie). to found, establ ish

eocer (no). to boil , bake : 255, a.

“extender” (ie), to be coexten

sive

eelsr (us), to strain. fil ter

col egir (i), to col lect : 241 , 2 ;

252, 1

colgsr (us), to hang up : 240, 2

246 2

comedirse (i), to behavecomenzar (is), to commence : 240,4; 246, 3

competir (l ), to compete

concebir (i ). to conceive

concernir (ie ), to concern : 248, 1 ,footnote 1 ; 281

concert“ (lo), to concert, regu

late

concluir , to concl ude : 256; 242, l

concordsr (us), to accord, agree

268 F I RST SPAN ISH COURSE

conduit, to join: 256m ore (us). tomove, affectoensogulr (l ). to obtain, attain

241 , 4; 252, 2

consentir (l o). to consent

consolsr (us ). to console

eonsonsr (no),to be in consonance,

constrefi r (i ), to compel ,strain : 242, 2 ; 252, 3

contsr (us), to count, tel l

contender (lo), to contend

contorcerso (us), to be distorted,writhe : 241 , 1

267; 242, 2 ; 255, a.

266; 255, a.

irr ., 265

contribuir, to contribute : 256

controvertir (lo), to controvert

convertir (io), to convert

corregir (i ), to correct : 241 , 2 ;

costar (no), to cost

decoct , to decay : in , 275

decanter (ie ), to begin to use

desscertsr (ie) , to blunder, errdesscordsr (us), to make dis

cordant; — ee (no), to forgetdessferrsr (lo), to loosen, unfur ldossl entsr (l o), to put out of

dessmoblsr (no), to unfurnish, re

blsr, reg.

dosspretsr (lo), to slacken, loosen

dessprobsr (us), to disapprove

dessrrendsrse (lo), to shake off

desssentsr (ie), to disagree, dis

please ;— u new set up

decir, to 267;242, 2

deducir, to deduce : in , 278;255, a; 242, 2

defender to defenddeforir (ie ), to deferdegol lsr (no), to behead, cut thethroat : 246, 5

demolor (no), to demol ishdemoetrsr (no), to demonstratedenotar (lo). to deny : 240. 2;246, 2

denostsr (no), to insultdentsr (ie), to tooth, indent; to

W . to depose. depone : in .

derrengar (lo), to sprain the hip,cripple : 240, 2 ; 246, 2

derretir (i ), tome ltdorrocsr (no), to pul l down, d.»

270

du ped : (l ),to dismiss; — so (i ),to take leave

m ach to removo mdeepest" (le), toto awaken

deepens: (lo), to arrange (stones)at intervals, taper at the end :

240, 4; 246, 3

despised . to displ ease : 281

desplegar (lo), to unfold, unfur l

240, 2 ; 246, 2

2 ; 252 , 3

dentu re! (to), to exile

destituir, to depr ive, remove from

destorcor 241 , 1 ;

246, 4

destrocar (no), to return a bar

tered object : 240, l ; 246, 1

dosvontsr (ie), to vent, let out air

dosvergonzarse (no),to be shameless or impudent : 240, 4; 246,3; 246, 5

detract ,to detract : in ,277;242,2

devol ver (no), to give back : p.p.

irr ., 245, 4

diferir (ie), to defer , delay, difl‘

er

at“ to digest

diluir, to dilute : 256

discernir (lo), to discern : 248, 1

F IRST SPAN ISH COURSE

encorn r (lo), to shut up, confine

onclocsr (no), to cluck : 240, l ;

enema: (no),to cover w ith leather,

oncordsr (no), tolash

ming (musicaldisentl r (lo) , to dL sent M atch lash

diaminnir, to dirninish : 256

disonsr (no). to be in dissonancedispel

-tar : see despertar

displacor, to displease : in , 281

disponer, to dispose : irr .,265

diatondor ao) , to distend

divertir (ie),to divert

dolar (no),to plane,smooth (wood.ac.)

dolor (no). to pain. grievew (a. to Sleep

cdncir. to educe, bring out : irr .,

2 78; 255,a ;ol egir (i ) , to e lect : 241 , 2 ; 252, lembestir (i) , to invest, attackemparentar (ie), to be related by

empedn r (lo) , to paveempel l er , to urge, push : 242, 2

ompezar (lo), to begin : 240, 4;246, 3

emporcar (no), to sul ly, befoul

240, l ; 246, 1

encender (lo), to l ight, kindle

oncontsr (lo), to begin to use for

enrovar (ne), to pnt into s cavo

“ cel lar, lock upencnbortar (ie), to cover over

endentar (le ), tomortise inmeow (no). to lay addled ese!246, 5

engrefr (l ), to clate, pul l up : 253

engroesr (no),to fatten,strengthen

enheetsr

enmolar (lo), to honey, sweetenenmendar (ie ), to amend, correctenrodsr (no), to break on the

enesngrentar (lo), to cover with

entonder (lo), to hear,understandenterrsr (ie), to interenter-tar (no), to make crooked;to deprive of one eye

ontrodecl r, to interdict : in ., 267;242, 2 ; 255, a

ontremor lr (no), to pine away :

276

m . or (is), to put the legs inbetween (something else)

a g l impse of : in , 279

envol ver (no), to involve, wrap

up, compl icate : p.p. in n, 245, 4

equivslor, to equal , be equivalent :

orguir (io or i), to erect : 254;241 ,4

errar (ye to err , wander : 247, l

escarmentar (lo), to g ive warning

271

(i ). to expedite . tie-patch

exponor,to expose : in , 265

extender (lo), to extend

extract , to extract : in , 277;

ferrsr (ie), to put on iron points,do.

grnfl ir, :to grunt 242 2

eeoooer (no), to smart : 255, a;

341 . l ; 246. 4escribir, to write : p.p. inn, 280

estorzsr (no), to strengthen; — se

(ne), to atte apt : 240,4;estar, to be : in ., 260

estatuir, to establish : 256

sansgar (ie), to rub, scour, grind240, 2 ; 246, 2

M (i), to bind, restrain

242,2

fol lsr (so), to blow with bel lowstoa st (no) , to force : 240, 4;246, 3

igar (lo), to rub, scour : 240,2 ; 246, 2

frofr (i), to fry : 253

habor, to have : im, 257

hacendsr (io), to transfer property

hacer, to do, make : in , 266;

(thus M ixtures in— iscer )

hedor (ie), to have a stench,

272

helsr (le), to freesem ahwm ,“

harbor (ie), to dress skimherlr (is ), to woundhow ls (ie), to boil , bubbleherrsr cle), to shoe (harm ), brand(wale)

ing :

hol lsr (ne), to trample on, tread

lawnto l lee: 256

cl ino: irr ., 265

a ; 242, 2

inferir (ie), to inferlnfcrnsr (lo), to damn, vexinfluir, to influence : 256

lnqnir l r (lo), to inquire : 248, 2instituir, to institute : 256

lntordocir, to indict : in , 267;242, 2


investlr (l ). to invest, girdis, to go : inn, 261

m (a ).‘0 Puy i 249

obtener , to obtain : irr ., 258

introdnclr, to introduee : inn, 278;’

ol er (hne to smel l , have an

255, a; 242, 2

invemsr (lo), to w interodor : 247, 2

l lovor (no), to rain

mal decir, to curse ; in , 267

malherlr (lo), to wound seriouslymaisonsr (ue ) , tomake cacophony

manifests: (lo), to manifestmantonor, to maintain : in , 258

meses, to rock, lul l,mix : 255, amedir (i ), to measuremolar (lo), to boil to honey, de

posit honey (of base)

mol er (no), to grindmordor (no), to bitemor lr (no), to die : p.p. in , 250, amostrar (no), to show

mover (no), to mov e

negar (ie) , to‘eny : 240, 2 ; 246,2

never (lo), n ow , import .

274

rofrelr, to lry again : 253

reset (lo), to water : 240, 2 ;

246 2

“I”(i ). to rule, direct : 241 , 2 ;252, 1

resold-r (m). to belch, oruot :

246, 5

in n, 266; 255, a

rohonchir (i), to fil l again, restuffrohorir (ie), to wound again

rohorrsr (ie), to shoe (horses)

M t (lo), to reboil

rebol lar (no). to trampl e under

foot

rel r, to laugh: 253

romondsr (ie), to repair, patch

m olar to grind again

remordor (no), to bite repeatedly,

remover (no), to remove, al tertendir (i ),to subdue, render ;

—so

(i), to surrender

ronogsr (ie), to deny, disown

240, 2 ; 246, 2

renovar (no), to renovate , renew

tel l it (i) : to quarrel , scold: 242, 2 ;252, 3

topcam (ie), to think over againfmfir (i ). to repeat, recite“9108“ (is), to refold, double

again : 240, 2 ; 246, 2

F IRST SPANISH COURSE

reqnorlr ae), to investigate, re

in ., 274

rosegsr (ie), to reap again: 2 10,2 ; 246, 2

resembrsr (ie ), to sow again

m m (l o). to begin to give

resolver (no).to resolve : p.p. in ,

245, 4

resel l er (no), to respireresonar (no), to resoundroq nobrar (ie), to crack, spl it,

restregar (lo), to scrub : 240, 2;246, 2

rotemblsr (lo). to shake, tremble

retener , to retain: ire , 258

retenter (ie), to threaten (with a

M (i ). to dye over again

242, 2 ; 252, 3

241 , 1 ; 246, 4

retostar to toast again,scorch

retraer , to retract : in ., 277;242, 2

rotribnir, to make retribution,

retronar (no), to thunder againrotrotraor , to make retroactive

reprobar (no), to re ject, condemn revonirso, to be consumed graduroprodncir, to reproduce : inn, al ly, sour , ferment : in n, 264

278; 255, a; 242, 2 reventsr (ie), to burst

276

suponer, to suppose : in , 265

snsn'sor, to subtract : in , 277;

242 2

M ot , to ring , peal , touch : 242, 2

temblar (is), to trembletender (ie), to stretch

toner ,to have, hold: in ., 258

tentar (lo), to feel, trytonir (l ), to tinge,dye, stain : 242 ,2 ; 252, 3

tercer (no),to twist, bend: 241 , 1 ;246, 4

tostar (no), to toasttraducir, to translate : in n, 278;

255, a; 242 , 2

trsor , to bring : in , 277; 242, 2

transferir (ie), to transfer

transponer : see trasponer

trsscondor (is) , to transcend

trsscolar (no), to fil ter through

trascordarso (no), to forget

trasegar (is), to upset, decant

240, 2 ; 246, 2

traafrogar (ie ), to rub : 240, 2 ;

trssofr, to misunderstand, hear

trssoflar (uo), to dream

FI RST SPANI SH COURSE

trssponor, to transpose, go be

yond;— so, to set (qr m ) :

trsstrocsr (no), to change about,invert order : 240, 1 ; 246, 1

m m to overflow“

trasvolar (no), to fly across or

trsvossr (ia), to cross

tropezar (io), to stumble : 240, 4246, 3

valor, to be wor th : in , 273

ventar (ie),to blowvor, to see : irr ., 279

W (i), to dress, clothe

volcar (no) , to overturn : 240, 1 ;246, 1

volvor (no), to return, some bmkp.p. irr ., 245, 4

yscer, to l ie : in , 281

yuxtaponer, to put in juxtaposition : in , 265

zs (m)bnl l irso, to dive : 242, 2u horlr (is), to reproach, censure

olegir -, to choose to

empeflarsem to insist onompezar s, to begin toencsrgarse de, to undertake toensonar s, to teach toentrar s, to enter on, begiq toontretoner (se ) s or gen , to enter

tain onese lf by or withonviar s, to send toeqnivocarse on, to be mistaken in

osforzar (se) s, on, or per , to attempt, endeavor to

osmorarse en, to take pains inosperar -

, to hope toostsr pars, to be about to -

por ,to be incl ined to

evitar —, to avoid

excnsar (so) do, to excuse (one

exhorur q to exhort tooxponod so) s, to expose (oneself)to

fsstidiar (so) do, to weary, be

fatigar (se) do, to tire, be tired offel icitar (so) do, to congratulate

on

fljsrss on, to pay attention

jactarse do, to boast ofjursr to swear to

justificar (se) do, to justify (one

279

—Pof o

incitsr s, to incite toincl inar a, to induce to ; — se s,to be incl ined to

incomodarae do, to be annoyedat; por, to put onese lf out to

indignam do, to be indignant at

280

mandsr -

, to command, have ;s, to send to

matarse por ,to try hard tomoditar on, to meditate uponma scot -

,to deserve to

moterso s, to undertake tomosclarso en, to take part inm .

’mm a ,m tch

morlrsopm‘

r to be dying to

nocodh r —, to need, want to

negar to deny;— so a, to de

obstinarso on, to persist in

ocupar (se ) on, to busy (onesel f)w ith

odiar to hate to

ofrecer (se) to on‘

er,promise to;— (so) a, to offer to

air to hear

ol vidar to forget to; — (se ) do,to forget

openerse s, to be opposed to

persoversr en, to perseve. e in

persistir en, to persist in

persuadir (se) s, to persuade (one

sel f) to


proposer- Ao propoeemurpoeo to

provocar s, to provoke to

pngnar por, to strive, struggle to

quedar (se) s, to remain to;

to (be

qnejarso de, to complain of

quorer-

, to wish to

rsbiar por , to be crasy to

recourse -

, to fear

reconocer to acknow ledge, con

fess to

recorder to remem'er

re :roar (so) on or gen, to divert

reducir (se) s, to bring (onesel f) torehusar (se ) - or a, to refuse to

rennnciar s, to renounce

resignarse s, to resign onesel f,

resistirso s, to xesist

poder can,may, to be able to Kresolver (so), s to resolve, decide

poner s, to put to;— so s, t0 \ to

roventar por , to be bursting to

wedsrso dofi o boM of

M -

p to pm‘a to

m a n ia ) 3. to mm . m inrcedy to

pru nmir -

, to presmne topretender -

, to claimtry to

M e mbesin tom oo) dad o deprive. be de

GENE RAL VOCABUL ARY

he has (had) just spoken

scabd do hsblar, he finished

with, come with.

scordarse (uo) do, tober ; ai mal no me scnordo,

acostar (no), to lay down, putto bed; — so,to l ie down, go

to bed.

scostmnbrsdo, —s, (a), used

el scrdbata, la —, acrobat.

la sctrlz, actress.

sdjunto, adi sdjnnto adv.,enclosed, herewith.

la sdmirscion, exclamation, ad

miration, wonder ; signo do

sdoptar, to adopt.

sdquerir (lo), to acquire.

advertir (ie ), to note; sdviér

may) .

aficionado,- s (s ), fond (of) .

afmo : see afoctfaimo.

M . to come (to). so (to).hasten to.

acusar, to acknow ledgo.e : acusativo, aocusative.

do, besides, in addition to.

GENERAL VOCABULARY

aguardar, to await, wait for.

01“I f"Wing } brimin doubt , (alcove) bedroom.

40mm (do). to be glad (of)algo, something, anything ;

drum. 4 . some. any; pl .some, any, a few ; alguns

el alms f .,soul .

almorzar (no), to lunch.

M —e hisa tal lfl oud.

anl iege, .- s,analogous,similar

la anana (in Span . Arm, el ananfi0 el ananl s), pineapple.

sndar §262, to go.

283

anteponer §265, to place before .

antepuesto,- s, placed bel ore.

el spartsdo (do cerreos), post

el spol l ido,surname,familyname.

apetecer, to have an appetitefor , long for, want.

el aroma, perfume, aroma.

e]“the, 18 Arab.

el l rbol , tree.

el I res f ..are I OOsguaremeters) .

( rido,—s, arid,dry; los

— s,dryarticles,dry objects (as gramwhich is sold bymeasure) .

GENERAL VOCABULARY

contigo, with thee .

contra, w e inst ;por against

you i n ar account) .contradice - s, contradicted,

contrar io, contrary; al pot

conveniente, suitable,w el l .

la corbata., cravat, (neck)tie .

el corrah yard.

ccrrectamento, correctly.

el correo,mail ; u n do —s pout

correr, to run.

correspondor, to correspond,repay.

sortiente, current, present

every day.

cortar, to out.

cl cuel lo, neck, col lar .

creer, to be l ieve. think ; l ys locree l I should say so ! (ant.

—, los

(h e) -os, who (whom),which; cntl intermg., which.

is cual idad, qual ity.

any(one) at

al l , whatever .

cuando, when; cnh do inter

cnanto,- s, al l who, al l that

on s, w ith regard to;cul nto,

-s interrog., how

much (many) .

cubico,- s,cubic.

la cubiermdeck (d a ship)cubierto, p. .p qf cuhair.

outl pierda Vd. do not

la culpa, faul t;no osmis ls—

, it

is not my faul t;Vd. tiene la

cumpl ir, to fulfil ;— ocho afios,to be eight years old.

cuyo,—a, whose.

el chanclo, rubber overshoe,u

golosh.

”

la chaqueta, boy’s coat, jacket.

el cheque, check, draft.

chico,- a, smal l , l ittle .

cl chicharo (Span . pea.

chil eno,-a,Chil ean.

la chimenea, fireplace .

dado que, granted that.

dar 5263, to g ive ; a, to

face ; da la una (dan lss dos),it is striking one (two) ; de

comer , to feed; a conocer,

do, of, from, by, than.

deber, to owe, must ; debiera,should, ought to; debo,debit; do, must (according to opinion) ; osto so debea que, this is due to the fact

decir §2ti7, to say, tel l ; quorer

el dodal , thimble.

deducir, to deduce.

dejar , to l et, al low ; do, to

stop;no— do,not to fail to.

delante do, before.

demas, rest, others; pa lo

compartment.

derecho,- s adj .

, straight,right; derecho adv., straight

agreeable.

dosstar, to untie .

descanssr, to rest .

el doscanso, rest.

cl descuento,discount.

dosde, since,from; que,

from the time when, since ;luego, at once.

la desinoncia, ending .

el despacho, office .

despedirse (i) , to take l eave .

despot-terse (ie), to wake up,

después, afterwards, since ;do, que, after .

detal lar, to itemize.

dents do,behind.

290

enfermo, - s, il l , sick; cl en

fermo, la — s , the patient.

el onlace, union,marriage.

comangry with.

la onsalada, salad.

onsofisr, to teach, show .

ontondor (is), to understand.ontoro,

- a, entire.

la entrada, entrance, admission.

entrar on (o a), to enter (into),go (into), come (into) .

entre, between, among .

entregar, to hand, del iver .

enviar 5243, to send.

el envio, shipment (of goods) .equival ents, equival ent.

lent.

equivocarse, to bemistaken.

error (ye 5247, 1 , to err .la escalate, stairs , stairway.

escribir 5280, to write .

escrito (irr . p g) . of escri bir),

la espero, expectation.

osporar, to hope, wait.

osposo,—a, thick.

el esposa, la — s, husband, w ife.


la osquina,corner ; las cuatro — s,

exacto,—s, exact, correct.

excepto, except.

exceptuar 5243, to except.

exigir, to demand, insist on.

la oxpodicion, sending , shipping .

el oxtracto, extract, summary.

la factura, bil l .h ffl tl , lack, mistake; me hace

I lack, need.

fal ter ,to lack ; l e fal ta,he lacks;

poco w as para que so

la fanoga, 1 1 bushelstierra, 1 } acres.

— do

el ostado, state; Estados Unidos,

ostrochar, to press, clasp.

play, etc.) for the first time.

estudiar 5243, to study.

la ostufs, stove.

la etiqueta, etiquette; traje doevening clothes,

“dress

”

suit.

GENERAL VOCABULARY 291

la fechq date.

b ehar, to date.

el forrocarrl l , railway.

ol flol tro, fel t.

figursrso, toseem, appear .fijamonto,Wi th certainty.

la il ls, row .

el fogon, fireplace

oi free, evening coat, dress

el francés, la francoss, French

man, lfi'ench woman; fran

cos, —oss,French.

frsnco —a) do porte, postage

is fraso, phrase, sentence .

la frau ds, blanket.

mm (i°) r to 300“ (M r do) :

ol fronts, front; la forehead.

fresco,—a, fresh, cool .

el frio, cold; tengo I amcold;hace it is cold; frfo,

- a,

frito,—a (irr . p.p. of frefr ), fried.

la(s) fruta(s), fruit.

la gal l ina, hen.

el ganadero, cattle raiser, stock

ganas : tengo — do, l long

cl sus,susmm, to Spend: use up, take.

girar, to revol ve.

el giro, order , draft; postal ,post-office money order.

gordo,- s, stout, fat.

gracias, thanks, thank you.

cl grado, degree.

gri flco,- a, graphic, written.

el gramo, gramme.

grands, large, big, great.

el grano, grain.

griego,—e, Greek.

el grueso, bul k, thickness; grueso,

—a, bulky, thick.

guardar, to keep; cu m, to

292

la Habana, Havana.

babet §257,to have, there .

be ; hay. there is (are) ; In :

what is the matter?In habitati on, suite of rooms,

el habitsnto, inhabitant.

hacer 5266, to do, make;trio (color ), to be cold,

(warm) ; ol bsfil , to pack

the trunk; ejercicio, to

a week ago; hl game Vd. ol

la hacionds , large farm, planta

ol hacha f ., axe.

hal lar, to find;me hal lomojor ,I ambetter .

el hambro f ., hunger ; tengo

hosts, til l , to; que,until .

la hoctl ros, hectare about 2 }acres) .

el hecho, act, fact.

01 hermano,la— a,brother ,sister .

el hijo, la — a, son, daughter ; loshijos, children sons and

daughters) .el hilo, thread; (fine) l inen.

hipotético,- a, hypothetic.

hispsnoamoricano,—a,Spanish

la historia, history, story.

historico,—a, historic(al ) .

hizo,M . of hacer .la hojs, leaf .


lam -w h enbowler .

la bors, hour ; éqne os? what

it is time to (for ) .

el idioma, language.

la igl esia. church.

imperfecto, —a, imperfect.

importante, important.

el imports, amount, cost.los impresos, printedmatter .incl inarse, to bow ,be incl ined.inclnir , to include.

el inconveniente, impropriety; si

is infiofien, inflection.

Ing laterrs f ., E ng land.

you have any objection todoing so.

indefinido,—s, indefinite .

indicar, to point out, indicate.e] indicativo, indicative.

indie,—s, Indian.

el individuo, individual ,member.

294

la l lterg berth.

el l itro, l iter (a little "me than e

logn r, to suooeed (in) .

la longitud, length.

lam, 8000, then que.soon as ; haste farewel l

for a while ; desde at

cl lujo, luxury; de dc luxe,elegant.

la lune,moon ; hay (hace) the

el lanes, Monday.

la luz, l ight.

name is;{some se l lamaVd.?what is your name?

la l leve, key.

l l egar, to arrive, come .

l l evar, to carry, bring , wear .

l lorsr , to w eep, cry.

l lover (ue), to rain.

macho,mal e.

in madera, wood (for manufacture, building,

lamadre,mother .

cl mail ,maize, Indian corn.

mal , badl ylamal eta, val ise, (hand)bag .

mt lo. 4 » bad, POOP badl l f.esm to be “l a

lamama,mamma,mother .

mandsr, to command, order,

send — hecer e:guu eou ,

to have something done .

el m dq wmmand.

lam manner ;de —que, so

as, so that.

lammga, sleeve.

mnifestar (lo), to manifest,

lamano, hand.

m al o,-n, gentle, tame.

lamantece, lard, butter (inSpain) .

lamantequil l a, butter (in Span.

sweetened butter

lameflam, morning ; por lain the morning ; adm, to

el mar, or 1a —, sea.

marearse, to become seasick.Maris, Mary.

cl marido,husband.

mm m.,March.

mas, but.mi s, more, most, pl us; noque, only, no more than.

mascul ino, —a,mascul ine

mayom.,May.

la most.la

lamedia, stocking , hose .

mediante, by means of .la medicina,medicine.

el medico, physician,doctor.

GENERAL VOCABULARY

el mes,month.

lamesa, table, desk.

meter (en), to put (in or into) .

Mexico (or Mejico) m., Mex

ico, City of Mexico

el ml edo, fear ; tengofrightened.

long as.

Inminuscule, smal l l etter, lowercase letter .

el minuto,minute .

mismo, - n, same, se l f .lamired, hal f,middle.

lamada, fashion; de in fash

cl modo, manner, mode, mood,way; de

—que, so as, so

that; de do s — s, in two

ways.

el memento,moment; en este

lamoneda, coin .

montar, to ride ; a cabal lo,

bicicl eta, to ride a bicycle.

295

el monton, heap, pile .

el more,Moor .

mostn r (no), to show .

mudo, —e, dumb,mute.

el mueble, piece of furniture; los

el muel le, wharf, dock, pier .

el mundo, world.

nada, nothing ; no . not!

nadie, no one, nobody ; no

la nebl ina, fog .

necesario,—e, necessary.

necesita': (dc), to need.

new (lo).to deny

cl mozo, servant-boy, waiter .

el muehacho, la — e, boy, gir l ;

machining - e w muchl l imo

muche, - e,much (many). a

lot 0 adv., much, a

he works hard; me agrada

296

in, nor ;

is nieve, snow .

nhgm

el nlfie, la — o, smal l bey, smal lgir l ; child; m y very

el nlquol , nickel (metal ) .no, no, not.

dark) ; do at night; pot

(en) lo in the evening , at

nerteamerlcsne, 1 , (North)

la neticia, news (item) ; las — s,

do 61? when did you hear

la novedad, novelty, news; no

my an is w e“; “inwithout accident, al l right.

noviembre m., November .

nublado,-o, cloudy, overcast.

nuevo,- s, new ; 1,u hey do

what is the news?

la nuez, (E ngl ish) walnut.

0 0 0 0,

la obra, work (of l iterature,music,art,

octubre m., October .

FI RST SPANI SH COUR SE

ecupodo, -o, occupied, busy.

el elde, (inner) ear, hearing .

elr 5276, to hear.ejal i , woul d that, I wish he

(she, etc.) would.

ol er (huo $247, 2, to smel l .el ol fote,sense of smel l .

olvidar,to forget some ol vid6,

raphy.

ertografice, —o, orthop aphl c.

el otefio, autumn.

la oveja, ewe, sheep.

P

el padre, father ; les— s, parents.

W e to pay18 vi sita . page

cl psls, country.


el plscor,pleasure.

el plste, plate, dish.

la pluma, feather, pen; oodle

M —a fitfle. (9L) few ; in

do dinero, a l ittle money;— o ada , l ittle.

peder $270, to be able, can,ne puedomenes de hscor le, h prhnnm spfing .

I can’t he lp doing it. el prime, la — 0, cousin; [l imo

el poems, poem.

el pelve, dust; — s dentffrlces, o prindplar iZ43, to begin.

— s ps.ra les dientes, tooth

pondersl , of weight.

poner 5265, to put, put

set, lay (eggs) ; -se, to be el producto, product.

come, turn. el profesor, la— s, teacher, pre

pepularmente,popular ly.

nor. for. by. through. per”3

el programs.programprohibit , to forbid,p

rohibi t.

prometer, to preml se.book.

el porte, transportation, postage.

pronto. 4 .pamper. own: dc.

pedir (l ) prostsde, te ask thelean ef, berrew ; temsr prsstade, to borrow ;— atonci6n,

GENERAL VOCABULARY

(P .) n - quo besa su msne(sus pios), o quo su mane(sus pl es) boos.

- qno omechs su

que comi , that, for, than; cen80 that,m then.

que rel . prom, that, who

(ween ), which; ol (lo, 10,les, lss) who (whom) ,which.

i qué? what? i n apart

ipot why? l— l what,

what a, bow l

quebrsr (ie), to break; ndmere

quorer 5271 , to wish, war t;- o, te be fend of, l ike (a

person) ;yoquisiera, l shouldl ike to, I sheuld be glad te ;

cl queso, cheese.

quien.- os, quién.

- os into-roe .

who (whom) ;doqidemwhese.

whe (m)soever .a fort

ol qulntohhundrodwoight.

el reloj,clock,watch; domean,do pared, clock; do bel

aw ash tomsnd.

ol roddado, cold (disease) .

clrospoete dq with regard te .

d rospoto, respect; les— s, ro

ol rostoorsnt, reetam nt.

el roste, rost, remainder .ol resaltsdo, result.

moa ns- M it e

ol rom en, summary, résum6.m , te retire, take out.

h morondg bew .

rlco,.

- o, rich.

el rfo, rl vor .

”10.—a n d

rempor, to break, tear.lo ropa, clothes ; interior,

reto,- o, torn.

el rubf, ruby.

fi ance, -o, rustic; on e a is

FIRST SPANISH counss

hew to, esn; a -, namely,

to witzw ro m -o h ras I knew .

la su trerfs, tailor shop,“tai

lor98'”

sea (pres. eubj . of sor ) : yawhether it

secar, te dry.

m -mdry.

la ced, thirst; tengo I am

go on;— doroche, to go

straight ahead; équé tel

dgue Vd? hew are yeu getp

sal ir $274, to go out, comeout, leave, rise (oa ths sun) ;— a ls cal l e, te ge eut into

the street.

ssltsr, to jump (out), skip.

saludsr, to salute, bow te .

302 FIR ST SPAN ISH COURSE

be true of

sucesivamente, successively.

Ia suelo, sole (of a shoe) .el suelo, ground, floor .

suol to,- n, loose, singl e .

la sums, sum.

sumamente, greatly, exceed

la superflcio, surface .

“Pum p to beg (0 favor ) .

assume .

la suprosien, suppression, omis

supuesto: per

el our , south.

el surtido, supply.

Tel taboce, tobacco.

is tabla, board, plank.

la tabl il la, tableo, shing le.

te l , such, such a ; con que,

provided that , 1,u tel

(sigue)? how are you (get

murse.

tampoco, neither, nor ; no (ni )not (nor ) either .

tan, so .

tsnte (s), as (so) much (many) ;on que,whil e ;otro the

tardar, to delay;no tardare on

vol ver, it w il l not be long

is tarde,afternoon;per e en lain the afternoon ; ada , late .

la tat-ifs, scale of pr ices, fare.

(wooden) shing le .

tol efenear, to te lephone.

el tel egrams, telegram.

el toms, theme, written exarchs,

tomor, to fear .

e l temple, templ e, church.

toner 5258, to have ; que,to have to,must; tengo frfo(cal er , suede, I amcold

(warm, sl eepy. emtiene Vd.? what is the matter w ith you? no tengo

nada, there is nothing the

matter w ithme .

Teresa, Theresa.

torminsr , to end, terminate .

cl tém ine, term, expression.

el termometro, thermometer .cl terrene, land.

tihie,’

- a, lukewarm.

cl tiempo, time, tense, weathermuche a long time .

In tienda,shop,store . [of scissors.lss ti jeras,scissors ;mas— ,a pair

tinto,—a, rod (of w ine) .

el ,tfe, la— a, uncle, aunt.

cl‘

tire, throw , pul l ; cabal lo do

driving horse,draught horse.

la tin , chal k.

GENER AL VOCABULARY

el ten der,dron ing-table, dress

er .”

todavia, yet, sti l l

todo,—o, al l , every ; n ., every

thing ;— s les dies, every

day3PM_

r al together.

tomar, topor

take.

el tome, volume.

la tonelada, ten.

la tormento, storm.

trabajar, to work.el tl 'aboje, work.

traducir $278, to translate.traor 5277, to bring .

Ia tragedia, tragedy.

cl traje, suit (of clothes) .tronquil e,

- o, calm, tranquil .

el tranvia, street car, tramway.

tratsr do, to try (to), refer (to ) .

el tron, train.

el trige, wheat.

triguone, - s., dark-complexioned.

tristo, sad, g loomy.

tronar (no), to thunder .el truone, thunder .

u, or .

ul timo, - s, last (in a series) .la unidad, unity.

unit , to join, unite .

me,—o, one ;

— s, some .

user , to use, wear, wear out.

dtl l , useful .

Vla vaca, cow ; come do beef .Ias vocaciones, vacation(s) .

valor £273, to be worth.

el valor,worth, courage.

GI m , (drinking- )g l888.

el vocino, la —o, neighbor .

la vols, candle, sail .

venir 5264, to come ; is so

mana que viene, next week.

vs: 5279, to see; vesse, see .

e l verano, summer .

verbigrscia (Lat ), for instance.

el verbo, v erb .

la verdad, truth; are es verdad?e everdod? isn

’

t it so? l on

my, but I’m tired!

verdsdero,- o, true.

vordo, green.

table.

voriflcarse, to be held, occur .

el vestido, dress; l es — s, clothes.

vestirse (i ), to dress (ml eself) .la vez, time ; una once ; dos

veces, twice ; tres veces,

perat. of ir),we go, let us go.

el u p .i . steam, steamboat.If vara, yard Winches) .variabl e, variab l e, changeable.

t at-lar 5243, l .) vary;

— de, to

la variodad, variety; teatro do

nos veces, sometimes ; onde, instead e f ;otro—

,again;do on cuando, from timeto time ; hacer los veces do,to serve as ; rero rarely.

el vioje, trip, voyage;de ,trav

el viajore, la -o, traveler, pas

vicio,—s, old.

31m .Vigofcl vinsgre,v

mmr .

cl vine,wmo.

lem me

la vocal , vow el .

el volumen, volume.

volver (us ) 5245,4, to turn, re

to do something again;— se,

In vuel ta, turn, return ;est! do

he has returned, he is back;s — do cerree, by return

FI RST SPAN ISH COURSE

mail ; dsr ls —, to turn; dsr

ans —, te make a turn, re

ys, already, new , in due time,indeed;

store .

el zapotero, shoemaker, dealer inshoes .

el zspste, shoe — do gems(halo) , rubber ov ershoe,

comedy.


another, otro, - a.

answer v., contestar, responder ;

any,mm) (film) , “ a ; one,

alguien ; one (at al l ).cual (es)quiera.

anything, algo, al guna coca ; not

rarse ; it—s to me,me parece,

some figura.

appetite, apetito ; have an for,

appl e,manzana.

approval , In conformidad.

April , abril m.

Arab, cl 0 la. (imbe .

architect, arquitecto.

are ( a 100 square meters), area.

Argentine, argentino,- a.

arid, arido,- a.

arise, levantarse .

aroma, el aroma.

arrange, arreg lar .

articl e, articulo;

prenda dc vestir ;mamar .

artist, cl 0 la artista.

as, como, tan,pues; tan

como.

ask (a favor ), pedir (i) ,rogar (ue) ;(a question), preguntar ;

the loan of, pedi r prestado.

assure, asegurar ; be-d (that),

center (no) con (que) .at, u, an.

autumn, otofio.

awaken, despertarse (ie) .an , el hacha,f .

B

back (of chai r ), reap: a

dorso; be back, e.

bad,malo,- a; it is too

badly,mal .baggage, el pquipaie ;sala de eqmpaje .

bake, cocer (no) .balance (of account), saldo; thereis a in my favor , arroja un

sal do ami favor ; (an account) ,

bal cony (before a window ), e l balcon ; (in meater) gal eria 0 an

fit mtro.

bal d, cal vo, —a.

basement, sotano, subterraneo.

bath,bafio ; tub,bafio,bafiaderatina dc bafio (M en ) ;

take a banal-so; — room,cuarto de bafio.

bathe, hm .

be, estar 5260, ser 5259.

because,porque .

became, ponerse 5265.

bedficama; — room, see be

bedroom, dormitorio, alcoba

GEN ERAL VOCABULARY 307

beef, la came de vaca (o de res) .before prep. (position) , ante, delante de, en frente de ; (time)antes de ; cowl , antes que .

beg (a favor ), suplicar ,pedir.begin, empeaar (re), ,mncxpiar.behind,den

-6a de.

beloved, querido, —a, amado, - a.

below, debajo de.

berth, l itera, cama.

besides, edemas (de) .

better, major ; I am me hal lo

between, entre .

bil l , cuenta, factura ;change, l etra de cambio;fare, l ista (de platos) .

biscuit, bizcocho, gal l eta (Span.

Am) .bitter, amargo, - a.

black, negro,—a .

blanket, frazada,manta (Spain) .bl ind, ciego,

- a.

blouse, blusa.

boil , hervir (lo) ; — (food) cooer

(no) .book, l ibro.

boot, bota; riding bota de

born : be nacer . can poder 5270, know how)borrow , pedir (i) prestado, tomar saber 5268.

both, ambos, - as, los a las dos.

bottl e, bote l la .

bow, reverencia; v., incl inarse ;to, saludar a

box, caja; l ittl e caj l ta; (intheater) ,palco.

boy,muchacho ; l ittl e niflo;— ’

a

brazier, brasero.

Brazil , cl Email .bread, e l pan.

break a , quebrar (ie) .breaH ast, (ear ly) desayuno, (late)almuerzo; v.

, desayunarse, almorrer (ue) .

bright, claro, - a, vistoso, - a;

bring, traer 5277, l l evar .

broad, ancho, - a .

brother,hermano;— s and sisters,hermanos.

brush, cepil lo; v., o ace

building, edl ficio.

bul ky, grueso, —a .

bushel : l } — s, fanega.

business, negocio, comercio.

busy, ocupado,—a .

but,mas, pero, sino, no sino.

butter , mantequi l la (Span.

manteca de vaca (Spain) .

308

en d, tarjeta ; postal ) tarjetapostal ; visiting tarjeta de

v isita.

take tenga Vd. cuidado ; in

of , a (en) casa de ; for ,

Carol ine,Carol ina.

carpenter, carpmtero.

case, caso.

cash : for al contado;a ,cobrar,

cast a , arrojar, echar .

catalogue, catalogo.

catch v., coger ; cold, resfriarse .

cattl eraiser, ganadero.

cei l ing , techo.

cel ebrate, celebrar .

center, centro .

centime (100 — a I peseta), eén

centimeter, centimetro.

chal k, tiza, yeso, el g is (Mon ) .change, cambio, la variacién.

changeabl e, variable .

Charl es,Car los.

FI RST SPAN ISH COURSE

cheap, barato, -a.

check, el cheque.

chil l onnier , comoda.

child, nino, - a;verymuch ol amay nino, - a ; children - eona

choose, escoger .

Christian, cristiano, - a ; name,el nombre de bautismo o de pile .

0471 ,

church, ig lesia, templo.

city, la poblacion, la ciudad.

clasp (someone's hand) v., estro

class, la class ; — roorn, la claseSpanish clase de espaiiol .

classic, claaico, - a.

cl ean v.,l impiar ; adj, l impio, -a.

cl erk, el dependiente.

cl imate, el cl ima.

cl imb u,clock, e l reloj (de pared) .close cerrar (lo) .

cl othes, ropa.

cloudy, nublado,- a.

coal , cl carbon de piedra; oil ,

coat : frock l evita ;morning orbusiness amer icana, saeo;evening or dress e l frac;

chaqueta.

310 FI R ST SPAN 1 COURSE

secant, descuento.

dear, cero.- a, querido, - a;my

debit,debe .

deceive, enganar . divide, dividir .

December, diciembre m. do, hacer 5266; itdoes prettywel l,decimeter, decimetro. sirve bastante bien.

deck (of a ship), cubierta.

definite, determinado, - a, de ll.

nido,- a

degree, grado.

delay, tardanza; v., tardar (en) .del iver, entregar .

demand v.

, exig ir .

demonstrative, demostrativo, - a.

deny, negar (ie) .depart (from), partir (de) .dependent, subordinado,deprive (of ), privar .

depth, In profundidad.

“derby”(hat), bongo.

descend, bajar (se ) .desire v.

,desear .

desk, escritorio,mesa.

dessert, los postres.

die,mor ir (uc) .diet, dieta .

difl cul t, dificil .

difi culty, la dificul tad.

w .digitO

difigent, apl icado,- a.

dining car, cl cochecomcdor .

dining room, 01 comedo r .dinner , comida (pr incipal ) ;

comer .E

diploma, e l diploma. each, cada; one, cada uno.

direct v., dirigir . ear, oreja; inner oldo.

direction, la direccion—s, adver ear ly adj temprano, - a; adv,

tencias.

director, el director, la directors .

dirty, sucio,- a.

d isagreeabl e,desagradable.

dol lar, duro (Spain) , peso (Span.

Am) ; (of U . S. A .) cl dolar .

door, puerta.

dose, la dosis.

doubl e v., doblar .

doubt,duds ; v., dudar.

dozen, docena.

draft, giro, el cheque .

draught horse, cabal lo de tiro.

draw (out), sacar .

suit, el traje de etiqueta;v., vestir (i) ; onesel f , ves

tirse (i) .dressing tabl e, dresser,

”el to

drive v., ir a pasearse en coche o

automov il .driving horse, cabal lo de tiro.

dry, seco,- a,arido, - a ; v.

, secar .

duck (cloth), e l dril .dumb,mudo, —a.

GENER AL'

VOCABULARY

edition, la edici6n.

eflect v., efectuar.

egg, huevo

. o.

elegant, de lujo, elegante .

31 1

ou t: (one). toda - a :

elevator, clv soensor, cl elevador everybody, todo el mundo.

enclosed adj ., adjunto, - a; ada ,

encounter v., encontrar (no) .end v., terminar .

endure,durar, soportar .

Engl ish, ing lés,- esa .

enjoy, divertirse (ie) con; one

enough, bastante .

enter (into), entrar (en 0 a) .entire, entero,

- a, integro,- a.

equal ly, igualmente .

equival ent, equival ente ; be

etc., etc. et cetera) .

eved ng (before dark), la tarde ;(W dark) la noche; in the

a.

exact, exacto,- a.

exactly (0! time ), al punto.

excel l ent, exce l ento.

except, excepto .

excuse v., dispensar, excusar, per

exercise, ejercicio; book, cuspdemo; take hacer ejercicio;written cl tema.

emensive, caro, - a.

explain, expl icar .

express, expr' o ,—a; train, el

tren expreso o rapido.

extract, extracto .

eye, ojo.

farew el l , adios

Fface, cara; v., dar a.

fail : not to,no dejar de .

fair (as price, regular .

faithful , fiel ; your servant,S. S. S. su seguro servidor) .

fal l v., caer 5275.

far, l ejos ; howfarce, e l sainete .

812

tarmer, el agricultor ,

fashionabl e,domods .

tault, culpa; it is notmymla la culpa; it is your

tiene la culpa.

favor , cl favor ; your letter),

fear, miedo;

—,Vd.

v., tamer, tener

feed,dar de comer .feel , sentir (ie) ; Isiento débil .

felt, fiel tro.

pocos,—as, unos

—as)

fiel d, oampo.

an. l lenar ; (an order) , ejecutar.find, hal lar , encontrar .

finish v., ac-abar ; I have -cd,

ya acabé; it’s —cd, as acabo;

be a d speaking, acabo de

fire, fuego, la lumbre ; —place,

chimenea, (for cooking) el l o

gon;— wood, l efia .

fish (l iving ), e l pez ; (af ter beingcaught) pescado.

6st,putto.

fit v., caer 5275, sentar (ie) .

flesh, la came .

flexibl e, flexibl e.

floor, piso, suelo; ground

flower , is flor .

FI R ST SPAN ISH COURSE

forehead, la frente .

forward v.

to be — ed, a reexpedir .

fra ttlon, ndmcro quebrado.

freeze,helar (is), congelarse .

Fr enchman, iranoés; French

dul ce .

Friday, cl v iernes.

fried, l'

rito,- a.

asustarse,

central (to

estufa central ,caldera boiler) .furniture, losmuebles ;piece of

fol low .seguir (i) ; — lns.aisuiente .

fond (of ) ,aficionado, - a (a) ;beof (a person), quercr (a) 5271 .

feet, e l pie, (of an animal )pata.

fon parmm ;mi . porque, que,

fr ightened : to be

tener miedo.

from, do, desde .

front, el frentc; in of , en frente

de .

fruit, fruta(s) .

ful l , l l eno, - a.


somethh g made m du q mandar haeer alguna eoea.

head, cabesa;— ache, cl dolor de

from him? toudndo tuvo Vd. l f , si.

noticiaa du el ? il l , enfermo, - a; be ,cetarmalo,hearing, oldo.

heat, el calor .

hectare, hectares about 85 il lustrate, il ustrar .

acres) .

important, importante ; be imhen, gal l ina ; a is sitting, una

gal l ina esta ee luida.

H enry, Enrique. monumento .

here,aqul ,acd. in, en.

herewith, adjunto — a ) , con la

hide, cuero . include, comprender, incluir .

high,al to , i n price )subido.- a . indeed, sl , si, ya.

historid al ) , histérico, - a

history, historia .

hold v., cabe r 5269 ; how much l ndian, indio, -a ; — corn, el maindoes the box (,cuxinto cabs

en la caja ? be hel d, verificarse .

holy, santo ,- a .

home, casa ,a casa ; at—,en casa.

homel y, fee ,- a.

hope v. , esperar .

horse, cabal lo .

horseman, e l j inete .

hose,media .

hotel , cl hote l .

house, casa .

how, come ; interrog ., coma ;much (many), cuanto, - a —os,- as) ; pretty l xqué bonito,

- a l

instead of , en vez de.

hunger, el hambre (L ) .

hunting, casa ; go ir a casa. insure, asegurar .

inte l l igent, inte l l igente.

industrious, apl icado,- a.

infinitive, infinitive .

inflection, la inflexion.

inform,manifestar (ie) .inhaNt, habitat .

GE NERAL VOCABULARY

inverted. invertido, -a.

invitation, is invitaddn.

invite, invitu .

iron, hierro ; v.,

I tal ian, ital iano, - a.

Italy, l tal ia.

ins lam '

jumpjust : I have done it, aeabo debacor lo ;he had — spoken, aea

babn de ha! u .

I

keep, guardar, conservar ; on,

seguir (i) ; something, que

kerosene, petroleo.

kind, la clase, la especie ;adi., bone

dadoeo, —a, grato,—a .

kindness, la bondad.

kiss v., besar .

range or stove, cocina econo

kitten, gatito, —a.

3 15

h ee-brn cheq los celsonq los

M v., l lamas.tar

ro am— how (to).

L

l al tar ;1 me falta,

hat v., durar ; w , (d a series)ul timo, - a; month, el (mes)

poner. acostar (ue ) .lumperem -

s floiow eu

l eague, Iegua - obout 3 mi les, or6 kilometers) .

least,menor ; at al manos, porlo menos.

l es.pierna. (cf chai r. etc ) 01 pie

length, is longitud.

l ess adj .,menor ; ode ,manos.

l et, dejar, permitir us go,

316

— carrler, cartero

l ie o., mentir (is) ; — down, acos

tarse (ue) .

lift, el ascensor,ol elevador (Mex

l ight, In Inc; v., alumbrar; adj.

I —, nie gus

ta ; I should me gustaria,

l inen, hilo; bed ropa de cama.

l iquid, l iquido; adj., l iquido, —a

l ittl e, poco,—a ; a money, nu

poco de dinero; small ) pequeno,

- a, chico,- a

load v., cargar .

long s largo»- 8 ; b° delay) ,

tardar en ; it wil l not be — be

fore he returns, no tardara en

vol ver ; ado., as as,mientras(que) ;no — er,ya no.

look (at),mirar ; for, buscar ;outl l tenga Vd. cuidadol

lose,perder (is ) . [ton de.

lot : a of ,muchos, - as, anmonloud, al to,

- a.

love v., amar .

low, bajo, - a; (price) reducido, - a.


lu st re. e! equival e

lunch, almuerso ; v., almorsar (ue) .luxe : de de lujo.

madam, senor-a;my dearsenoramia.

main, pr incipd .

maize, el mais .

tuar ; one’s way,dirigirse a.

man, e l hombre .

,muy

m a d m an»

mark,signo;exclamation punto

de admiracion ; interrogationpunto de interrogacion; v.,mar

meal , comida.

meaning, significado.

measure,medida ; v., medir (i) .mmla came .

cine,medicina, remedio .

meet; o., encontrar (ue), conocer .

marri age, boda, el enlaee.

married, casado, - a.

Mary,Maria.

mascul ine,mascul ino, - a.

Master , (el ) se iiorito .

match, fosforo, ceril la o ceri l la

material , sl material .matter : what is the aque hay?

what is the with you? i qué

tiene Vd.? nothing is the

withme, no tengo nada.

VOCABULAR Y 319

pardon, el perdon.

pardon v., perdonar . l i er,‘

ai muel le .

parents, los padres. pil l , pildora.

parish priest, el curs.

part, In parte. (de almahada) .

pass o., pasar . Span. Am.) el anana 0 el ana

pity : it is a es (una) lastima.

Paul , Pahk . hoarse, toner lugar; v., colocar .

pay v., pagar ; attention, prestar plamt, el planets.

Am.)pen, pluma ; fountain plumaestilogrdfiea, la plumafuente o

la pluma de fuente (in most dSpan .

penknife, el cortaplumas.peopl e.pueblo, la gente

Pet s”9015

pl easure, gusto, e l placer .

perform: (a play, etc.) for the

performance, In funcion. pocket, bolsil lo, balsa (Men ) .

perfume, e l aroma, e l perfume .

period (in punctuation) , punto.

permit v., permi tir .

Phil ip, Fe l ipe . popularly, popularmente.

phonetic, fanétioo, -a. port left), e l babor .

position, is eolocacidn, la poaiaidn.

PM , Pym“play v-uusar (“en— bel l .meet aIn pe lota ; (on a musical instru

pleasant, agradable, simpdtieo, - a.

please, gustar, agradar ; it— s me

greatl y, me agrada o gusta

muche ; be kind enough to)hagama Vd. el favor de, sirvase

Vd.

post ofi ce, eorreo, casa de earreos;

pot, al la.

patata

(Span.

pound, l ibra;26 — s, arroba.

pour o., echar .

wi l l i e. rampa

present presentar ; adj., presente, actual ; month, e l 00rriente, el actual ; be (at),asistir (a) .

press v., estrechar .

pretty. bonito.- a. l indo, - a; adv

bastante .

principal ,director,- ora;adj .,prin

prize,premio.

tico (in university) .

crow n . 01mom s»

publ ish, publ icar .

bookdeal er (s), l ibraria general .

purse, balsa, el portamonedas.M poner i265; (in or into).meter (en) ; on (shoes), ealsar

Q

race, rasa.

rain v., l lover (ue) n ., l l uvia.

range modem cooking ao

eina economics, also estufa

(Men ) .rather, mas bien, major mcho,

°

bastante.

— room, sala

reader reading book), l ibro delectura.

reading, lectura; book, libro de

receipt, recibo.

reception“ recibo

FIRST SPANISH COURSE

w in em a mould ( —s

scissors, tijeras;a pair of — , tmas show v., mostrar (as), w ,

scrub (floors. kettles. fre

M w as).

aide, lado.

sideboard, el aparador .

seat, asiento ; (in theater) butaeav., sentar (ie) ; onesel f, be

see, ver 5279.

seem, figm'

arse, parecer ; it — s to

me, some figure,me parece.sing, cantar

sir , senor, cabal lero ;my dearsending , la expedicion.

sentence, la frase, la oracion.

September, septiembre m. sit (down), sentarse (ia) .site, sitio.

set v., poner 5265, sentar (ia) .settl e (on account), saldar .

sheet, sdbana.

shing le, el tejamanl o tejamanil ,tabl il la (de madam) .

shipment (of goods), envfo.

shoe. sonata ; hish bota ;

short, eorto, -a.

sleep, sueno; v., dormir (us) ;go tofal l a dormirse (na) .

cache dormito rio, el sleeping,. el puhmin (Mam) ; — room,

sl eepy : be tener suefia.

smel l (sense of ol fato , odor)el olar ; v., oler (hue

snow, la nieve ; v., nevar (ia) .1 0. asi. tan; u . that. do

manera (modo) que ; much- a. (tantos.- as) :

that than) . comm; in 't

GENER AL VOCABULAR Y ' 323

l t— 7 1no eovudad7he dld M ammal -ate.

em el jabdn: my 05. madame) . perm :l ech el cd eefin.

“ al so“. Wm , (d i ce!) plants. (d a M ) M m el vw or

m alclm (dsdn) . - s ; pl n d

“ 9 01 30111615

m edu eg a vem almmn veoes. M u , para-

, dejar de.

m

m pronw ; u— u , luego que ;

soul . el alma f . mica, estufa (Ma ) .

-

;itum .

hum ,M da la una, dan las

m im o,- s ; — d l u , la claee

de espaflol ;— m n ,espafioh .

M habh r. m m p g el o h eetu

M W . -(tim) pwW ' : Ww

“W oo, la subacripcidm.

w ed (in). 1m

M u ch q tal .

starboard ( m , el o ln u flcar.

WWW ) . 01We.

GENERAL VO-"ABULAR Y

M ande la“ .

M ora n )

warn : ba ls am —, ca muy

m a d am .

woul d that, ajal l (que) . W ).menorM la juventud.

“M u sl im-q ua gmd u

d ab a— m a nna.

Y

M d m al fl arfl - al inchu ) .

nuevo; achoel —, cun o; be

elm- d el t cumpl ir ocho

m l .

INDEX

The numbers refer to sections unlw . wt.

a : w lth datl ve. 67 ; with aocusatl ve.68; s + sl - l l . 69.

scabs do. 91 ; sn u bs (w ho) do,XXIV. E xm. ; ”M a m bo,

Ace‘s-ative case. use 01 a, 68.

apocopation. 179; pos ition, 34.

180: ap eement. 87. 38. 181

oommfison, of nation

al ity .

Adv erbs. 222 : compat ison,

186.

Agreement of subject and verb. 223 .

any, 2 15, a.

aoul and sch,

Arithmetlcs l signs. 230.

Augmentativ es. 229. 230.

185.

bathtub, XI . E xcr .

Be l ieving or saying , v erbs of . 157.

bu tter . XVI , E xer .

by, 1 30.

Cardinal numerals. 2 17.

cosine, XL IX. E xer .

caste l lano. 100. b.

Changu in spe l l ing . 1 14, 239 fol .

classroom, pages 24. 27. footnooes.

coal , X IV, E xer .

Commands. 1 47. 148.

Adverbs.

A'Wl 0 M M

Cond ' tiow ‘ l v ‘fl u do. 160.

Conj v n l l am .

W ar , 1‘9.

u se (IN C 1 1 0, XX“ 1‘"

4g .

w h o» r s . c.

cumpl ir , Xx x i V. m ar .

aspen : tut. ind.. page 1 3 1 , foot»

W and s“ : use of . 72. 7d.

Dative case. 67; 0 1 sopm tion.1 70.

Days of the month. 1 20.

Days of the week, 1 24.Defecti v e Verbs. 281 .Definite article, M 1 : feminine al .201 , 1 ; lo, 201 . 2 ; use of def . art.,

a

noun med in apposition w ith a

personal pronoun. 1 99.

dejsr. 148. a ; XXX l V. E xer .

Demonstratives. 59-02, 2 10.

digo one al . XXI V. E xer .

Diminutives. 229. 23 1 .

Distr ibutive construction. 108.

don. 103. a .

donde. 226, 3.

Doubting or deny ing . verbs of.

1 56. 2 .


Prepodtions: with infinitive. 88;

retained in Spsnhh. 156. a:

Present participles, 140. 141 .

Progred ve forms of verbs. 142.

Pmnominal adjectiva . 2 15.

tamer fut. ind., page 1 31 , foot

pap 224. footnote .

tenor and babor. 13 1 ; tence frfo.

footnote . XXI I I . E ssa ; tenor -t um of

per t of body , 107, b.

R eciprocal pronouns. 198.

M exive pronouns. 77, 1 92, 195,197.

R e lative pronouns. 2 1 1 ; uses of, ticket. XXXVI I I , E ast .

2 12. “w as alas trssm m.

a lso07.

n, 226, 1 .

8. S., page 199, footnote .

saber and conocer. 1 30. un(o) . - s, 64.

schools. terms used, page 1 5.

van es s, 86.

aster, —ors. etc., 103. b.

volver a. 91 , 283.

l l . intensive. 222 , 3.

due. 226, 2.

sleeping ear , XXXI X, Em . footnote.

sl ippers, XXXVI . E xer . whose 56.

wi l l and shoul d. 109.

some. 2 15. a.

ow n . page 1 54, footnote.

M XV. E x¢-r .

152. 156. 1 57, 158; in adjectival clauses, 161 ; in sdverbisl

cl auses, 165 ; in conditiorfl elsmss.166 ; stem of pres. tense. 155 ;

import -tense, 1 59, 100: fat ten”.

170. 171 ; with,cielo. 167; in

not that continues from the pu t

into the present. 1 15 ; imperf.and pret. ind., use of . 94,

fut. and eond 1 16- 1 18, 1 2 1

fut. and cond. of probabil ity, 12 .

M 1 88.

spanish course - forgotten books

Documents